CONTRACT NO: T-12-16
ELECTRICAL
DATE: August 2012
.
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
Division 16
2011-03-15
Page 1 of 1
CONTRACT NO: T-12-16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DATE: August 2012
SECTION NO.
16010
16015
16016
16020
16031
16050
16060
16122
16130
16131
16136
16141
16146
16221
16263
16271
16289
16330
16335
16339
16345
16346
16414
16441
16505
16620
16670
Division 16
2011-03-15
Page 1 of 1
SECTION NAME
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
STAGING AND TRANSITION
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
INSPECTION AND TESTING
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
GROUNDING
WIRES AND CABLES 0-1000V
RACEWAYS
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
CABLE BUS FEEDER SYSTEM
WIRING DEVICES
ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATION
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5Kv motors
DRY TYPE TRANFORMERS UP TO 600V PRIMARY
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
27.6 kV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
TEMPORARY AND TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
STATION BATTERY & CHARGER SYSTEM
4160V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES – FUSED AND UNFUSED
PANELBOARD BREAKER TYPE
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 16
GENERAL
General
.1
These general instructions are intended to supplement and
not to replace the requirements of Division 1 – General
Requirements.
.2
The requirements of this Section apply to, and form part of,
all Sections of Division 16 – Electrical.
.3
The Specifications are divided into Divisions of Work and
any Division may consist of the Work of more than one
Subcontractor. The responsibility as to which
Subcontractor provides labour, materials, equipment, and
services required to complete the Work rests solely with
the Contractor.
.4
These Specifications define the requirements of equipment
to be provided as part of this Contract, including the supply
of the following major items to make up the new electrical
system and the system transition requirement:
.1
Incoming 27.6kV hydro feeders are configured in
basic primary selective system and are required to
be reconfigured to two source primary system.
.2
One (1) 5 kV Secondary Switchgear with 3,000 kW
standby diesel generator set, ATS and the
associated distribution system. This will be used for
transition from the existing system to the new
system.
.3
Three (3) new Standby Diesel Generators each
2000 kW complete with generator panels and
energy management system.
.4
Two new 5kV VFDs for Pump Nos. 2 and 5.
.5
Two new motors for existing Pump Nos. 1 and 6.
.6
Four new soft starters for existing Pump Nos. 1, 3, 4
and 6.
.1
The requirements of this Section apply to and form part of
all sections of Division 16 – Electrical.
.1
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of
Canada (EEMAC)
.2
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.3
Institute of the Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
.4
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Related Sections
References
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
1.4
1.5
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 16
.5
Canadian Gas Association (CGA)
.6
Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)
.7
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.8
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
.9
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 0 General Requirements - Canadian
Electrical Code - Part 2
.2
CAN3-C235 Preferred Voltage Levels for AC
Systems, 0-50,000 V
.10
The Contractor shall comply with the latest editions of CSA
C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code - Part 1, Ontario Electrical
Safety Code (OESC) and Bulletins, and local codes and
requirements which govern the installation. Where these
regulations conflict, comply with the most stringent
requirements.
.11
The Contractor shall comply with latest editions of the CSA
Certification Standards and Bulletins.
.1
Perform a complete installation in accordance with CSA
C22.1-06 except where specified otherwise in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Construct overhead and underground systems in
accordance with CSA C22.3 No.1-1993 except where
specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.
.3
Abbreviations for Electrical Terms: Conform to CSA
Z85-Latest Edition.
.4
Ontario Electrical Safety Code and all bulletins.
.5
Building Code of Ontario, O.Reg 413/97, Latest Revision.
.6
Perform all grounding in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.
2.
.7
IEEE 519 for total harmonic distortion, Latest Revision.
.1
The following are definitions used in Division 16 Electrical. Refer also to Division 1 – General
Requirements.
.1
Inspection Authority means agent of Ontario
Electrical Safety Authority which has jurisdiction,
over construction and safety standards associated
with any part of electrical site work.
.2
Supply Authority (Power Stream Inc.) means
electrical power company or commission
Codes and Standards
Definitions
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 16
responsible for delivering electrical power to the
Site.
Electrical Code or Code means the Ontario
Electrical Code in force at the Site.
CEC means latest edition of the Canadian Electrical
Code.
Design Requirements
.1
Operating voltages shall be within those defined in CAN3C235.
.2
Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices
and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz, within
normal operating limits established by CAN3-C235.
Equipment must be able to operate in extreme operating
conditions established by CAN3-C235, without damage.
.3
Verify before energization that equipment supplied under
this contract or by the Region is compatible with related
electrical power supply system.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the
lump sum price for Section 16010 – Electrical General
Requirements as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid
Form.
.1
Shop Drawings
.1
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings,
catalogue cuts and descriptive literature as
described in Section 01300 – Submittals. Include the
following:
1.
Layouts of equipment and dimensional
drawings, including weights.
2.
Layouts of switchgear, generator enclosure,
master control panel and control station
components.
Schematic and wiring diagrams indicating
3.
wire and terminal numbers, including 120
VDC and 24 VDC battery systems.
4.
Time - current characteristics and setting
range data of protective devices in
switchgear, panelboard.
5.
Interconnection wiring diagrams. Include
equipment supplied under work of other
Sections, by Regions or under separate
contracts.
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
6.
1.9
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 16
Bills of Material.
.2
Record Drawings
.1
The Contractor shall include with record drawings, a
list of motors indicating motor or equipment
numbers, service description, nameplate voltage,
power (kW) and current, size of overload and
protection device rating for each motor.
.2
The Contractor shall indicate on record drawings,
exact dimensioned locations of buried services and
embedded or concealed conduits in floors and
masonry walls.
.3
Where cable trays and lay-in ducts are not detailed,
the Contractor shall submit scaled and dimensioned
record layout drawings of runs.
.3
Electrical Systems Diagrams
.1
The Contractor shall submit a grounding system
single line diagram. Clearly indicate points of
connection to grounding electrodes.
Demonstration
and Training
.1
Instruct the Region’s personnel in the operation, care and
maintenance of equipment. Perform demonstration and
training in accordance with Section 01820 –
Demonstration and Training.
.1
Operating voltages: in accordance with CAN3-C235-83.
.2
All motors, electric heating, control, and distribution
devices and equipment shall operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz
within the normal operating limits established by the above
noted standard. The equipment shall operate in the
extreme operating conditions established in the above
standard without any damage to the equipment.
.1
Submit to the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) and Supply
Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications
for examination and approval prior to commencement of
work.
.2
Pay associated fees for review, permits and inspection.
.3
The Consultant will provide drawings and specifications
required by Electrical Safety Authority at no cost.
1.10 Voltage Ratings
1.11 Permits, Fees
and Inspection
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 16
.4
Notify the Consultant of all changes required by the
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) prior to making the
changes.
.5
Upon completion of the Work, provide Certificates of
Acceptance from the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) to
the Consultant.
.6
Arrange for inspection of all Work by applicable authorities
having jurisdiction over the Work (ESA, Power Stream
Inc., or TSSA). On completion of the Work, provide the
final unconditional certificate of approval to the Region.
.7
Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the
applicable CSA Standards, the requirements listed in
subsection 1.3, and codes and standards listed in
subsection 1.4 of this Section. These codes and
regulations constitute an integral part of these
specifications. In case of conflict, the codes take
precedence over the Contract Drawings. Otherwise follow
the standards established by the Contract Drawings and
specifications.
.8
Before starting any Work, submit the required number of
copies of drawings and specifications to the ESA. Comply
with any changes requested as part of the Contract, but
notify the Consultant immediately of such changes for
proper processing of these requirements. Prepare and
furnish any additional drawing details for information as
may be required.
.1
The Contractor shall submit installation and
energization certificates from manufacturers of
transformers, switchgear, bus duct, variable
frequency drive systems, motor control centres,
power panel boards, luminaires, emergency power
systems, control systems and life safety systems.
.2
The Contractor shall submit electrical equipment or
system warranty certificates.
.3
The Contractor shall report motor full load amps,
type and size of overload heaters installed, breaker
trip settings, fuse ratings and sizes of fuses in
control circuits.
.4
The Contractor shall report circuit insulation
resistance.
The Contractor shall report on coordination of
.5
protective devices, including recommended and final
field setting data and certified field test data.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 16
1.12 Materials and
Equipment
.1
Provide all materials and equipment in accordance with
Section 01600 – Material and Equipment.
.2
All equipment and material shall be CSA certified. Where
there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not
CSA certified, the Contractor shall obtain special approval
from the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA).
.3
Factory assemble all control panels and component
assemblies.
.1
Coordinate the electrical requirements of motors,
equipment and mechanical Work with concerned
disciplines and ensure the electrical system is appropriate
controls.
.2
Complete all electrical and control wiring for all equipment
specified in Division 11 – Equipment, Division 15 –
Mechanical and Division 13 – SCADA and Instrumentation
1.13 Electric Motors,
Equipment and Controls
1.14 Finishes
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by the application of
a rust resistant primer on the inside and outside, and a
minimum of two coats of finish enamel.
.1
Paint outdoor electrical equipment “equipment
green” finish in accordance with EEMAC Y1-2-1979.
.2
Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures
light grey in accordance with EEMAC 2Y-1-1958.
.2
Clean and touch up any surfaces of shop-painted
equipment which have been scratched or marred during
shipment or installation, to match the original paint.
.3
Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks
and fastenings in order to prevent rusting.
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows:
.2
Nameplates:
.1
Lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, white
face, black core, mechanically attached with self
tapping screws.
.2
Do not use self adhesive nameplates.
1.15 Electrical
Equipment and Panel
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
.3
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 7 of 16
Use rivets and/or nuts and bolts where access may
conflict with a protruding screw point.
.3
Nameplate lettering sizes unless otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents:
1.
Switchgear
main nameplate: 25 mm
individual components: 8 mm
control devices, indicators: 3 mm
2.
Control Panels
main nameplate: 25 mm
individual devices: 3 mm
3.
Miscellaneous System Panels
main nameplate: 13 mm
individual devices: 3 mm
4.
Panelboards: 13 mm
5.
Bus Ducts:
13 mm
.4
Wording on all nameplates shall be approved by the
Consultant prior to manufacture.
.5
Allow for an average of twenty-five (25) letters per
nameplate.
.6
Identification shall be in English.
.7
Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes shall
indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.
.8
Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment
being controlled and voltage.
.9
Terminal cabinets, junction, and pull boxes: indicate
system and voltage.
.10
Transformers: Indicate the capacity, and the primary and
secondary voltages.
.11
Issue nameplates lists, for review prior to manufacture.
.12
Lighting panels: Plates shall be mounted on inside of door,
typical identification shall be "Lighting Panel 'A' 120/208 V,
1 phase, 3 wire".
.13
Disconnect switches and starters: Plates shall be mounted
externally on switch box cover. Typical identification shall
be "Pump No. 1, 575 V, 3 phase".
.14
Plates shall be installed after all painting has been
completed and shall be secured with self-tapping screws
except on the inside of panel doors where gluing will be
accepted.
.15
Have the manufacturers' nameplates affixed to each item
of equipment showing the size, name of equipment, serial
number and all information usually provided, including the
voltage, cycle, phase, horsepower, etc., and the name of
the manufacturer and its address. Ensure that all
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 8 of 16
stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is
perfectly legible. Do not paint over nameplates and where
apparatus is to be concealed, attach the nameplate in a
location on the equipment support or frame which is
unobstructed and clearly visible.
.16
Identify all equipment with the corresponding remote
controls.
.1
Labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is
installed.
.1
As specified in the Contract Documents and to meet
requirements of the Electrical Safety Authority and the
Consultant.
.2
Decal signs, minimum sized 175 mm x 250 mm.
.3
Protect exposed live equipment during construction in
order to ensure the safety of personnel.
.4
No exposed live parts are acceptable. In unavoidable
circumstances during construction, notify the Consultant.
.5
Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 600 VOLTS", or with the
appropriate voltage in English.
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying
markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on
both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch
circuit wiring.
.2
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3
Colour code: Refer to York Region Design Guidelines:
Section 12A – Wiring and Cabling Tagging including as an
appendix.
.4
Control wiring to have same tag at both ends.
.1
Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be
suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.
1.16 Manufacturers and
CSA Labels
1.17 Warning Signs
1.18 Wiring Identification
1.19 Wiring Terminations
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 9 of 16
1.20 Single Line
Electrical Diagrams
.1
Provide single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass as
follows:
.1
Electrical distribution system: locate in main
electrical room.
.2
Electrical power generation and distribution
systems: locate in power plant rooms.
.2
Drawings: 600 mm x 600 mm minimum size.
.1
Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum
150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes.
.2
Change the location of outlets at no extra cost or credit,
provided that the distance does not exceed 3,000 mm from
the original location, and this information is provided to the
Contractor before the installation of the outlet.
.3
Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate
disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine
rooms on the latch side of door.
.1
The mounting height of equipment is from the finished floor
to the centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated
otherwise in the Contract Documents.
.2
If the mounting height of equipment is not specified or
indicated in the Contract Documents, verify it with the
Consultant before proceeding with installation.
1.21 Location of Outlets
1.22 Mounting Heights
.3
Install electrical equipment at the following heights unless
indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Local switches: 1200 mm.
.1
.2
Wall receptacles:
1.
General: 450 mm.
2.
Above top of continuous baseboard heater:
200 mm.
3.
Above top of counters or counter splash
backs: 175 mm.
4.
In mechanical rooms: 1400 mm.
.4
Panelboards: as required by Ontario Electrical Safety
Code or in accordance with the layouts on the Contract
Drawings.
.5
Telephone and interphone outlets: 300 mm.
.6
Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1200 mm.
.7
Disconnect switches: 1400 mm.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 10 of 16
1.23 Load Balance
.1
Measure the phase current to panelboards with normal
loads (lighting) operating at the time of acceptance. Adjust
branch circuit connections as required in order to obtain
best balance of the current between the phases and
record any changes.
.2
Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer
taps to within 2 percent of the rated voltage of the
equipment.
.3
Submit, upon completion of the Work, a report listing
phase and neutral currents on panelboards, and dry-core
transformers and motor control centres, operating under
normal load. State the hour and date on which each load
was measured, and voltage at time of test.
.1
Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.
Sleeves Passing Through Concrete: Plastic, sized for free
passage of conduit, and protruding a minimum of 50 mm.
.2
If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors,
remove them before conduit installation.
.3
Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or
plastered over, neatly and close to building structure so
furring can be kept to minimum.
1.24 Conduit and
Cable Installation
1.25 Ambient Environment
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
supply equipment enclosures, boxes, electrical materials
and products suitable for ambient environment of the
following area:
Equipment
Area
Gen. Classification
Enclosure
Type
1. Outdoor Areas
Wet
EEMAC 3R
1.26 Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct and pay for the following tests:
.1
Power generation and distribution system including
phasing, voltage, grounding, and load balancing.
.2
Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
.3
Lighting and its control.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 11 of 16
Motors, heaters and associated control equipment
including sequenced operation of systems where
applicable.
Systems: communications
Instrumentation.
Variable Frequency Drives
.2
Furnish the manufacturer's certificate or letter confirming
that the entire installation as it pertains to each system has
been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
.3
Insulation resistance testing.
.1
Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V
with a 500 V instrument.
.2
Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment
with a 1,000 V instrument.
.3
Check resistance to ground before energizing.
.4
Carry out tests in the presence of the Consultant.
.5
Provide instruments, meters, equipment, and personnel
required to conduct tests during, and at the conclusion of,
the Work.
.6
Submit all test results for the Consultant's review and
continue to test and submit test results until the Consultant
is satisfied with results of testing.
.1
The Contractor shall arrange for manufacturers' plant
inspection by the Consultant, where indicated in the
Contract Documents or required for verification of shop
drawing submittal contents.
.2
The Contractor shall inform the Consultant of
manufacturing progress upon request.
.3
The Contractor shall not construe action taken as a result
of factory inspection as final acceptance.
.1
Ensure that all circuit protective devices such as
overcurrent trips, relays, and fuses are installed to required
values and settings in accordance with the short circuit
and coordination studies.
.1
The Region and Region's representatives shall have the
privilege of trial usage of the electrical system or parts
1.27 Source Quality Control
1.28 Co-ordination of
Protective Devices
1.29 Trial Usage
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 12 of 16
thereof for the purpose of testing and verifying operational
procedures.
.2
Trial usage by the Region shall not relieve the Contractor
of any responsibility because of trial usage.
.3
Trial usage shall not be construed as acceptance by the
Region.
.1
The Contractor shall provide to the Consultant for review a
Harmonics Study of the overall electrical system complete
with measured Harmonic distortion levels for both current
and voltage. The study should identify the Harmonic
distortion levels present in all orders. The point for this
measurement shall be point of common coupling unless
noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. Carry out the
Harmonic Study for plant operation under normal and also
under standby power under specified load conditions.
Testing for Harmonics shall be performed according to
IEEE 519 by a company approved by the Region.
.2
Any recommendations identified in the Harmonics Study
that are required in order to satisfy IEEE 519 are to be
implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Region.
.1
The Contractor shall provide to the Consultant for review a
short circuit and co-ordination study of the overall electrical
system of the project with the MCC shop drawings. The
shop drawings for equipment in this division shall not be
reviewed without the short circuit and co-ordination study.
.2
The study data shall be presented in tables and on
composite charts and shall include but not be limited to the
following:
Maximum available short circuit current of systems.
.1
.2
Maximum available ground fault current of systems.
.3
Feeder cables thermal short circuit damage curve.
.4
Primary fuse to power the transformer.
.5
Power transformer thermal short circuit damage
curve, 3 phase, phase to ground.
.6
Main secondary 600 volt system circuit breakers.
.7
Largest 600 volt moulded case distribution breaker
and characteristics.
.8
Largest distribution transformer thermal short circuit
damage curve.
1.30 Harmonic
Testing/Analysis
1.31 Coordination Study
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 13 of 16
Maximum available fault current, 3 phase and phase
to ground for the 600 volt system.
Main 120/208 volt breaker and characteristics.
Largest 120/208 volt distribution breaker and
characteristics.
Maximum available fault currents, 3 phase and
phase-to-ground for the 120/208 volt system.
Maximum available fault current RMS symmetrical
at each panel.
Establish the required settings for all ground fault
relays.
Diesel engine generator set operating procedures
and breakers characteristics.
Co-ordination Study to be performed by a company
approved by the Region. The report shall be sealed
by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the
Province of Ontario.
1.32 Site Tests by Contractor
.1
All equipment and electrical systems which are provided
under this Division shall be performance tested for
electrical and mechanical defects and all defects and
adjustments identified in the performance tests shall be
rectified and all other adjustments shall be made by the
Contractor prior to requesting inspection by the
Consultant.
.2
Submit original copies of letters from the manufacturers of
auxiliary systems indicating that their technical
representatives have inspected and tested the respective
systems and are satisfied with the methods of installation,
wiring, interface with existing or new interface equipment
and operation.
.3
Insulation resistance tests shall be performed for all wiring
and equipment installed under this Division. Insulation
resistance tests shall be performed with a 500V megger
instrument for equipment up to 350V and with a 1000V
megger instrument for 350 - 600V circuits and recorded in
log book for reference. Lighting and power circuit feeders
shall be meggered and the insulation resistance between
live parts and ground shall not be less than that specified
in Table 24 of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code. During
the performance of the test the neutral conductor shall be
disconnected from the ground and reconnected
afterwards.
.4
Conduits or ducts which are required to be installed but left
empty shall be tested for clear bore using a ball mandrel of
approximately 85 percent of the conduit or duct inside
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 14 of 16
diameter. Any conduit or duct which rejects the ball
mandrel shall be cleared at no additional cost to the
Region. These tests shall be witnessed by the Consultant.
Three days notice shall be given prior to testing.
.5
Single phase loads shall be connected so that there is the
least possible imbalance of the supply. Common neutral
shall be used for maximum 3-1 phase circuits, each circuit
on a different phase.
.6
Furnish labour, materials, instruments and bear all costs
for tests as requested by the Consultant.
.7
Conduct and pay for tests of the following:
.1
Field wiring to all transmitters and field devices
.2
RPU I/O's, transmitters, Field Devices - Calibration
.3
Variable Frequency Drives
.8
Carry out tests in presence of the Consultant. Give 3
Working Days notice of proposed tests.
.9
Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel
required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of
project.
.10
Submit two (2) copies of test results for the Consultant's
review in addition to copies included in Maintenance Data.
.1
The Contractor shall test and check electrical and
instrumentation systems for correct operation and
compliance with statutory and regulatory authority
requirements.
.2
The Contractor shall perform tests in presence of
Consultant. Log, tabulate, sign and include test results in
Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions.
1.33 Tests by Contractor
.3
The Contractor shall test the following systems:
.1
4160 V switchgear, including cabling for correct
phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.
.2
Standby generators
.3
Communications, control and instrumentation.
.4
The Contractor shall conform to the testing
requirements of Section 01810 – Equipment
Testing and Facility Startup
.4
The Contractor shall supply instruments, meters,
consumable parts (such as fuses) and equipment. The
Contractor shall arrange for qualified personnel to conduct
tests.
.5
The Contractor shall observe field painting of electrical
equipment or raceways.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 15 of 16
1.34 Fire Transits
.1
All cable trays, conduits etc. transitioning through building
walls to be sealed with a one (1) hr fire rated caulking or
fire transit.
.2
Fire transit to be ULC listed.
.1
Comply with Section 01740 – Cleaning.
.2
Before energizing any system, inspect and clean all the
inside of switchgear, MCC, etc to ensure that they are free
from dust and debris.
.3
At time of final cleaning, clean lighting reflectors, lenses,
and other lighting surfaces that may have been exposed to
construction dust, dirt and other debris.
.4
Clean all polished, painted and plated work brightly.
.5
Remove all debris, surplus material and all tools.
.1
The use of permanent electrical system for temporary
construction service shall be only with written permission
of the Consultant.
.2
Maintain at the Site, at all times, qualified personnel and
supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting,
supervising, and testing of projects of a comparable nature
and complexity.
.3
Expedite the Work as follows:
.1
Continuously check and expedite the delivery of
equipment and materials.
.2
If necessary, inspect at the source of manufacture.
.3
Continuously check and expedite the flow of
necessary information to and from all parties
involved.
.4
Inform the Consultant promptly where information is
required.
.4
The Work of Division 16 shall be coordinated with the
Work of other Divisions in such a manner so as not to
interfere with other Work. In areas where the ducts, pipes,
wiring, and equipment for other Sections will be installed in
proximity to pipes, wiring and equipment pertaining to this
Division, cooperate and coordinate with Subcontractors
and Other Contractors to ensure that all pipes, ducts,
wiring, and equipment are installed in the locations that
best meet the requirements of the Region in a way that
1.35 Cleaning
1.36 Execution
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16010
2006-08-30
Page 16 of 16
ensures their proper operation in accordance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications.
.5
Equipment, conduit, etc., installed but not coordinated with
the work of Other Contractors and Subcontractors shall be
relocated as directed by the Consultant without extra cost
to the Region.
.6
Install equipment, conduits, and cables in a workmanlike
manner to present a neat appearance and to function
properly to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install any
exposed conduit runs parallel and perpendicular to
building planes. Install conduit so that they are concealed
in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in
unfinished areas. Install exposed systems neatly and
group them to present a neat appearance.
.1
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
Section 01640 – Manufacturers’ Services.
.2
Do not combine testing and startup with training. Testing
and startup time shall not be used for manufacturers’
warranty repairs.
.1
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
Section 01430 – Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.37 Manufacturer’s Services
1.38 Operation and Maintenance Data
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 8
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Division 1 – General Requirements
.2
Division 16 - Electrical
.1
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes codes and
standards and all amendments thereto.
.1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
(IEEE):
1.
IEEE 242, Recommended practice for Protection
and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial
Power Systems.
2.
IEEE 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial
and Commercial Power System Analysis.
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.
ANSI C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements
for Liquid- Immersed Distribution, Power, and
Regulating Transformers.
2.
ANSI Std.80 - Guide for Safety in AC Substation
Grounding
3.
ANSI Std.837 – IEEE Standard for Qualifying
Permanent Connections Used in Substation
Grounding
.3
CSA Standard C22.41 Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16015 – Electrical Systems Analysis as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
References
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
.1
Shop Drawings: Provide five copies of the following studies in hard
cover, three-ring binders:
.1
Ground Grid Design, indicating touch and step voltage
.2
Short circuit study and Arc Flash protection
.3
Protective Device Coordination Study: submit prior to
submission of transformer and switchgear and MCC
drawings. Drawings will not be reviewed prior to coordination study.
.4
Arc Flash study
.5
Load flow and power factor correction study.
.6
Harmonic Analysis Study for plant operation under normal
and emergency power.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 8
Quality Assurance
.1
Ground Grid Design, Short circuit and protective device
coordination studies to be prepared by a professional electrical
engineer registered in Ontario.
.2
Short circuit, protective device coordination studies and arc flash
study shall be prepared by one of the following or an approved
equal
.1
Rondar Engineering and Technical Services
.2
G.T.Wood Company Limited
.3
K.Teck Electro Services
.4
Cutler Hammer Engineering Services
.1
The complete ground grid design and short circuit study including
arc flash levels according to the equipment selected by the
Contractor must be submitted and reviewed before the Consultant
will approve shop drawings for switchgear, 5kV switchboard, 600
V Motor Control Centre, motor starters, cables and equipment for
incoming and outgoing service.
.2
The short circuit and protective device coordination and arc flash
studies shall be updated prior to Substantial Completion of the
Work. Utilize characteristics of as-installed equipment and
materials.
.1
Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be
identical to the equipment and component titles shown on the
Contract Drawings.
.2
Perform studies using a personal computer with approved
software for the application.
.3
Perform studies using windows based software such as Power
Analytics Software EDSA, SKM System Analysis Inc. electrical
engineering software, or CYME Power Engineering Software.
.4
Perform complete fault calculations for each proposed and
ultimate source combination.
.5
Perform complete fault calculations for all switching scenarios.
.6
Device coordination time-current curves from primary switchgear
to medium voltage switchgear and the generators.
.7
Coordinate with the Power Stream Inc. (the “Supply Authority”) to
obtain their design fault levels and protective settings.
.8
Source combination may include present and future power
company supply circuits, large motors, or generators.
Sequencing and Scheduling
General
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
1.8
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 8
Short Circuit Study
.1
General:
.1
Use cable impedances based on actual conductor
materials.
.2
Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars.
.3
Use cables and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees
Celsius.
.4
Use 600-volt cable reactance’s based on use of typical
dimensions of RW90, Teck conductors.
.2
Provide:
.1
Calculation methods and assumptions.
.2
Selected base per unit quantities
.3
One-line diagrams.
.4
Source impedance data, including electric utility system
and motor fault contribution characteristics.
.5
Impedance diagrams
.6
Zero sequence impedance diagrams
.7
Typical calculation
.8
Tabulations of calculated quantities
.9
Results, conclusions, and recommendations.
.3
Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when
applicable) duties for an assumed three-phase bolted fault at
each:
.1
Electric utility’s supply termination point.
.2
Main switchgear, on normal power and standby power.
.3
Medium and low voltage switchgear and switchboards.
.4
Motor control centres.
.5
All 600V branch circuit panelboards.
.6
27.6 kV Switchgear
.7
%kV Switchgear
.8
Main incoming breakers (tie-breaker) included.
.9
Generator breakers.
.4
Provide bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as
defined for three-phase bolted fault short circuit study.
.5
Provide bolted line-to-line fault current study for areas as defined
for three-phase bolted fault short circuit study.
.6
Verify:
.1
Equipment and protective devices are applied within their
ratings.
.2
Adequacy of switchgear and motor control centre bus bars
to withstand short circuit stresses.
.3
Adequacy of bus bars to withstand short circuit stresses.
.4
Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short
circuit stresses.
.5
Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short circuit
ratings besides normal load currents.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
1.9
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 8
Protective Device Coordination Study
.1
Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for
distribution system, graphically displayed on conventional log-log
curve sheets.
.2
Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram that applies to
specific portion of system associated with time-current curves on
the curve sheet.
.3
Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting
maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which
device is exposed.
.4
Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type,
function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous
settings recommended.
.5
Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets:
.6
Electric utility's (Power Stream Inc.) relays.
.1
Electric utility's fuses including manufacturer's minimum
melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.
.2
Medium voltage equipment relays.
.3
Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer's
minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage
bands.
.4
Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices,
including manufacturers tolerance bands.
.5
Pertinent transformer full-load currents at 100 percent and
600 percent.
.6
Transformer magnetizing inrush currents.
.7
Transformer damage curves.
.8
ANSI transformer withstand parameters.
.9
Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
.10
Ground fault protective device settings.
.11
Other system load protective devices for largest branch
circuit and feeder circuit breaker in each motor control
center.
.7
Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected
Transformer:
.8
.1
Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary
protective device operating band within the transformer's
characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent
of ANSI C57.12.00 withstand point.
.2
Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin
between primary protective device and associated
secondary device characteristic curves.
Separate medium voltage relay characteristic curves from curves
for other devices by a 0.4 second time margin at a minimum.
.1
For selection of CT ratio, feeder load amps will be given to
the successful bidder at a later date.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 8
.9
Arc Flash Study
.1
Arc Flash study shall be performed in accordance with
NFPA 70E and IEEE Standard 1584.
Provide lamacoid labels (to include arc flash boundary,
.2
incident energy and hazard/Risk category for Protective
clothing) for 5 kV switch board and for all motor control
centers
.3
Suggest methods for reducing arc flash energy (i.e.
reducing trip times for 5 kV breakers at expense of
coordination and replacement of incoming breakers at
MCC with fuses)
.1
Ensure all step and touch potentials are considered acceptable
and conform to the requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety
Code.
.2
Measure soil conductivity prior to performing ground grid design.
Use soil conductivity results in preparation of the ground grid
design.
.1
General Data:
.1
Short circuit reactances of rotating machines.
.2
Cable and conduit material data
.3
Bus data
.4
Transformer data
.5
Circuit resistance and reactance values.
.2
Short Circuit Data:
.1
Fault impedances
.2
X to R ratios
.3
Asymmetry factors
.4
Motor contributions
.5
Short circuit kVA
.3
Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents
.4
Recommended Protective Device Settings.
.1
Solid State Relays:
1.
Adjustable pickup
2.
Adjustable time current characteristics
3.
Curve slope and type
4.
Current tap
5.
Time dial
6.
Instantaneous pickup
7.
Overvoltage and under-voltage alarms
8.
Reverse current settings
9.
Metering and communications settings
.2
Circuit Breakers:
1.10 Ground Grid Design
1.11 Tabulations
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
1.
2.
3.
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 8
Adjustable pickup
Adjustable time-current characteristics
Adjustable instantaneous pickup
1.12 Study Analyses .
.1
Written Summary:
.1
Scope of studies performed
.2
Explanation of bus and branch numbering system
.3
Prevailing conditions
.4
Selected equipment deficiencies
.5
Results of short circuit and coordination studies
.6
Comments and suggestions
.2
Suggest changes and additions to the equipment rating and/or
characteristics.
.3
Notify the Consultant in writing of any existing circuit protective
devices which are improperly rated for the new fault conditions.
1.13 Load Flow and Power Factor Corrections Study
.1
Load flow and power factor correction study
.1
At the end of the construction document and demonstrate
the distribution of power and voltage levels throughout the
system for 25 percent, 50 percent and 100 percent load
conditions for operation under normal and standby power
conditions.
.2
Study results to include:
.1
Real kW
.2
Reactive kvar
.3
Power flow through transformers and cables
.4
Power factor at each bus and system losses
.5
Identify overloaded transformers and cables
.6
Provide recommendations for proper transformers and
cables
.3
Study Procedure
.1
Document normal and contingent operating conditions
.2
Utilize state of the art software which utilizes an interactive
technique to calculate, real and reactive power flow and
bus voltage levels throughout the system.
.3
Create data base from nameplates and by monitoring the
existing feeders with a digital power monitor. Monitor each
feeder for minimum of two hours, during typical operating
period utilize current and voltage, kW kvar and kVA and
power factor as an input to the load flow programme.
.4
Results: The load flow study to include:
.1
Bus voltages, line currents, power factor, transformer
loading.
.2
Recommended transformers tap settings
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 7 of 8
Complete set of capacitor recommendations
Recommend equipment upgrades or circuit configurations
to optimize the power flow from the source to the loads.
1.14 Harmonic Analysis Study
.1
Carry out the harmonic analysis of the electrical distribution
system for the circuit conditions listed below:
.1
Existing system configuration
.2
System with new VFDs or other non linear harmonic
creation loads in operation at no load, 50% and 100% load
conditions.
.3
Provide the following data from each study:
1.
System harmonic voltages in rms and % THD.
2.
System harmonic current in rms and % THD.
3.
An IEEE 519 analysis at the point of common
coupling with incoming utility.
4.
Capacitor bank evaluation on the basis voltage,
current and kVA.
5.
Calculate harmonic generation of each VFD, take
field measurements of VFD current harmonic
generation during the process operation.
6.
If the calculated magnitudes of harmonic voltages
and/or currents are excessive, the corrective
solution will be suggested to reduce the harmonic
quantities to within the acceptable limits.
7.
Recommend a filter and provide complete
specifications for the same.
.4
Results: At the conclusion of the harmonic analysis submit
the following:
1.
Description, purpose, basis and scope of the
harmonic study and a single line diagram of the
system
2.
Tables listing the individual harmonic voltages and
currents and total harmonic distortions for all major
buses within the electrical distribution system,
waveforms for all of the calculated harmonic
voltages will be displayed.
3.
Plot of frequency versus impedance for all capacitor
locations (harmonic resonance scan)
Complete recommendations for harmonic filters,
4.
shunt capacitors and series reactors which are
required for harmonic suppression
5.
Complete text report of each measurement location
sorted by current and voltage, and listing the
harmonic component and total harmonic distortion.
6.
Waveform of each measurement sample.
7.
Detailed harmonic spectrums of harmonic
generating loads.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
DATE: April 2012
PART 2.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3.
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
Section 16015
2006-08-30
Page 8 of 8
Direct Burial of Cables
.1
Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values
established by the approved coordination study.
.2
Provide detailed data sheets for all programmable meters, relays
and monitors within the scope of this study, including all
multifunction relays, feeder protection relays, motor protection
relays and power monitors.
.1
Detailed data sheets to include all
1.
Protective device settings
2.
Ranges
3.
Output relay functions
4.
Parameters for input devices
5.
Addressing
6.
Communication settings
.2
Data sheets to be in an electronic format, suitable for
downloading to devices, and in a hardcopy format to
review.
.3
Make mirror modifications to equipment as required to
accomplish conformance with the short circuit and
protective device coordination studies.
.1
Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values
established by coordination study.
.2
Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish
conformance with the short circuit and protective device
coordination studies.
.3
Notify the Consultant in writing of any required major equipment
modifications.
.1
Test relay setting by secondary current and voltage injection.
.2
Test ground continuity and resistance prior to energizing electrical
systems.
.3
Test grounding system efficiency for compliance with the
requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code and the Supply
Authority. Verify ohmic resistance and touch and step voltage
values are not exceeded.
General
Field Quality Control
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
Page 1 of 6
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 01501 – Construction Sequencing
.2
Division 1 – General Requirements
.3
Division 2 – Sitework
.4
Division 11 – Equipment
.5
Division 13 – SCADA and Instrumentation
.6
Division 15 – Mechanical
.7
Division 16 – Electrical
.1
Provide all the design, planning, materials, equipment,
implantation, operational needs for staging as conceptually
explained in the Contract Documents. Staging shall deliver
uninterrupted power supply to ensure continued operation of the
plant at normal levels of operation during the performance of this
contract.
.2
Draw out detailed plans, provide staging services and transition
infrastructure for every stage of the project.
.3
Professional handling of all staging and transition activities to
ensure technically viable and operationally safe electrical system
with reasonable redundancy for any unforeseen problems during
the performance of the contracted Works. Electrical system
includes power supply to instruments, valves, control panels,
communication equipment, and other auxiliary devices.
.4
Upon completion of the staging Work, restore the Site to normal
operating conditions.
.5
Coordination with the Consultant, plant operations, regulatory
agencies, and other stakeholders for complete understanding of
the plans and obtain their cooperation which is key element of
successful staging exercise.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16016 – Staging and Transition as indicated
in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
All Work provided in the staging or transition to staging shall meet
the requirements of the OESC (Ontario Electrical Safety Code),
ESA (Electrical Safety Authority) and other regulatory statutes as
mentioned in Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.
Scope
Measurement and Payment
Regulatory Requirements
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
Page 2 of 6
DATE: April 2012
1.5
Planning for Staging and Transition
.1
Included in the Contract Documents is a broad based staging plan
for phasing various activities, and providing temporary facilities
and services during the Contract.
.2
Plan for staging and transition to staging is primarily the
responsibility of the Contractor. Subject to the approval of the
Consultant, the Contractor may choose different staging schemes
and prepare its plans partially or fully different from the plans
included in the Contract. Such plans will be accepted only if they
meet the objectives of the staging and have credible case for
continued facility operation and completion of Work under the
Contract.
.3
Clear plans for staging shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted for approval by the Consultant and the Region’s facility
operations a minimum of 14 Days prior to start of the Work. If the
Region or Consultant should find that the plans are not
acceptable, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit in shortest
time. No consideration shall be given in the overall schedule due
to revision or changes to the plan.
.4
Safety and security of the plant and the personal are of prime
importance. A hazard analysis of each staging plan shall be
prepared according to specific situation and it will be submitted for
evaluation along with the safety measures planned during
transition.
.5
Temporary diesel generators shall be provided where power is
required for operation of the facility and the power interruption is
foreseeable. This provision shall include complete operational
stand-by power including cable, switchboard, connections, all
operational requirements and transfer of power means. The
specific generator size, as specified on the Contract Drawings, is
the minimum requirement. Actual size of generator may be greater
based upon the specific plans prepared by the Contractor. The
generator shall meet the limits outlined in the Ontario Ministry of
the Environment Noise Pollution Control (NPC) documents for
sound attenuation and emission levels. Whenever temporary
generators are deployed they should be adequately maintained
and monitored to ensure uninterrupted power.
.6
Any spills shall be addressed promptly and according to
applicable laws and standards.
.7
A protection coordination check should be done for any breakers
and fuses used for protection of the equipment installed for the
staging activity. The Intent of the coordination check is to ensure
that any fault on the staging network shall only trip the breaker or
blow the fuse protecting the specific parts of staging. It should not
trip the upstream breakers and affect the larger parts of the
facility.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
Page 3 of 6
DATE: April 2012
1.6
.8
Submission of staging plans shall address all of the elements,
scenarios, and contingent events which could likely effect the
Work being planned. Provide test reports for the equipment
involved in accordance with Section 16031- Inspection and
Testing.
.9
Submittal drawings for the temporary power shall be approved by
the Consultant before the start of Work.
.10
The Contractor shall be responsible for detailing the work
mechanism of the staging plan, how it will be executed, all
requirements of transition installations, provision of temporary
generator, hook-up of temporary electrical distribution, temporary
lighting and other consumables.
.11
The Contractor shall provide a timeline of how the staging plan will
be executed and how it will allow for the continuous operation of
the facility.
.12
Details of all temporary or permanent equipment, facilities and
services required shall be available in accordance with the area
classification and operational needs.
.13
Confirm Protection coordination check for upstream breaker.
.14
Confirm Power supply arrangement to instruments, valves, control
panels, communication gear and other devices likely to be
affected by the plan.
.15
Provide a Safety and Hazard analysis, considering all possible
situations. The Contractor shall include recommended solutions
including methods of how the risks will be mitigated. Warning
signs, barriers, adequate tools and supervision shall be listed in
the plan.
.16
Interface points with the existing system and the standby system,
provide required isolation devices, emergency cut-off switches,
grounding, and location specific safety provisions.
.17
The Contractor shall provide a fall back situation plan in case the
staging or transition activity has a catastrophic failure. This plan
will provide for an immediate power restoration alternate in such
catastrophic emergency.
.1
Arrange and pay for the services of a qualified licenced electrician
who has at least ten years experience in handling this type of
work. The electrician shall prepare and finalize the staging
activities and tasks and hold overall responsibility to implement
these plans in a safe and reliable manner. The licenced electrician
shall provide all required services during the staging Work and
perform all coordination with the plant operations and the
Consultant to ensure the plant remains operational.
Design and Inspection
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
Page 4 of 6
DATE: April 2012
1.7
1.8
.2
Before the start of each phase of the staging, the Contractor shall
prepare a staging diagram for the information of plant operations
and other stakeholders which shall be displayed at a prominent
location. The diagram shall include;
.1
The single line diagram changes to temporary and
permanent facilities as applicable to the specific phase.
.2
Any power interruptions planned, duration, schedule.
.3
In case of an emergency response requirement, contact
person(s) name and cell number during office hours /after
hours.
Caution or warning statements as required.
.4
.3
The Contractor shall arrange, pay and obtain regular ESA
inspections, or from other agencies having jurisdiction as
determined by the conditions of the Site. The Contractor shall
obtain assistance from the manufacturer as necessary during the
course of equipment installation.
.4
On completion of the staging activity the system shall be restored
to its normal position and restore any damage to other site
conditions or plant due to staging works.
.1
On completion of the staging Work, the licenced electrician
responsible for the staging work shall submit a completion report
indicating the completed Work, any discrepancies, confirming the
restoration of Site to normal conditions, removal of temporary
installation, clearing of the areas and functioning state of plant
devices, including details of attachment if affected.
.2
This completion report shall be reviewed by the Consultant and
the Supervisor of plant operations for any difficulties and the
Contractor will be notified accordingly. The Contractor shall
address these difficulties within 5 Working Days of the date of the
notification.
.3
If any part of the staging system needs to be kept available after
the completion it shall be provided to plant operation along with
the detailed sketches and technical information required.
.4
A final inspection shall be held at the end of each staging activity
to ensure that the Work has been completed as required by the
Contract, the system has been restored to its normal condition,
and is free of any unsafe or inoperable conditions, in accordance
with operational needs and regulatory compliance.
.1
It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to design the staging
network, including the required equipment and its installation and
size it to meet the electrical load required for the plant operations
under maximum operating conditions. The control wiring and
Completion
Responsibility
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
Page 5 of 6
DATE: April 2012
needs for monitoring of this system on the Regions SCADA shall
also be provided by the Contractor.
.2
Staging shall not interfere or harm any other installed electrical
equipment, including floor mounted distribution and control panels,
switchboards, transformers, generators, luminaires, etc., which is
part of the building electrical service systems. Any such harm shall
be rectified by the Contractor at its sole cost.
.3
Timeline of the staging activity shall be adhered to by the
Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the
Consultant and the Region informed about any unforeseen
developments likely to affect this timeline.
.1
All materials to be provided for staging shall be reliable for use
and tested according to Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing
before bringing to site. Test results shall be included with the
submittal.
.2
Any previously used material planned for installation in staging
shall be tested for performance before it is brought to Site.
Performance test records shall be verified at site and documents
included in the submittal for reference.
.3
In case any materials used in staging fails during the Work,
adequate arrangement shall be in place for its prompt
replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Region.
.4
All materials removed during the staging process and not required
for further installation shall be handed over to the Region or
disposed of according to the instructions from the Region.
.1
Carry out all staging Work with due diligence and care as keeping
the plant operational is a key requirement.
.2
All Work shall be carried out on de-energized equipment. A
temporary ground shall be required wherever the system ground
is not available, ground protection shall be ensured for safety.
.3
Staging installations shall have all safety measures in place before
start of the Work, including warning signs, access barriers, area
lighting, fire safety equipment etc.
.4
Understand and comply with the plant safety requirements, follow
the HOLD TAG and LOCK OUT procedures, and keep close
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
General
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
General
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16016
STAGING AND TRANSITION
DATE: April 2012
Page 6 of 6
coordination with the plant operations for any additional case
specific requirements.
.5
Only a qualified licensed electrician with at least ten years
experience in the specific trade should head the electrical crew
involved in staging. All workers shall be provided with proper PPE
(personal protective equipment), tools to handle the job without
risk of damage to life and property.
.6
All excavation near power lines, cables, and electrical cable ducts
shall be carried out carefully using hand tools only.
.7
Staging Work shall not hamper or disturb the other activities of the
Region’s plant operators or the service agencies engaged by the
Region for providing maintenance services on the plant.
Coordinate the work with other trades as required.
.8
The designated qualified professional responsible for staging shall
keep the plant operations and all stake holders informed of the
developments and ensure that the team responsible for the Work
has adequate resources to meet any foreseeable contingencies
created during the staging Work.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16020
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 5
DATE: April 2012
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
General Conditions
.1
Refer to Section 02030 – Demolition.
.2
Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and Section
16010 - General Electrical Requirements.
.3
Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these
documents to determine their effect upon the work of this Section.
.4
Treat the demolishing equipment containing designated
substances (for example, PCB s, asbestos, etc.) in accordance
with the Designated Substances Plan and all applicable
regulations and codes.
.5
When required by the Region, the Contractor shall remove and
return equipment to a York Region storage facility located within
100km of the Site.
Scope of Demolition of Electrical Systems Work
.1
Furnish all labour, materials, equipment, transportation, services,
facilities and supervision necessary to demolish all equipment,
systems and materials specified herein and on the Contract
Drawings.
.2
Furnish all labour, materials, equipment, transportation, services,
facilities and supervision necessary to dispose of all equipment,
systems and materials listed for removal from the Site herein and
on the Contract Drawings
.3
Furnish all labour, equipment and supervision necessary to
surrender (hand over) to the Region all equipment, systems and
materials specified herein and on the drawings
.4
Prepare drawings, stamped and signed by a registered
professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of
Ontario, indicating temporary bracing and/or supporting structures
required during the demolition of doors and/or walls as described
herein.
.5
In general, the demolition of the electrical systems comprises, but
is not limited to:
.1
Removal of the existing 4160 V switchgear and starters
.2
Removal of the specific parts of 600/208/120 V system.
.3
Removal of the existing generators, buried diesel fuel
tanks, fuel supply system, and all related equipment.
.4
Removal of the existing station battery and charger
.5
Removal of the HVAC control
.6
Removal of the existing 4160 V power cables wherever
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16020
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 5
DATE: April 2012
.7
1.3
1.4
1.5
Removal of sections of the existing cable trays and
associated hardware
Measurement and Payment
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16020 – Demolition of Electrical Systems as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Provide stamped and signed drawings for all structural demolition
and temporary supporting works.
.2
Provide a written procedure for all lifting operations involving the
existing facility crane. Include weights and dimensions of items to
be lifted and details of slings or other lifting tackle required.
.1
Demolition and removal of the existing electrical equipment will
not begin prior to the installation and commissioning and
satisfactory operation of all temporary switchgear in accordance
with Section 16330 – 27.6 kV Switchgear Modifications.
.2
Demolition and/or removal of equipment must follow the approved
sequencing schedules. The Contractor shall prepare the
sequencing schedule and get approval from the Consultant and
the Region’s Superintendent for Operations and Maintenance.
.3
Perform the demolition of electrical systems such that availability
and continuity of supply, monitoring and control of the common
systems and auxiliaries are kept and secured.
.1
Supply and install the necessary temporary bracing, supporting
structures, guards, warning signs, etc. necessary to complete the
Contract safely and in accordance with all regulations and/or
codes referred to in Section 01060 – Regulatory Requirements
and Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.
.1
Organize the Work and provided sufficient labour and equipment
to ensure safety of all personnel at all times.
.2
All workers shall be competent in, and trained to perform, the
tasks that they perform. Where applicable, workers shall be
licensed or otherwise qualified for the tasks that they perform;
Submittals
Procedures and Stages
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
General
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
General
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16020
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 5
DATE: April 2012
specifically electrical works shall always be performed under
supervision of a licensed electrician or the High Voltage work
under supervision of a qualified HV technician.
.3
Prior to starting demolition, the Contractor and the Region shall
inspect all facilities described to ascertain the limits of the Works.
.4
Do not commence any demolition Work until the designated
substance survey (DSS) is performed on the equipment to be
removed and the Consultant has provided one (1) copy of the
DSS report.
.5
The DSS will be completed following the de-energization of the
switchgear. There will be a period following de-energization where
no Work on the electrical equipment, existing or new, will be
permitted. During this period, Work may continue on ancillary
equipment and/or the building structure.
.6
Perform all demolition Work in accordance with the requirements
of the DSS plan.
.7
All the demolition Work shall be performed in a systematic manner
and shall not damage other services and equipment nor affect the
use and function of any process equipment and any services
(electrical power, lighting, communication, heating, water supply)
for the remaining facilities.
.8
Co-ordination of Work
.1
Co-ordinate demolition Work with the Consultant,and the
Region’s staff to ensure no disruption of station operation.
.2
Refer to Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
for co-ordination with all other personnel, Subcontractors
and Other Contractors.
.9
Demolition and disposal
.1
During the demolition Work, refrain from unnecessary
damage to electrical equipment and hand over to the
Region, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings,
all removed electrical equipment in good order and place
the removed equipment into the areas as directed by the
Consultant.
.2
Remove and return the following reusable equipment to a
York Region storage facility within 100km of the Site:
1.
All Multilin relays, including the Multilin SR750
Feeder Management Relays and the Multilin
SR469 Motor Management Relays. These relays
will be re-used in the temporary equipment and the
new switchgear and Medium Voltage MCC’s.
2.
Any relays that are reused from the existing
switchgear, or provided by the Region for the
temporary switchgear must be installed in the
permanent switchgear or “handed back” to the
Region in good working order.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16020
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 5
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.2
3.3
Remove the following equipment and surrender to the
Region in good working order:
1.
All medium voltage circuit breakers, and the
breaker racking motors.
2.
All new equipment installed under the PCS
upgrades, including the switches, indicating lights,
relays, and Multilin cases.
3.
All 86 breaker lock-out relays.
4.
Other materials as determined by the Region.
Remove and return in good working order, all equipment
belonging to PowerStream Inc. which is identified for
removal to a location designated by PowerStream Inc
located within 100km of the Site.
Remove the equipment or material from Site and dispose
in accordance with all applicable regulations and codes
referred to in Section 01060 – General Requirements and
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.
The Contractor shall pay all associated fees for disposal.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure
that equipment removed from site is in condition which
allows for its reuse or recycle.
Demolition Procedure for Station Battery
.1
Remove the existing station battery only after all loads have been
transferred to the new station battery, charger and temporary VDC
panel.
.2
Include details of battery removal in work plan.
.3
Remove cells from battery prior to removing cabinet.
.4
Arrange for a certified contractor to recycle the existing lead-acid
cells.
Demolition Procedure for the 4160 V Switchgear
.1
Relocate the existing control cables and trough running up to the
switchgear prior to demolition of switchgear. This wiring is the
RTD signals from the motors and pumps to the switchgear, and is
to be installed in the basement directly below the new switchgear.
.2
Ensure that the equipment has been fully de-energized and
locked-out prior to demolition.
.3
Ensure that all control signals have been temporarily bypassed
prior to demolishing switchgear. These signals can include
communication, potential voltage (PT) and interlock signals.
.4
Remove switchgear cell-by-cell.
.5
Remove breakers prior to removing cells.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16020
DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DATE: April 2012
3.4
3.5
Page 5 of 5
Demolition Procedure for the 4160 V Cabling
.1
The timing of cable removals shall be in accordance with the
sequence schedules approved by the Consultant. All the cables
shall be removed in one continuous run unless allowed otherwise
by the Consultant.
.2
Disconnect incoming 4160 V cables and remove as shown in the
Contract Drawings. Ensure that replacement cables have been
run before removing existing cables. Remove existing cables from
site and dispose of according to the consultant instructions.
.3
Remove the 4160 V cables between the starters and pump
connection box. Remove existing cables from site and deliver at
the location provided by the Region.
.4
Follow all proper environmental procedures when cutting and
removing paper insulated lead covered (PILC) type cable. The
contractor is to remove PILC cable(s) in one continuous run if
possible.
Demolition Procedure for Unused Cable Trays
.1
3.6
Remove existing 4160 V cable tray and bus duct and all
associated hardware (hangers, etc.).
Demolition Procedure for HVAC Controls
.1
Remove all HVAC controls from the west wall of the mechanical
room.
.2
Remove cables from the existing MCC to the HVAC controls
.3
Remove cables from each HVAC control to the associated HVAC
loads.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 1 of 18
DATE: March 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 11 – Equipment
.2
Section 13 – SCADA and Instrumentation
.3
Section 16 – Electrical
.1
The tests and inspections shall comply with the requirements of
the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
.2
Technical basis for the Work under this Section will be provided by
the standards referred to in Section 16010 – Electrical General
Requirements.
.1
Utilize the services of an independent group or agency
specializing in the testing of medium and high voltage electrical
equipment. The field services division of the switchgear or
transformer supplier is not acceptable.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing as indicated
in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The Work covered by this Section of Specifications, includes the
furnishing of all labour, test equipment, and performance tests for
installations shown on the Contract Drawings and as herein
specified during and at the conclusion of the Contract.
.2
The Contractor shall test the following for proper operation and
adjustments:
.1
Cable and bus-bars.
.2
Liquid filled transformers tests.
.3
General or dry type transformers.
.4
Switchgear tests.
.5
Current transformers and potential transformer tests.
.6
Substation grounding.
.7
Low voltage distribution switchgear.
.8
Low voltage power circuit breaker and protective relays.
.9
Automated transfer switches.
.10
Low voltage molded case breakers.
.11
Motor control centres.
.12
Bus Ducts.
Standards
Acceptable Testing Agency
Measurement and Payment
Scope
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 2 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.13
.14
.15
Low Voltage feeders.
Switchboard and panel board circuits.
All motors, heaters and associated control equipment
including the sequential operation of systems where
applicable and verification of correct over current and
overload devices.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Test Equipment
.1
General
.1
Ensure that a suitable power supply is available for test
equipment, be it 120 VAC or battery-powered devices.
Record make, model, and calibration date of test
instrument(s).
.2
All test equipment shall have valid calibration stickers
displayed on the equipment and must be calibrated within
the last 12 months by a company who regularly engages in
this service and is otherwise acceptable to the Consultant.
.2
Transformer Doble® Test
.1
Doble® test equipment shall be Type MH to 10kV at 60
cycles.
.2
Test equipment voltage shall be variable from 2.0kV to
10kV depending on ratios of transformers.
.3
Transformer Turn Ratio Test
.1
Three-phase powered unit with solid state controls.
.2
Unit shall be capable of tests on multiple transformer
winding configurations.
.3
Single-phase units may be used on specially wound
transformers.
.4
Turn ratio to 3 decimal place accuracy and display.
.4
Relay Test Equipment
.1
Relay test equipment shall be designed for relay testing
and secondary current injection.
.2
Current output shall be capable of 60 A for testing of
instantaneous features.
Indicators shall detect open signals, pick-up signals and
.3
other required signals.
.4
Timers shall be accurate to 1 millisecond.
.5
MultiAmp or equivalent relay test units. Specifically
designed relay testers for specific relays shall be used if
available.
.6
For equipment required on three phase systems, use a
three-phase voltage and current output test unit.
.7
For equipment required on three-phase differential test,
use a six-channel current output test unit(s) or equivalent.
.5
DC High Pot Units
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 3 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
Test instruments shall have a minimum output of 60 kV
DC, 2000 uA capacity.
Shall be 120 VAC powered.
Test shall be conducted with full safety measures in force,
including “barrier” of conductor ends, proper bonding, “flagperson”, as necessary.
.6
AC High Voltage Units
.1
Shall have a minimum output of 27 kV AC, 2000 mA
capacity.
.2
Use an AC high voltage unit for insulation tests and other
tests as indicated in the Contract Documents, at voltage
levels indicated in the Contract Documents or as required
by the manufacturer’s recommendations.
.3
Approved equipment shall be Doble® insulation test unit.
.7
Insulation Resistance Meter (Megger)
.1
DC megger shall have an insulation scale to 100,000
megohms (1000 V scale).
Output voltages on DC megger units shall be 500 V, 1000
.2
V, 2500 V and 5000 V.
.3
DC megger units shall be suitable for 10-minute megger
tests and polarization index tests.
.8
Low Resistance Test Units (Ductor)
.1
Low resistance test units shall have 10 A output.
.2
Digital display and accuracy to 1 microhm.
.9
Ground Resistivity Tester
.1
Ground resistivity tester shall measure earth impedance in
variable distances from the source to 250 metres.
Unit shall be capable of plotting ground resistivity from 0.1
.2
ohms and higher.
.10
Load Survey
.1
Test equipment shall be a Fluke Corporation Inc. (Fluke) 3
phase Power/Power Quality monitor or an approved
equivalent, with capability to test Harmonic measurements,
amplitude and phase angle for each harmonic, Watts, VA,
VAR, true power factor, and displacement power factor,
power quality standard measurements with high speed
sampling of impulses at 2 MHz to measure impulses to
6400 volts peak, 500 nanoseconds duration and displays
peak voltage.
.11
Thermo graphic Scan equipment
.1
Test equipment shall be Flir Systems Inc. Agema Thermo
Vision 570 portable Infrared camera system or approved
equal; and must be capable of taking a colour infrared
image of all irregularities.
.12
Ultrasonic Scan Equipment
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 4 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.1
2.2
Test equipment shall be at minimum equal to UE Systems
Inc. – Portable Ultrasonic system or approved equal. A
digital camera must be used for photo recording ability.
Reports
.1
Reports of all tests shall be in written form.
.2
Include copy of the test results in the maintenance manuals.
.3
General
.1
All test results shall be inputted into an electronic test
sheet program.
.2
All test sheets shall include the equipment nameplate data,
customer identification, time and date of tests,
environmental conditions during tests, and environmental
conditions during tests and test results.
.4
Test Results and Reporting – Data For Inclusion
.1
The following data shall be included in the test report:
1.
Equipment data with selected position, if applicable,
for example., transformer taps.
2.
Protective device(s) make, model number, rating,
“as found” settings. These shall include CT, PT
relays, overloads, fuses, breakers.
3.
Any adjustments, modifications and repairs made
on the equipment on Site during the Work with an
explanation as to why such Work was needed to be
performed and the method of execution of the
Work).
4.
A summary of conclusions of the inspection and
testing.
1.
The acceptable criteria and limiting values
of measured figures by the equipment
manufacturer. These shall include the
insulation resistance, (megohm) contact
resistance (microhm), leakage current
(microampere).
5.
Recommendations for long-term and short-term
remedial work.
.5
Report Format
.1
The final report shall be submitted in electronic and paper
format in three (3) bound copies neatly in 3-ring binders
with separate sections for each item as listed therein.
.2
Photographs shall be mounted on background sheet
complete with labels. Curves and graphs shall be neatly
plotted on appropriate graph paper. Result tables shall be
made electronically and logically arranged.
.3
The applicable NETA test forms shall be used for reporting
information. It is not intended to imply that these are the
only forms required. The Contractor shall submit all
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 5 of 18
DATE: April 2012
information necessary to fully describe the inspection,
testing and maintenance of all items.
PART 3. TEST PROCEDURES
3.1
3.2
General
.1
Coordinate all tests and shut downs with the Region.
.2
Pre-service Inspection and Testing and Post-service Inspection
and Testing of equipment shall be as described in PART 2 of this
Specification and shall include the following:
.1
Insulation resistance tests
.2
DC high voltage tests
.3
Liquid filled transformers tests
.4
Switchgear tests
.5
Substation grounding
.6
Low voltage distribution switchgear.
.7
Low voltage power circuit breaker and protective relays
.8
Motor control centres
.9
Low voltage molded case breakers greater than or equal to
100 A.
.10
General or dry type transformers
.11
Bus Ducts
.12
Low Voltage feeders
.13
Cable and bus-bars test
.14
Protective relays
.15
Power monitoring equipment
.16
Coordination study related to calibration and testing
.17
Current transformers and potential transformer tests
.18
Thermo graphic scan, Ultrasonic scan
.19
Load study
Inspection and Testing Schedule
.1
Inspection and Testing - General
.1
The inspection and tests set out in the Inspection and
Testing schedules and test reports are supplementary to
the inspection and tests specified in individual sections of
Division 16 - Electrical equipment.
.2
Where test schedules are not specified, conduct tests and
submit results in a tabulated format for all of the functional
units associated with the equipment during the testing and
commissioning phases.
Conduct all production and routine tests as recommended
.3
in the ANSI and CSA standards, preferably in the
manufacturer's factory if possible.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or
.4
otherwise agreed to by the Region and the Contractor the
tests described herein are tests to be repeated on Site at a
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 6 of 18
DATE: April 2012
minimum. These tests are to be conducted in the
sequence as described in this Section.
.2
Equipment Test Schedule
.1
Perform test as outlined in other Sections as well as the
tests included in this Specification Section for the following
equipment:
1.
Test all new equipment supplied and installed
under this Contract
2.
Test the interface between existing equipment and
installed equipment.
3.
Test existing equipment being modified, relocated
or moved within this contract.
.3
Preparatory Work
.1
Prior to beginning Work on Site submit for the Consultant's
review, minimum of five (5) copies of data sheets for
testing and reporting as follows:
1.
List with descriptive literature of all test equipment
to be used.
2.
Calibration certificates for the proposed test
equipment.
3.
Test report forms shall be used for each equipment
type.
4.
Proposed Work schedule.
.2
Do not commence inspection and testing Work before the
above submissions are reviewed and approved by the
Consultant.
.3
The Contractor shall provide all necessary supplementary
lighting to permit careful inspection and testing. The
supplementary lighting provided shall be to the
Consultant's approval. During any Hydro shutdown the
requirement for supplementary lighting shall be increased
to maintain an acceptable level of illumination.
.4
Ensure Site conditions are satisfactory for execution of
Work.
.4
During Inspection & Testing
.1
Carry out the Work with trained personnel, experienced in
the particular type of testing and procedures required for
each inspection and testing.
.2
Ensure that any defects discovered are noted and
corrected before continuing the Work.
.3
As work progresses, maintain accurate records and submit
to the Consultant for review when requested.
.4
Mark any deviations found, initially on one set of the
Contract Documents including the Drawings at the Site.
Submit for Consultant's review. Revise Drawings and
mark-up Contract Documents if requested by the
Consultant to ensure accuracy.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 7 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.5
.6
3.3
Revisions, further test results and clarifications of
comments to be incorporated into the test reports.
The Contractor shall record and report in detail any
deficiencies rectified and repairs made during the course of
the Work as part of the test report.
.5
Test Instruments - General
.1
Ensure suitable power supply is available for test
equipment. Record make, model, and calibration date of
test instrument.
.1
Insulation Resistance Tests
.1
Use a megger with 100,000 megohm at 1000 V resolution
for megger tests.
.2
Record ambient temperature and adjust the measured
megohm reading to 20ºC ambient.
.3
Use 5kV megger for 13.2kV equipment, 2.5kV megger for
2.4kV equipment and 1000 V megger range for power
equipment of 600 V and below.
.4
For a 10-minute megger test, record megohm values in
megohms at 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 5 minutes and 10
minutes. Plot megohms against time for each connection.
Calculate and record the ratio of measured megohms as
follows:
1.
60-second megohm/30-second megohm =
dielectric absorption.
2.
10-minute megohm/1-minute megohm =
polarization index.
3.
Report the 1-minute megohm as the insulation
resistance value.
4.
Submit tabulated measured megohm figures for 10minute insulation tests, submit in graphical format.
.2
DC High Voltage (HV) Test
.1
Conduct a 10-minute insulation resistance test immediately
before high voltage tests and submit test reports. Conduct
HV test only if the insulation resistance test result is
satisfactory.
.2
Test instrument shall have minimum output of 60kV DC,
2000 uA capacity.
.3
Conduct test in accordance with IEEE Standard 400-2001.
.4
Compile test report and submit it to the Consultant.
.3
Liquid-Filled Transformers
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspections and tests and compile test
reports.
2.
Compile a separate test report for each power
transformer.
Proposed Tests
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 8 of 18
DATE: April 2012
3.
.2
.3
.4
Conduct tests on existing transformers to verify that
no damage or significant change has occurred
since the last inspection and testing.
4.
Conduct external inspections in accordance with
layout shop drawings.
5.
Check nameplates and vector diagrams against
test results.
6.
Inspect silica gel breathers, oil gauge, temperature
gauge and similar devices where fitted. For devices
with settings, record the settings in use. Record
actual reading of all gauges and ambient
temperatures.
7.
Check to ensure that transformer is properly
anchored to floor or pad.
Inspect for oil leaks, correct oil level, and signs of
8.
rusting.
9.
Perform high voltage AC insulation test on high
voltage windings to ground, low voltage windings to
and low voltage windings using Doble® insulation
tester.
10.
Inspect bushings, and measure insulation
resistance with use of high voltage AC insulation
test.
11.
Perform transformer turn ratio test on all tap
positions.
12.
Confirm proper grounding of transformer tank.
Factory Tests shall include at a minimum
1.
10-minute insulation resistance test;
2.
HV test at maintenance test voltage;
3.
Winding resistance measurement;
4.
Voltage ratio three phase, for each tap (transformer
turn ratio); and
5.
Relay and protective devices operation
Site Tests shall include as a minimum
1.
10-minute insulation resistance test;
2.
HV test at maintenance test voltage;
3.
Winding resistance measurement;
4.
Voltage ratio three phase, for each tap (transformer
turn ratio);
5.
Relay and protective devices operation
6.
Exercise the manual tap changer to check its
functions and ease of access.
7.
Operate and simulate the alarm and trip conditions
of each protective device.
Switchgear
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspections and tests and compile test
report.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 9 of 18
DATE: April 2012
2.
.2
.3
Compile separate test report for each circuit
breaker, fuse switch, load break switch, isolation
switch, soft starters and transition unit of 15kV in
the Contract.
3.
The following tests shall be included as the
minimum tests for test performed on Site:
1.
Inspection of all protective devices and
auxiliaries (including lightning arresters)
2.
10-minute insulation resistance
3.
Operational tests of protection and
monitoring devices.
4.
Relays calibration and metering devices
calibration.
5.
Circuit breaker trip and closing coil pick up
and trip off voltages.
6.
HV resistance tests
4.
Conduct inspection after the equipment is isolated
and grounded and the switchgear room is cleaned
up and after the HV test.
Measure the contact resistance of all main contacts
5.
of equipment in the switchgear.
6.
Verify the operation, interlocks, and tripping (for
circuit breakers, starters, and fuse/unfused
switches).
Inspection of Switchgear
1.
Check that nameplate and equipment identification
corresponds with shop drawings, where applicable.
2.
Check the provision and correctness of phase
markers for power connections and cabling.
3.
Check switchgear interior and exterior for
cleanliness, and enclosure distortion.
4.
Inspect the physical conditions and damage of
terminations, shutters and mechanism and report
any damage.
5.
Check the structural supports and connections,
grounding security and connection.
6.
Check fuse type and ratings, correct CT ratio.
7.
Check access of CT for replacement and routine
inspections/testing.
Operational Checks
1.
Operate the closing and tripping mechanism and
the shutters to ensure correct and smooth
movement.
Operate each protective and monitoring device for
2.
correct operation and indication.
3.
Sample check the torque of busbar bolts and
cabling termination for correct tightness.
4.
Check contact alignment and bouncing, contact
pressure and contact resistance.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 10 of 18
DATE: April 2012
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Check mechanical and electrical interlocks.
Check the draw out feature of breaker and PT
drawer.
Check the auxiliary switches operation and
contacts.
Verify that all interlocks are functioning as
designed; including key interlocks, hard wired
interlocks between cells, emergency stop
pushbuttons and 86 lockout relay interlocks.
1.
Insulation Resistance Test
Conduct DC hipot test on each switchgear (circuit
breaker, transition unit, fuse switch and load break
switch).
Perform Doble® test on each switchgear (circuit
breaker, transition unit, fuse switch and load break
switch).
Conduct HV tests as specified in the Contract
Documents.
Duct tests on relays (relay testing), voltage/control
transformers, current transformers, indicating
meters, switchgear cell inspection and lightning
arresters. For relays, check operation and
indication.
Lightning Arrester Testing.
1.
Conduct tests after the lightning arresters
have been isolated from system.
2.
Check the arresters for cracks, corrosion
and tracking marks.
3.
Conduct megger and Doble® tests on 39kV
lightning arresters in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations for one
minute and record the results. Check
grounding on arrestors and check the
pressure and state of operation indicator.
.5
Substation Grounding
.1
Verify that ground connections meet the requirements of
the Ontario Electrical Safety Code , and all that all
equipment and metal surfaces are bonded to ground.
.6
Low Voltage Distribution Switchgear (DS) Inspection
.1
Inspect and clean the DS air circuit breakers.
.2
Clean frames/mechanisms/auxiliary devices and apply
lubricant in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.3
Inspection and testing shall include megger, ductor,
protective relay testing and calibration, and visual
inspection. Note any deficiencies.
.4
Verify protective relay settings with coordination study.
.5
Function test protective relays to ensure reliable operation.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 11 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.6
Torque check a minimum of 10 percent of all connections.
Torque check all connections if any connection is found to
be defective.
.7
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker and Protective Relay
.1
Perform contact resistance testing on all breakers at or
above the 400 A frame level, including limiters.
.2
Perform secondary injection testing of zero sequence
current transformers and ensure that pick-up value is in
accordance with its respective ground fault relay. Function
test each breaker via its zero sequence CT to ensure
reliable operation.
.3
Inspection and testing shall include a visual inspection of
breaker and auxiliary device(s). Note any deficiencies.
Verify protective relay settings with the coordination study.
.4
.5
Check draw out devices, electrical and mechanical
functions, interlock sequences. Test contact resistance.
.6
Perform current injection tests to confirm the proper
operation of trip devices.
Record:
.7
1.
Long time pick-up current.
2.
Long time trip times at 200 % and 300% of pick-up.
3.
Short time pick-up current.
4.
Short time trip time at 150% of pick-up.
5.
Instantaneous pick-up.
6.
Ground pick-up.
7.
Insulation resistance test from pole to pole and
from pole to ground for one (1) minute at KVDC.
8.
Over-current and Ground Fault Tripping Relays:
9.
Test by secondary current injection, tripping of
device or alarms to be confirmed.
10.
Test draw-out function, etc.
11.
All relays to be adjusted and tested to show
conformance with the recommended settings in the
coordination study.
.8
600 V MCC’s
.1
Insulation Resistance
.2
Continuity Check.
.3
Proper Phase sequence, ABC.
.9
Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers – above 300 A
.1
Check mechanical operation and interlocks.
.2
Test (via current injection) trip time at 300% of rating.
.3
Test and record instantaneous trip value.
.4
Test and record contact resistance.
.5
Set protective devices to the requirements of the approved
coordination study.
.6
Insulation resistance test from pole to pole and from pole
to ground for one (1) minute at KVDC.
.7
Overcurrent and Ground Fault Tripping Relays:
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 12 of 18
DATE: April 2012
1.
Test by secondary current injection, tripping of
device or alarms to be confirmed.
.10
General or Dry Type Transformers
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspections and tests and compile test
reports.
2.
Compile a separate test report for each power
transformer.
.2
Inspections
1.
Conduct external inspections in accordance with
the layout shop drawings. Check nameplates and
vector diagrams against test results.
2.
Inspect temperature gauge and fans. For devices
with settings, record the settings in use. Record
actual readings of all gauges and ambient
temperature.
3.
Check to ensure that the transformer is properly
anchored to the floor or pad.
Perform high voltage AC insulation tests on high
4.
voltage windings to low voltage windings.
5.
Perform core to ground test.
6.
Perform transformer turn ratio test on all tap
positions.
7.
Confirm proper grounding of transformer frame and
core assembly.
Factory Tests shall include at a minimum
.3
1.
10-minute insulation resistance test;
2.
HV test at maintenance test voltage;
3.
Winding resistance measurement;
4.
Voltage ratio three phase, for each tap (transformer
turn ratio); and
5.
Relay and protective devices operation
.4
Site Tests shall include as a minimum
1.
10-minute insulation resistance test;
2.
HV test at maintenance test voltage;
3.
Winding resistance measurement;
4.
Voltage ratio three phase, for each tap (transformer
turn ratio);
5.
Relay and protective devices operation
6.
Operate and simulate the alarm and trip conditions
of each protective device.
.11
Bus Ducts
.1
Inspect and check for proper torque on a minimum of 10
percent of all joints. If any are found defective, all joints to
be retorqued and marked by Contractor and then
rechecked.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 13 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.2
Duct to be meggered at 1,000 V DC and any reading of
less than 50 Megohms shall be reviewed with
manufacturer and the Consultant.
.12
Low Voltage Feeder Cables
.1
In and out of main board to be meggered at 1,000 V DC
and terminals checked for torque. Any reading that is less
than 50 Megohms shall be investigated.
.2
Insulation Resistance.
.3
Continuity Check.
.4
Proper Phasing, ABC.
.13
Cables/Busbar
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspection and testing. Compile all test
results in accordance with the Equipment Test
Schedule to be submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the Consultant.
2.
Record type and size of cables on test sheets and
check against the single – line drawing.
3.
Conduct tests on each set of cables and busbars of
400 A and above.
4.
Confirm that all hardware is in accordance with the
torque requirements of the manufacturer, and mark
off all hardware after verification.
.2
Cabling Inspection
1.
For cables which are likely to have a sheath
current, check to ensure that metal supports are not
used. The use of fiber plates is acceptable.
2.
Check for the proper physical protection of cables
through concrete openings or metal plating.
3.
Check that all power cables, including Teck cables
etc., are properly spaced (by one cable diameter
unless specifically indicated otherwise in the
Contract Documents) and secured by proper clips.
4.
Check insulators and bushings for cracks and other
physical defects.
5.
Visually inspect cables where possible throughout
their run and check conditions of the following:
1.
Use of proper lugs.
2.
Cables are properly shaped without sharp
bends.
6.
Open cables are properly supported on racks, trays
or ladders in buildings. No concentrated stress
points exist.
7.
Insulation jacket damage.
8.
Cables at duct mouth for wear or cracking.
9.
For rubber insulated cables inspect stress cones or
terminations, and check the following:
1.
Terminals for tightness and overheating.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 14 of 18
DATE: April 2012
2.
Stress cones and terminations for cracks,
dirt, or tracking.
.14
Current Transformer and Potential Transformer
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspections and tests and compile all test
reports.
2.
Compile a separate test report for each set of
current transformers (CTs) and potential
transformers (PTs). Test reports shall be included
within the results of the devices that the CTs and
PTs feed.
3.
Perform CT saturation tests, polarity tests, ratio,
winding resistance and insulation resistance tests.
4.
Verify correct taps and ratios on CTs and PTs.
5.
Ensure that CT circuits are not open circuited, and
ensure any temporary shorting devices are
removed.
6.
Ensure correct fusing on PTs
.2
Inspection of CTs and PTs
1.
Check that nameplate and equipment identification
corresponds with shop drawings.
Check the provision and correctness of phase
2.
markers for power connections and cabling.
3.
Inspect the physical conditions of and any damage
to housing and terminations.
4.
Check the structural supports and connections,
grounding security and connection.
5.
Terminal and wire numbering information shall be
included in the as-built drawings.
.15
Protective Relay
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspection and tests, and compile all test
results on relay test sheets approved by the
Consultant.
2.
Conduct tests on all protective relays, auxiliary
voltage and current relays, overloads, specialty
protection relays including generator, transformer
and switchgear relays, trip supervisory relays and
trip relays.
3.
Calibrate all relays if tests indicate that the actual
set points are outside the tolerance indicated in the
coordination study, or recommended by the
manufacturer. Record settings as found, and as
revised
.2
Relay Testing
1.
Use special test equipment and methods as
available from the relay manufacturer. Take all
precautions recommended by the manufacturer.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 15 of 18
DATE: April 2012
2.
.3
Include a copy of the relay manufacturer’s test and
commissioning schedule as part of the test report.
3.
Submit calculations to substantiate current/voltage
figures used in tests where these are not obvious.
Protective Relay Testing, Power Monitor Testing
1.
For motor protection relays and similar relays, use
3-phase current for unbalanced protection testing,
unless recommended otherwise by the
manufacturer.
2.
Use 6-channel current relay (3-phase line, 3-phase
load) test units, or equivalent for differential
protection relays.
.16
Power Monitoring
.1
General
1.
Conduct inspections and tests, and compile test
results on setup and test sheets approved by the
Consultant.
2.
Conduct tests on all power monitors and power
monitoring features on protective relays.
Verify current transformer and potential transformer
3.
windings.
4.
Verify and correct, if necessary, current transformer
and potential transformer orientation and polarities.
Verify correct power flow direction.
.2
Power Monitor Testing – General
1.
Use special test equipment and methods as
available from monitor manufacturer. Take all
precautions recommended by the manufacturer.
2.
Include a copy of power monitor manufacturer’s
test and commissioning schedule as part of the test
report.
3.
Submit calculations to substantiate current/voltage
figures used in tests where these are not obvious.
4.
Verify current transformer and potential transformer
windings.
.3
Protective Relay Testing, Power Monitor Testing
1.
Use 3-phase current and voltage relay test units for
verification of power monitoring devices, including
verification of power flow quadrant.
.4
Approved Suppliers:
1.
Schneider Canada Inc.
1.
Eaton Yale Company Inc. Cutler Hammer.
.17
Coordination Study Related Calibration and Testing
.1
Test and calibrate, using relay test equipment, all settings
as indicated by the coordination study, and approved by
the Consultant. Show “as found” and “as left” settings and
test results.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 16 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
.4
.18
Test and calibrate new breakers that have been installed
after the coordination study. Incorporate test results as part
of the study.
Relays (including, but not limited to: feeder protection,
differential protection, synchronization, generator
protection and transformer protection), motor starters
relays and power meters to be calibrated and tested prior
to final energization.
Listing relays (including, but not limited to; feeder
protection, differential protection, synchronization,
generator protection and transformer protection), motors
starters relays and power meters to be calibrated and
tested during switchovers or scheduled power outages.
(Thermo graphic Scan) / (Ultrasonic Scan) Survey
.1
Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
Remove all necessary covers prior to scanning.
2.
Inspect for physical, electrical, and mechanical
condition.
3.
Conduct survey on (120/208V), (347/600V),
electrical distribution equipment indicated on the
Drawings or defined below:
1.
All dry type transformers.
2.
All 600 V and 208 V 3-phase panelboards.
3.
All starters.
4.
All UPS’s.
.2
Test Parameters
1.
Scanning/detection system shall have the ability to
detect 1ºC difference between subject area and
reference at 30ºC.
2.
Equipment shall detect emitted radiation and
convert detected radiation to visual signal.
3.
Infrared surveys shall be performed during periods
of the maximum loading possible but at a minimum
of twenty percent (20%) of rated load of the
electrical equipment being inspected.
.3
Test Results
1.
Interpretation of temperature gradients requires an
experienced technician with a minimum of 5 years
of experience within the last 5 years in this type of
work. Some general guidelines are:
1.
Temperature gradients of 3ºC to 7ºC
indicate a possible deficiency and warrant
investigation.
2.
Temperature gradients of 7ºC to 15ºC
indicate a deficiency; repair as quickly as
possible.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Page 17 of 18
DATE: April 2012
3.
4.
.4
.19
Temperature gradients of 16ºC and above
indicate a major deficiency; repair
immediately.
Provide infrared and digital photo recording
(thermo-grams) of each irregularity. Submit
an electronic photograph of the general
area around the hot spot. Label and identify
the data/photo clearly.
Report Sheets
1.
Report shall be provided in accordance with
subsection 2.2 above, and shall include the
following:
List of equipment that was scanned by
1.
name.
2.
Deficient items shall be identified on a
separate page to consist of the following:
Equipment identification and location.
1.
2.
Photograph of item
3.
Thermograph of item
4.
Temperature measurement in
degrees Celsius (ºC) of the following:
1.
Defective component.
2.
Reference component
3.
Over temperature of
component.
4.
Difference to ambient
temperature.
5.
Electrical load on device during
inspection:
1.
Phase unbalance, if present.
2.
Probable cause of deficient
item.
3.
Recommendation for
corrective action.
Load Survey
.1
Measure and record Phase-to-Phase Voltage, Phase to
Neutral Voltage, Phase Current, Neutral Current and
Ground Current of the following:
All 208 Volt Panelboards.
1.
2.
All primaries and secondaries of all dry type
transformers; record tap settings.
3.
All inputs and outputs of all UPS units.
.2
Measure and record Magnitudes of Harmonic Phase and
Neutral Currents at all of the equipment mentioned in
subsection 3.1. Identify the current magnitudes for the 3rd,
5th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, 15th, 17th, 19th and 21st harmonic
(based on 60 Hz).
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16031
INSPECTION AND TESTING
DATE: April 2012
Page 18 of 18
.3
.4
.5
Utilize test instruments with a maximum error of ±2% and
submit two signed, dated and bound copies of typed result
sheets to the Consultant.
Measure power quality standard measurements: sags,
swells, and wave shape fault events, rms volts, rms amps,
and frequency summaries. Measure transients to 1000
volts peak, 130 microseconds duration.
Measure at the main switchboard, power Consumption:
Watts, VA, VAR, PF (true and displacement), Demand,
KWh.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 16
GENERAL
Summary
.1
Comply with the requirements of Division 1 - General
Requirements and Section 16010 - Electrical General
Requirements.
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.2
Section 16016 – Staging and Transition
.3
Section 16335 – Temporary and Transition Electrical Equipment
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 0 General Requirements – Canadian
Electrical Code – Part 2.
.2
Comply with the latest editions of CSA C22.1 Canadian
Electrical Code – Part 1, Provincial Electrical Authority
Safety Codes and Bulletins, and local codes and
requirements which govern the installation. Where these
regulations conflict, comply with the most stringent
condition.
.3
Comply with latest editions of the CSA Certification
Standards and Bulletins.
.4
CAN3-C235 Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 050,000 V.
.2
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Association of Canada
(EEMAC).
.3
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
.4
Institute of the Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
.5
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
.6
Canadian Gas Association (CGA).
.7
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) and Underwriters Laboratories
Canada (ULC).
.8
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
.9
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).
.10
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA).
.11
Instrument Society of America (ISA): RP12.6, Wiring Practices for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation – Part I: Intrinsic
Safety.
Related Sections
References
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 16
Definitions
.1
The following are definitions used in Division 16 - Electrical. Refer
also to Division 1 – General Requirements.
.2
Inspection Authority means the Electrical Safety Authority or the
Ministry of Labour.
.3
Supply Authority is Power Stream Corporation, which is the
electrical power company responsible for delivering electrical
power to the Site.
.4
Electrical Code or Code means Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
.5
CEC means latest edition of the Canadian Electrical Code.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16050 – Basic Materials & Methods as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Shop Drawings:
.1
Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
.2
Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade.
.3
Large junction and pull boxes.
.4
Terminal junction boxes.
.5
Panelboards and circuit breaker data.
.6
Wiring devices.
.7
Control devices.
.8
Control relays.
.9
Timers
.10
Fuses.
.11
Magnetic contactors.
.12
Transformers.
.2
Information Submittals: Test Report: Sound test certification for
dry type power transformers (0 to 600-volt, primary).
.1
UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within scope of
Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and
have an applied UL listing mark.
.2
Hazardous Areas: Materials and devices shall be specifically
approved for hazardous areas of the class, division, and group
shown and of a construction that will ensure safe performance
when properly used and maintained.
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
Quality Assurance
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
1.8
1.9
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 16
Extra Materials
.1
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the spare parts
and special tools required for maintenance in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements.
.1
Six of each type and each current rating installed
.1
Equipment Enclosures: Compatible with the room or area
environment where the equipment is located and unless otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents, shall be in accordance with
classification specified in Section 16010 – Electrical General
Requirements
.2
Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
factory finish all equipment inside and outside with ANSI/ASA #61
grey paint.
Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts:
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
General
Individual Magnetic Motor Starters and Contactors
.1
Approved Suppliers/Manufacturers:
.1
Cutler-Hammer by Eaton Corporation
.2
Schneider Canada Inc. (Square D)
.3
Siemens Canada Ltd.
.2
Magnetic motor starters: Combination type, full voltage,reduced
voltage or multi-speed type, reversing or non-reversing, EEMAC
Size 1 minimum, rated for system fault capacity as indicated in the
Contract Documents or required to complete the scope of the
Work. Intermediate EEMAC sizes are not acceptable.
.3
Overload relays: Adjustable, ambient temperature compensated,
manually resettable from enclosure door, one element for each
ungrounded phase.
.4
Overload relay heaters: Field installed, selected to match installed
motor nameplate data.
.5
Contactor: Electrically drawn in and held.
.6
Reversing starters: Contactors mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
.7
Circuit disconnecting means: Circuit breaker as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
.8
Motor starter circuit breaker: Moulded case, with adjustable
magnetic only trips. Must coordinate with thermal overload device.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
2.3
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 16
.9
Mechanical interlock: Prevent opening of the door when
disconnecting device is in the ON position.
.10
Control transformer: Fused 120 V secondary winding, unfused leg
grounded.
.11
Auxiliary contacts: In addition to contacts indicated in the Contract
Documents, a minimum of one normally open and one normally
closed spare contact with separate poles.
.12
Operator devices: Heavy duty, industrial, oil tight, functions as
indicated in the Contract Documents (pushbuttons, selector
switches and indicating lights), rated 120 V AC, wired to terminal
blocks.
.13
Indicating lights: Integral transformer type, 12 V secondary, pushto-test with long life incandescent or clustered LED lamps
replaceable from the front without disconnecting power.
.14
Heater and lighting contactors: Similar to magnetic motor starters,
but without thermal overload devices.
.15
Heater and lighting circuit breakers: Moulded case, with integral
thermal magnetic trips, interrupting rating 18,000 A RMS
symmetrical minimum at 600 V.
.16
Internal power wiring: Stranded copper, minimum #12 AWG, rated
600 V, sized to accommodate the largest load that the starter is
capable of switching.
.17
Control wiring: Stranded copper, minimum #14 AWG, 600 V rated.
Utilize extra flexible conductors for wiring to panel doors.
.18
Wire identification: Oil-resistant, Type Z markers by Wieland
Electric Inc. at conductor ends. Adhesive cloth or Mylar types will
not be accepted.
.19
Terminal blocks: Compression type, modular, 25 A, 600 V
minimum, identified with numbers identical to wire numbers.
Supply a minimum of six spare terminal blocks.
.20
Maximum number of wires under each terminal screw: Two.
.21
Wiring and schematic diagram: Permanently mounted inside
enclosure.
.1
General purpose relays: Heavy duty, industrial, EEMAC rated,
electrically held, 120 V AC coil, minimum 10 A, 120 V AC
convertible contacts, Type P by Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd
(Allen-Bradley Canada Ltd), Type X by Schneider Electric Ltd
Square D Canada, or Type AR by Cutler-Hammer Canada. by
Eaton Yale Company
.2
Magnetic latching relays: Heavy duty, industrial, EEMAC rated,
magnetically held, electrically released, 120 V AC coil, minimum
10 A, 120 V AC convertible contacts
Control Relays
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
.1
2.4
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 16
Type NM by Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd (AllenBradley), Type XL by Schneider Canada Inc. (Square D),
Type ARML by Eaton Yale Company (Cutler-Hammer).
.3
Timing relays: ON delay, OFF delay or Interval type as indicated
in the Contract Documents, 120 V AC coil, minimum 10A, 120 V
AC convertible contacts, knob adjustable timing, timing range as
indicated in the Contract Documents,
.1
Type PT, or NT by Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd
(Allen-Bradley), Type X by Schneider Canada Inc. (Square
D), Type ARPT by Eaton Yale Company (Cutler-Hammer).
.4
Double voltage relays: Convertible contacts, number and type as
indicated, metal barrier between coil and contact terminations,
where required by the Inspection Authorities.
.5
Thermistor relays: Type 3UN2100 or 3UN2131-1A by Siemens
Canada Limited (Siemens Electric Ltd.) compatible with the
respective motor winding temperature sensors (thermistors).
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Eaton Yale Company (Cutler Hammer).
.2
Siemens Canada Limited.
.3
Schneider Canada Inc. (Square D).
.2
Supply 600 V and 208/120 V panelboards from the same
manufacturer.
.3
Circuit breaker type panelboards: Deadfront design, equipped with
double or single row, bolt-on, thermal magnetic,
non-interchangeable, moulded case branch circuit breakers of the
sizes and types indicated in the Contract Documents
.4
Ratings: Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
circuit breaker panelboards and components with the following
minimum (symmetrical) short circuit ratings:
.1
600 V Power Panelboards
18,000A
.2
600/347 V Lighting Panelboards
14,000A
.3
208/120 V Panelboards
10,000A
.5
Fusible type panelboards: Dead-front, safety switch type, double
row of fusible switches. Minimum assembly rating, 100,000 A
symmetrical.
.6
Fusible switches: Quick-make, quick-break, heavy duty, industrial
type with provision for padlocking in the OFF position and fuse
holders suitable for High Rupture Capacity (“HRC”) fuses type
HRC1-J.
.7
Busbars: Tin-plated copper equipped with solderless lugs for
incoming cables where main circuit disconnecting device is not
indicated in the Contract Documents.
Panel Boards
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
2.5
2.6
2.7
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 16
.8
Doors: With spring latches and cylinder locks keyed alike, two
keys per panelboard.
.9
Circuit directory: Framed Plexiglas enclosed legend, located on
inside of door.
.10
600 V power panelboard enclosure size: To accommodate the
equivalent of 42 single pole circuit devices minimum.
.11
Lock-on/lock-out devices: Minimum 10 percent of 15 A to 30A
circuits provided. Turn over unused devices to Region.
.12
Isolated ground bus: In designated panels as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
.13
Ground fault protection circuit breakers: Class A type, 120 V,
automatic shunt trip, with facilities for testing and resetting as
indicated in the Contract Documents.
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Bussman Canada Inc.
.2
Cooper Industries plc
.3
Eaton Corporation
.4
Ferraz Shawmut Canada Inc.
.5
General Electric Company
.6
S&C Electric Company
.2
Type: As in the Contract Documents, HRC (high rupturing
capacity) with fault interrupting capability of 200,000A
symmetrical.
.3
Rating: HRC1-J fast acting 600A maximum rating and HRC1-L,
fast acting for circuits exceeding 600A.
.1
Non-hazardous area: 120 V AC, low current, high decibel,
vibrating, heavy duty, weatherproof, field adjustable output range,
78-103 dB at 3040 mm, Adaptahorn 876-N5 by Edwards Signaling
& Security Systems, Vibratone Model 350 by Federal Signal Corp
.2
Hazardous area: 120 V AC, low current, high decibel, vibrating,
100 dB at 3040 mm. Adaptahorn 878-120 by Edwards Signaling &
Security Systems, Model 31X by Federal Signal Corp.
.1
UL 810, NEMA CP 1, IEEE 18, and NFPA 70, Article 460.
.2
Enclosed, indoor, dustproof, three-phase capacitor units
containing internally mounted, indicating type, high interruptingcapacity, current-limiting fuses with blown fuse indicator and
discharge resistors.
Fuses
Horn
Industrial Capacitors
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
2.8
2.9
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 7 of 16
.3
Kilovar (KVAR) Ratings:
.1
Kilovar ratings of capacitors connected to individual motor
circuits were selected based on expected motor power
factor.
.2
Check motor nameplate and manufacturer’s power factor
and no-load current data for actual motor installed.
.3
Reduce capacitor kVAR if required, so the size does not
exceed the motor manufacturer’s recommended maximum
size,
.4
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
Eaton Corporation
.2
General Electric Co.
.3
Square D Co.
.1
Supply distribution transformers of one manufacturer throughout
the Contract where indicated in the Contract Documents.
.2
Approved Suppliers/Manufacturers:
.1
Schneider Electric
.2
Cutler-Hammer by Eaton Corporation
.3
Delta Transformers, Inc.
.3
Design: General purpose, dry type, air cooled, 60 Hz, low sound
level with vibration isolators, rating and voltages as indicated in
the Contract Documents.
.4
Insulation: Class 185C minimum with a maximum 80C
temperature rise in 40C ambient, Windings: Copper, delta
connected primary, wye connected secondary with neutral
grounding provision.
.5
Mounting accessories: Mounting brackets for wall or ceiling
suspension as required.
.6
Enclosures: Ventilated, sprinkler proof in office areas and
electrical rooms; and non-ventilated in plant areas.
.7
Maximum Sound Level: NEMA ST 20:
.1
40 decibels for 0 to 9 kVA.
.2
45 decibels for 10 to 50 kVA.
.3
50 decibels for 51 to 150 kVA.
.4
55 decibels for 151 to 300 kVA.
.5
60 decibels for 301 to 500 kVA.
Distribution Transformers
Convenience and Power Receptacles
.1
Convenience receptacles: Heavy duty, specification grade, 5262
series, duplex, polarized, three wire grounding, 15A rating or as
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, 125 V AC, white,
with terminals suitable for side or back wiring and break-off fin for
two-circuit use.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
.1
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 8 of 16
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell Canada Inc.;
2.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices;
3.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated;
4.
Slater Industries Inc.;
5.
Smith & Stone Inc.;
6.
Leviton Canada Ltd.;
7.
Pass & Seymour Canada Inc.
.2
Single outlet receptacles: Heavy duty, specification grade, 5261
series, specification grade, three wire grounding, polarized, 15A
rating or as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, 125 V
AC, white bakelite, with terminals suitable for side or back wiring.
Supply twist lock type where indicated in the Contract Documents.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell Canada Inc.;
2.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices;
3.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated;
4.
Smith & Stone Inc.
5.
Pass & Seymour Canada Inc.
6.
Leviton Canada Ltd.
.3
Corrosion resistant receptacles: For below grade and outdoor
applications.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated
2.
Smith & Stone Inc.
3.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices
4.
Hubbell Canada Inc.
5.
Pass & Seymour Canada Inc.
.4
Power receptacles: Heavy duty, specification grade, single outlet
duplex, three wire grounding, 15 ampere rating or as indicated in
the Contract Documents, 250 V AC, ivory Bakelite, with terminals
suitable for either side or back wiring.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell Canada Inc.
2.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices
3.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated
4.
Leviton Canada Ltd.
.5
Polyphase power receptacles: Heavy duty, specification grade,
three pole, four wire grounding, ampere rating as indicated, 250 V
AC, single outlet, black bakelite, with pressure type terminals.
Hubbell Canada Inc., Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell Canada Inc.
2.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices
3.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated
4.
Leviton Canada Ltd.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 9 of 16
.6
Welder receptacles: Heavy duty, weatherproof, single outlet, four
wire, four pole, 60 A, 600 V AC, black bakelite, pressure type
terminals, cast iron back box, angle adapter and spring loaded
cover
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
AREA Series manufactured by Cooper CrouseHinds,
2.
WR Series manufactured by Killark Electric
Manufacturing Company,
3.
Star-line Series manufactured by Pyle National of
Canada Inc., or
4.
ADJA Series manufactured by Appleton Electric
Limited.
.7
Ground fault interrupter receptacle: Class A type, rated 15A,
120 V, circuit interrupter, duplex type, ivory bakelite, integral solid
state ground sensing, facility for testing.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Arrow-Hart, Cooper Wiring Devices
2.
Leviton Canada Ltd.
3.
Bryant Wiring Devices, Hubbell Incorporated
4.
Pass & Seymour Canada Inc.
.1
Switch: Specification grade, flush mount, back and side wired,
ivory high strength toggle, rated 20 A, 120 V AC.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
20 AC Series manufactured by Pass & Seymour
1.
Canada Inc.,
2.
GE595 Series manufactured by Smith & Stone Inc.
3.
490 Series manufactured by Bryant Wiring Devices
4.
199 Series manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Cooper
Wiring Devices
5.
122 Series manufactured by Hubbell Canada Inc.
6.
122 Series manufactured by Leviton Canada Ltd.
2.10 Limit Switches
2.11 Switch and Receptacle Cover Plates
.1
Flush mounted switches and receptacles in dry locations: Type
302 stainless steel, 0.8 mm thick, with a brushed finish.
.2
Surface mounted, dry location switch cover plates: Cast ferrous
alloy type, guarded, gasketted.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
DS32G manufactured by Cooper Industries Ltd.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds,
2.
FSTG manufactured by Killark Electric
Manufacturing Co., or
3.
FSK-ITSG manufactured by Appleton Electric Ltd.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 10 of 16
.3
Wet, damp and corrosive area switch cover plates: Cast ferrous
alloy, epoxy coated, gasketted, toggle type,
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
DS185 manufactured by Cooper industries Ltd.
Crouse-Hinds,
2.
FS-1-WSCA manufactured by O-Z/Gedney Inc., or
3.
FZ type manufactured by Killark Electric
Manufacturing Co.
.4
PVC conduit system switch cover plates: Gasketted, PVC, toggle
type,
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
VSC 15/10 manufactured by IPEX Inc., or
2.
E98TSC manufactured by Thomas & Betts Ltd.,
Carlon.
.5
Receptacle outlet cover plates: Weatherproof, gasketted, cast
ferrous or aluminum, with self closing, spring loaded covers,
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
WLR Series manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,
2.
FCL Series manufactured by Killark Electric
Manufacturing Co., or
3.
FSK-WR Series manufactured by Appleton Electric
Ltd.
4.
PVC conduit system receptacle cover plates:
Gasketted, PVC, with self closing, spring loaded
covers, or W Series BY IPEX Inc., E98GDR by
Thomas & Betts Ltd Carlon.
.6
Multi-gang outlets: except in office and finished areas, multiple
single gang covers only. Multi-gang covers are not acceptable.
2.12 Low Voltage, Secondary Surge Protective Equipment
.1
NEMA LA 1, ANSI C62.11.
.2
Surge Capacitor:
.1
Impregnated with non-PCB, biodegradable dielectric fluid.
.2
Integral discharge resistor which will drain residual voltage
to 50-volts crest in less than 1 minute after disconnection
from circuit.
.3
Arrestor: High strength metal oxide valve elements enclosed in
high strength, corrosion-resistant, molded resin housing.
.4
Equip capacitor and arrestor with mounting nipple, flat washer,
and nut suitable for knockout or bracket mounting.
2.13 Support And Framing Channels
.1
Carbon Steel Framing Channel:
.1
Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge,
ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.
.2
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 11 of 16
.2
Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with
electro-deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint.
.3
PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with
40-mil polyvinyl chloride coating.
.4
Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316
stainless steel, 12-gauge.
.5
Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:
.1
Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
.2
Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32.
.6
Nonmetallic Framing Channel:
.1
Material: Fire retardent, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin.
.2
Channel fitting of same material as channel.
.3
Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
.7
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
B-Line Systems, Inc.
.2
Unistrut Corp.
.3
Allied Electrical Group Inc. - Aickenstrut.
.1
Material: Laminated plastic.
.2
Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.
.3
Color: White, engraved to a black core.
.4
Engraving:
.1
Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: Name of drive controlled
on one, two, or three lines, as required.
.2
Panelboards: Panelboard designation, service voltage, and
phases.
.1
Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 3-mm.
.2
Panelboards: 6-mm.
.1
General: Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.
.2
Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company or approved
equivalent.
2.14 Nameplates
2.15 Letter Height:
2.16 Switchboard Matting
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 12 of 16
2.17 Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
.1
Approved Suppliers/manufacturers: APC (American Power
Conversion) by Schneider Electric or approved equivalent.
.2
Type: On-line, no-break, batteries continuously in circuit, with
static bypass, suitable for powering the loads as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
.3
Rating: Minimum 5kVA rating or as indicated in the Contract
Documents, 120 V AC, single phase, 60 Hz input, 120 V AC,
single phase, 60 Hz output.
.4
Voltage regulation: ±5% maximum for line or load changes from 0
to 100% under any battery condition.
.5
Surge protection: Comply with category B, ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and
ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
.6
Frequency: Input synchronized with supply, output 60 Hz ±0.5%.
.7
Total harmonic distortion: 5% maximum.
.8
Battery: Sealed, maintenance free, with a minimum 10-year life,
rated to supply full load output at the rated voltage for a minimum
of 10 minutes minimum.
.9
Metering: Indicate the following:
.1
AC Input Current
.2
AC Output Current
.3
AC Output Voltage
.4
Output Frequency
.5
DC Voltage
.10
Fault indication: One normally open and one normally closed,
voltage free, common fault contact, 2 A, 120 VAC, for remote
indication. Indicate individual faults locally.
.11
Input and output connections: Hard wired. Output from
receptacles is not acceptable.
.1
Occupancy sensors: Dual or quad element, passive infrared
detectors, 3 wire, 120 V AC, rated to switch 1200 W electronic
ballasted fluorescent or incandescent loads, 30 second to 20
minutes field adjustable ON-time, field adjustable ambient light
sensing, built-in OFF-AUTO-ON override switch. Manufactured by
Sensor Switch Inc., distributed manufactured by ESL Canada Inc.
.1
Non-hazardous areas: 120 V AC, heavy duty, weatherproof, red
lens.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
2.18 Occupancy Sensors
2.19 Flashing Lights
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
1.
2.
3.
4.
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 13 of 16
AdaptaBeacon 97C Series manufactured by
Edwards Signaling & Security Systems,
VDAS manufactured by Cooper Crouse-Hinds,
Industrial Strobe manufactured by Applied Strobe
Technology Co. Ltd.,
371DST manufactured by Federal Signal Corp.
.2
Explosion proof areas: 120 V AC, approved for use in specific
area, red lens.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
AdaptaBeacon, 50REX-5 manufactured by
1.
Edwards Signaling & Security Systems,
2.
EV Series manufactured by Cooper Crouse-Hinds,
3.
Factory Sealed Strobe manufactured by Applied
Strobe Technology Co. Ltd.,
4.
Model 27XST Series B manufactured by Federal
Signal Corp.
.1
Non-hazardous area: 120 V AC, low current, high decibel,
vibrating, heavy duty, weatherproof, field adjustable output range,
78-103 dB at 3040 mm,
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Adaptahorn 876-N5 manufactured by Edwards
Signaling & Security Systems,
Vibratone Model 350 manufactured by Federal
2.
Signal Corp.,
3.
WH Series manufactured by Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
.2
Hazardous area: 120 V AC, low current, high decibel, vibrating,
100 dB at 3040 mm.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Adaptahorn 878-120 manufactured by Edwards
Signaling & Security Systems,
2.
Model 31X manufactured by Federal Signal Corp.,
3.
ETH High Power Horn manufactured by Cooper
Crouse-Hinds.
.1
Design: Dual ionization chambers, 85 dB at 300 mm piezo electric
alarm, visual power on and alarm indicator,
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Type 330 LR manufactured by Mirtone Industries
Ltd., or
2.
Type 330 LR manufactured by Chubb Edwards
Company.
.2
Supply: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
.3
Auxiliary contacts: Form C, rated 120 V AC, 2A minimum.
2.20 Horn
2.21 Smoke Alarms
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 14 of 16
2.22 Motor Protection Relay
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
General Electric Company (GE) - Multilin or approved
equivalent.
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd (Allen-Bradley).
.2
Omron Canada Inc.
.3
Potter & Brumfield Inc.
.4
Schneider Canada Inc (Square D).
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Honeywell International Inc. (Micro-Switch).
.2
Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd (Allen-Bradley).
2.23 Solid State Timing Relay
2.24 Valve Limit Switch
2.25 Main Power Failure Relay (Single Phase)
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Potter & Brumfield Inc.
.2
Tyco Electronics Corporation (Agastat).
.3
Omron Canada Inc.
2.26 Main Power Failure Relay (Three Phase)
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Carlo Gavazzi (Canada) Inc or approved equivalent.
.1
Provide disconnect switches of the type and rating indicated in the
Contract Documents.
.2
Flush-mount fractional horsepower disconnect switches in
concealed conduit areas.
.3
Provide fusible disconnect switches complete with fuses.
.4
Provide mounting pedestal for units located adjacent to equipment
in open areas.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Disconnect Switch Installation
Manual Motor Starter Installation
.1
Provide manual starters as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.2
Flush-mount manual starters in concealed conduit areas.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 15 of 16
Individual Magnetic Motor Starter and Contactor Installation
.1
Provide starters and contactors as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Connect auxiliary control devices.
.1
Provide panel-boards of type and size indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Terminate and connect field wiring.
.3
Provide fusible panelboards complete with fuses.
.4
For ground fault protected circuits, wire in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
.1
Install fuses in mounting assembly before energizing circuit.
.2
Verify that the fuses physically match mounting devices. Where
fuses and holders do not match, replace the holder.
.3
Provide sizes and types of fuses in accordance with the
requirements of the ESA.
Panel board Installation
Fuses
Distribution Transformer Installation
.1
Provide distribution transformers, mounted in the upright position,
as indicated in the Contract Documents. Verify that wall or ceiling
is adequate to support transformer. Provide additional bracing as
required.
.2
Install transformer to permit full accessibility to wiring and tap
connections. For floor mounted units, allow 150 mm of clearance
from walls or other equipment to permit adequate ventilation
through and around the housing.
.3
Adjust vibration isolators for optimum noise suppression.
Convenience and Power Receptacle and Light Switch Installation
.1
Provide receptacles and light switches as indicated in the Contract
Documents; the location of outlets shown on the electrical
Drawings is approximate. Measure Work requiring accurate
dimensions on Site or from architectural and structural Drawings.
.2
Do not install outlets back-to-back in walls. Offset boxes by a
minimum of 150 mm.
.3
Wire ground fault circuit interrupters in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
.4
After interior finish is erected, make any necessary adjustments
without additional charge.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
DATE: April 2012
3.8
3.9
Section 16050
2006-08-30
Page 16 of 16
Switch and Receptacle Cover Plate Installation
.1
Install cover plates after painting of room surfaces.
.1
Provide UPS as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.2
Carry out tests and start-up procedures as recommended by the
manufacturer.
.3
Train the Region’s staff in all aspects of operation and
maintenance of the UPS system.
.1
Provide occupancy sensors as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Adjust and calibrate occupancy sensors in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
.1
Provide flashing lights and horns as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Adjust in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
.1
Install smoke detectors as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.2
Interconnect smoke detectors as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Uninterruptible Power Supply
3.10 Occupancy Sensors
3.11 Flashing Lights and Horns
3.12 Smoke Detectors
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16060
GROUNDING
Page 1 of 5
DATE: April 2012
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
References
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 0.4 Bonding and Grounding of Electrical
Equipment (Protective Grounding).
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 41 Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
.2
Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC) requirements.
.3
Institute of the Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
.1
IEEE No. 80 IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation
Grounding.
.2
IEEE No. 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent
Connections Used in Substation Grounding.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16060 – Grounding as indicated in Schedule
‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Action Submittals:
.1
Shop Drawings: Product data for the following:
1.
Exothermic weld connectors.
.2
Submit three certified copies of field test results.
.1
Material: Copper
.2
Diameter: Minimum 19 mm.
.3
Length: 3000 mm.
.1
As specified by the OESC for the current carrying conductor
capacity.
.2
Ground conductors in corrosive environments: Insulated or having
tinned copper where in contact with aluminum or corrosive
material, soil or atmosphere.
.3
Grounding bus in electrical rooms where indicated in the Contract
Documents: Copper, minimum 50 mm cross-section or as
indicated in the Contract Documents.
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Ground Rod
Ground Conductors
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16060
GROUNDING
Page 2 of 5
DATE: April 2012
2.3
2.4
Connectors
.1
Exothermic Weld Type:
.1
Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct
burial.
.2
Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process.
.3
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon.
2.
Continental Industries Inc. - Thermoweld.
.2
Compression Type:
.1
Compress deforming type; wrought copper extrusion
material.
.2
Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
.3
Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4
AWG and larger.
.4
Barrels pre-filled with oxide-inhibiting and anti-seizing
compound and sealed.
.5
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Burndy Corp.
2.
Thomas and Betts Co.
3.
Ilso Corp.
.3
Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper
alloy material.
.1
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Burndy Corp.
2.
Thomas and Betts Co.
.1
Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover
marked GROUND ROD.
.2
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
Slaten Industries Inc.
.2
Christy Co.; No. G5.
.3
Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I R Series.
.1
Interconnect conduits terminating in motor control centres with
bare copper conductor. Connect to MCC ground bus.
.2
Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to
supplementary grounding electrodes.
.3
Ground each separately derived system neutral to the nearest
effectively grounded building structural steel member or separate
grounding electrode.
Grounding Wells
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
General
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16060
GROUNDING
Page 3 of 5
DATE: April 2012
3.2
3.3
.4
Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures,
exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment,
metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and cables,
receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems.
.5
Shielded Instrumentation Cables: Ground shields at each splice or
termination in accordance with the recommendations of the splice
or termination manufacturer.
.6
Shielded Control Cables:
Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog
.1
signal.
.2
Expose shield a minimum of 1 inch at the termination to
field instrument and apply heat shrink tube.
.3
Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than
one point.
.1
Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power
conductors and control circuits above 50 volts.
.2
Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment
grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent
carrying grounding bus.
.3
Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.
.4
Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all
equipment containing a ground bus.
.5
Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that
bus.
.6
Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.
.7
Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end,
and to intermediate metallic enclosures.
.8
Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment
grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or
with 9.5 mm machine screws.
.1
Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in
motor feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.
.2
Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment
grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent
carrying grounding bus.
.3
Motors Less Than 10 kW: Furnish compression, spade-type
terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw.
.4
Motors 10 kW and Greater: Tap motor frame or equipment
housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug type terminal
Wire Connections
Motor Grounding
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16060
GROUNDING
Page 4 of 5
DATE: April 2012
connected with minimum 5/16 inch brass threaded stud with bolt
and washer.
3.4
3.5
3.6
.5
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.
.6
Circuits 20 Amps or Greater: Tap motor frame or equipment
housing; install solderless terminal with minimum 8 mm diameter
bolts.
.1
Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.
.2
Install with connection point below finished grade, unless
otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
.3
Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.
.1
Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas.
.2
Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.
.3
Place 150 mm crushed rock in bottom of each well.
.1
General:
.1
Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld,
mechanical, or compression-type connectors; or brazing.
.2
Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or
compression type connectors.
.3
Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at
connection points to allow good metal to-metal contact.
.4
Notify the Consultant prior to backfilling ground
connections.
.2
Exothermic Weld Type:
Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface.
.1
.2
Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
.3
Avoid using badly worn molds.
.4
Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds.
.5
After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld
area and thoroughly clean joint.
.3
Compression Type:
.1
Install in accordance with the connector manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2
Install connectors of the proper size for the grounding
conductors and ground rods specified in the Contract
Documents.
Install using the connector manufacturer’s compression
.3
tool having proper sized dies.
Ground Rods
Grounding Wells
Connections
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16060
GROUNDING
DATE: April 2012
Page 5 of 5
.4
3.7
Mechanical Type:
.1
Apply a homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust
and corrosion inhibitor before making connection.
.2
Install in accordance with the connector manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.3
Do not conceal mechanical connections.
Metal Structure Grounding
.1
.2
.3
3.8
Manhole and Handhole Grounding
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.9
Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical
structural elements to the grounding system.
Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to
the platforms.
Provide electrical contact between metal frames and
railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, and
instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying circuits to
these devices.
Install one ground rod inside each manhole.
Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 100 to 150 mm above floor.
Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and
accessible.
Connect all noncurrent carrying metal parts, and any
metallic raceway grounding bushings to the ground rod
with No. 6 AWG copper conductor.
Transformer Grounding
.1
.2
.3
Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to the
system ground network, and to any additional indicated
grounding electrodes.
Bond neutrals of substation transformers to the substation
grounding grid and system grounding network.
Bond neutral of pad mounted transformers to network of
four locally driven ground rods.
3.10 Surge Protection Equipment Grounding
.1
Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to the equipment
ground bus.
.1
As specified in Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing.
3.11 Field Quality Control
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 1 of 11
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
Intent of Section
.1
This Section describes the main types of wires and cables to be
installed in this Contract, as well as any special installation
procedures and precautions.
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 131 Type TECK 90 Cables.
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 38 Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables.
.3
CSA C22.2 No. 174 Cables and Cable Glands for use in
Hazardous Locations.
.4
CSA C68.3 Power Cables with Thermoset Insulation.
.5
CSA C21.1 600 V Control Cable.
.6
CSA C21.2 300 V Control Cable.
.2
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
.1
ICEA S-66-524.
.3
All power cables must be CSA approved for application.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16122 – Wires and Cables as indicated in
Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Number and sizes of wires (and associated raceways) indicated in
the Contract Drawings are based on free air ratings and are not
necessarily the exact number and sizes required for specific
installation conditions. Wire or cable sizes smaller than indicated
in the Contract Documents are not acceptable.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, every
cable run from a source to a load is to include an appropriately
sized separate ground wire, and the ground wire properly bonded
and grounded. The following designations are used within the
Contract Documents and the Contract Drawings:
.1
All cables designed as “3c” infers 3 conductor cable plus
ground conductor, within conduit this may be equivalent to
“4#”.
.2
All cables designed in a 3 phase, 3 wire system
designated as “4#”, infers 3 branch conductors and one
ground conductor of equal size as branch conductors.
.3
All cables designed in a 3 phase, 4 wire system
designated as “5#”, infers 3 branch conductors, one
References
Measurement and Payment
Design Requirements
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 2 of 11
DATE: April 2012
neutral conductor and one ground conductor, all
conductors sized as the branch conductors.
1.5
1.6
.3
Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, combine
motor or electric heater branch power wiring (below 1000V) and
associated local operator control or field control device wiring into
a common conduit between motor or heater and its starter or
motor control centre, provided all of the following conditions are
met:
.1
Motor circuit does not exceed 600 V.
.2
Conductors and termination fittings for power and control
circuits are rated 600 V minimum.
.3
Control circuits are designed to operate at 120 V AC or
higher. Install wiring for control circuits operating below
100 degrees Celsius AC or with DC in a separate conduit
system.
.4
Power conductors do not exceed #2AWG in size.
.5
Control circuit wiring solely associated with respective
motor or heater. Install wiring for control circuits of other
equipment and systems, or wiring common to two or more
pieces of equipment in separate conduits.
.4
Supply spare conductors in control, communication and
instrumentation cable circuits as follows:
.1
Two to eight utilized conductors in one conduit or cable:
two spare conductors.
.2
Nine or more utilized conductors: 20 percent or three spare
conductors, whichever is greater.
.5
No loose wiring or wire ends are accepted. Use manufacturer
recommended connectors when installing cables. Use TECK
cable connectors terminated in grounded steel plate for all TECK
cable terminations. Grounding and attachment to unistrut not
acceptable.
.1
Cap or seal cable ends to prevent water penetration into cable.
Reseal after cutting length of cable.
.2
Cables stored with ends unsealed will be immediately removed
from the Site at the Contractor’s own expense. At no extra cost to
the Region, the Contractor shall also replace cables to the
satisfaction of the Consultant.
.1
4.16 kV, 60 Hz, grounded wye, 3 phase, 3 wire.
Storage
Supply Characteristics
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 3 of 11
DATE: April 2012
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Manufactured Products
.1
Comply with the standards listed in Subsection 1.2- References of
this Section.
.2
Medium Voltage Insulated Cables (5000 Volt):
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Phillips Cables Limited
2.
Pirelli Cables Inc, Anixter
3.
Aetna Insulated Wire
.2
Rating: Cables shall be rated at 5 kV, application is 4.16
kV, refer to subsection 1.6 “Supply Characteristics” above.
Conductors: Stranded, annealed copper, class B
.3
stranding, size as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.4
Insulation: extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) or
ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) compound. Suitable for
installation in wet areas and suitable for handling at minus
40 degrees Celsius ambient, 90 degrees Celsius maximum
conductor temperature.
.5
Insulation level: 100 percent over each conductor.
.6
Insulation shield: Semi-conducting thermosetting XLPE
material applied over the insulation.
.7
Metallic shield: Lapped copper tape or served copper wire.
.8
Grounding conductor: Uninsulated, Class B stranded, soft
bare copper conductor in multiconductor cable, concentric
copper wires over insulation shield in single conductor
cable.
.9
Armour: where indicated in the Contract Documents, TECK
construction, interlocking galvanized steel or aluminum
armour over jacketed cable assembly (only aluminum on
single conductor cables).
.10
Non-Armoured cable: where indicated in the Contract
Documents, Type RW90 (or equivalent CSA approved
designation).
Inner and outer jacket: PVC, moisture and oil resistant,
.11
flame retardant composition, FT4, extruded, suitable for
minus 40 degrees Celsius applications and of low acid gas
evolution. Outer jacket colour, orange.
.12
Multi-conductor cables: Suitable fillers and binders.
.3
Low Voltage Unarmoured Wire and Cable (1000 V and Below)
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Phillips Cables Limited
2.
Alcatel Canada Wire Inc.
3.
Pirelli Cables Inc.
4.
United Wire of Canada.
.2
Construction: Stranded, annealed copper conductors,
600 V minimum rating for conductors #10 AWG and
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 4 of 11
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.4
smaller and 1000 V rating for conductors larger than #10
AWG, RW90 cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation,
suitable for handling at minus 40 degrees Celsius ambient,
90 degrees Celsius maximum conductor temperature,
limited flame spread FT4, jacketed.
Direct buried installations or installation in direct buried
PVC conduit: Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), RWU90
insulation, 1000 V minimum rating, jacketed.
Standard: CSA C22.2 No. 38.
Minimum conductor sizes: Unless otherwise indicated in
the Contract Drawings, #12 AWG for power and current
transformer circuits; #14 AWG for control circuits and fire
alarm circuits; #16 AWG for PA circuits; telephone wiring to
comply with telephone utility standards.
Multi-conductor cables: PVC flame retardant black jacket
overall, suitable for handling at minus 40 degrees Celsius,
flame test rated FT4.
Lighting wiring: GTF wire, 600 volt, 125 degrees Celsius,
flexible copper conductor for connections between
luminaire and outlet boxes.
Colour coding: For insulated conductors, conform to the
following:
1.
1-conductor power
- Black (Phase Conductors)
- White (Neutral)
2.
1-conductor control - Red
3.
2-conductor power
- Black, White
4.
3-conductor power
- Red, Black, White (Neutral)
- Red, Black, Blue
4-conductor power
- Red, Black, Blue, White
5.
6.
Multi conductor cables - Manufacturer’s standard
Insulated ground conductors forming part of a multiconductor cable assembly: Inspection Authority colour
coding.
Low Voltage Armoured Wire and Cable (1000 V and Below)
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Phillips Cables Limited
2.
Anixter International
3.
Alcatel Canada Wire Inc.
4.
Pirelli Cables Inc.
5.
United Wire and Cable.
.2
Construction: Stranded, annealed copper conductors,
1000 V rating, RW90 cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulation, suitable for handling at minus 40 degrees
Celsius ambient, 90 degrees Celsius maximum conductor
temperature, flame test rated FT4.
.3
Power cabling: TECK construction.
.4
Control cabling: TECK construction.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 5 of 11
DATE: April 2012
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.5
Lighting and receptacle branch wiring in office areas: BX
construction.
Minimum conductor size: Unless otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents, #12 AWG for power and current
transformer circuits and #14 AWG for control and fire alarm
circuits.
Grounding conductor: Stranded, soft, bare copper
conductor in multiconductor cables, concentric copper
wires over insulation in single conductor cable.
Multi-conductor cables: With inner jacket of suitable PVC
(minus 40degrees Celsius).
Interlocking armour: Flexible, galvanized steel or aluminum
for multi-conductor cables and aluminum for single
conductors, spirally wound over inner jacket.
Outer jacket: PVC (minus 40 degrees Celsius),
flame-retardant, FT4 flame test rated, low acid gas
evolution, black outer jacket extruded over the armour.
Colour coding: For insulated conductors, conform to the
following:
1.
1-conductor power
- Black (Phase Conductors)
2.
1-conductor control - Red
3.
2-conductor cable
- Black, White
4.
3-conductor cable
- Red, Black, White (Neutral)
- Red, Black, Blue
5.
4-conductor cable
- Red, Black, Blue, White
6.
Multi conductor cables - Manufacturer’s standard
Instrumentation Wiring
.1
Conductors: #16 AWG, 7 strand minimum, tinned copper,
unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
300 V minimum insulation.
.2
Construction: Twisted pair, triplet and quad grouping with
nominal 50 mm staggered lay and 100 percent aluminumMylar tape shield with minimum 25 percent overlap.
.3
Drain wire: Over each group, bare, #20 AWG minimum,
tinned copper, in direct continuous contact with shield.
.4
Jacket: PVC (minus 40 degrees Celsius) low acid gas,
FT4 rated low flame spread.
.5
Identification: Each grouping (pair, triplet, quad) by
consecutive number coding, permanently marked at
25 mm intervals.
.6
Armour: For exposed or direct buried cables, aluminum or
steel interlocking armour with overall PVC jacket.
General purpose instrumentation cable: 16 AWG, Type
.7
#9316 by Belden Wire and Cable.
.8
RS485 cables: 2 pair, 16 AWG stranded copper,
separately twisted pairs, overall 100 percent aluminumpolyester shield, tinned copper stranded drain wire by
Belden Wire and Cable.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 6 of 11
DATE: April 2012
.9
.10
.11
.6
Termination fittings: Type, configuration and gender
required to connect cable directly to equipment without
additional adapters or fittings.
Data highway communication cable: Stranded, tinned
copper conductor with aluminum armour and overall PVC
jacket, 18 AWG, Type #9463 by Belden Wire and Cable.
For analog signal wiring, use uniformly twisted shielded
pairs not smaller than CSA 0.823 mm2 (18 AWG) with a
minimum of six twists per 300mm (one foot). Separate
analog signal wiring at least 150mm (six inches) from
power wiring. Provide continuous foil or metalized plastic
shields with 100 percent coverage. Include a drain wire in
continuous contact with the shield. Multiple cables must
have an overall shield and individual shields for each
signal cable.
Control Wiring
.1
Size and install all wire and cable in accordance with CSA,
Ontario Electrical Safety Code, IEEE and all other
applicable electrical safety codes.
.2
Terminate all internal panel wiring to external devices at
the terminal strips. Connect all field wiring to one side of
the terminal strip. Connect all panel wiring to be connected
to the opposite side. Arrange terminals for external
connects in consecutive order for conductors within a given
cable.
.3
Use flexible, stranded, copper TEW wiring. Run wires in
continuous lengths from terminal to terminal. Do not splice
wires.
.4
For analog signal wiring, use uniformly twisted shielded
pairs not smaller than CSA 0.823 mm2 (18 AWG) with a
minimum of six twists per 300mm (one foot). Separate
analog signal wiring at least 150mm (six inches) from
power wiring. Provide continuous foil or metalized plastic
shields with 100 percent coverage. Include a drain wire in
continuous contact with the shield. Multiple cables must
have an overall shield and individual shields for each
signal cable.
.5
Use CSA 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or larger for control signal
wiring. CSA 2.5mm² ( 14 AWG) requires approval from the
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) and/or Power Stream Inc.
.6
Segregate signal wiring from control power wiring: group
functionally, and arrange neatly to facilitate tracing of
circuits. Arrange wiring, respective terminals and 25
percent spare in separate mounting rails according to the
following categories: 120V AC, 24V DC signal, 24V DC
control, communication wiring.
.7
Use plastic wiring wraps to bundle wires, outside of wiring
ducts. Securely fasten the bundles to the steel structure at
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 7 of 11
DATE: April 2012
.8
.9
.10
.11
.7
intervals not exceeding 300mm (12 inches). Each bundle
contains 30 conductors maximum. Use Panduit, or equal
wiring ducts and size to provide a minimum of 20 percent
spare space not less than 5 per terminal block.
Do not intermix signals within the same bundle or duct.
Use twisted unshielded wire for other DC signals and
segregate from wire conducting AC signals.
Colour code wiring as follows:
1.
Line and load circuits AC or DC power: Black
2.
AC control circuits: Red
3.
DC control circuits: Blue
4.
Interlock control circuits on the panel: Yellow
energized from external source
5.
DC signal grounding conductors: Green/White Strip
6.
Equipment grounding conductors: Green
7.
Current carrying grounded conductor: White
(neutral)
8.
Intrinsically safe: Blue
Use PVC crimped sleeve type wire tag identifications with
legible machine printed markings and numbers. Adhesive
or taped-on tags are not acceptable.
Wiring Accessories
.1
Wire markers: Plastic slip-on, black letters on white
background. Shur-Code by Thomas & Betts Ltd., Z-Type
by Wieland Electric Inc.
.2
Cable markers: For cables or conductors greater than
13 mm diameter, strap-on type, semi rigid PVC carrier
strip. Type K by Wieland Electric Inc.
.3
Terminal blocks: 600 V, 25 A minimum rating, modular,
35 mm DIN rail mounted, provision for circuit number
labelling, individually removable, sized to accommodate
conductor size and circuit current. Sak Series by
Weidmuller Ltd., UK Series by Phoenix Terminal Blocks
Ltd., WK Series by Wieland Electric Inc., Entrelec.
.4
Field wiring terminations: Where screw-type terminal
blocks are provided, supply insulated fork tongue
terminals. Sta-Kon by Thomas & Betts Ltd., Scotchlok by
3M Canada Inc.
.5
Splice connectors for equipment pig-tail, lighting and
receptacle circuits: For wire sizes #12 and #10 AWG
inclusive, twist-on compression spring type. Wing-Nut by
Ideal Industries Inc.., Marrette Type II by Marr Electric Ltd.
.6
Moisture and waterproofing: In wet locations, with Liquid
Tape by Ideal.
.7
Equipment pig-tail power circuit connections: For wire
sizes #8 AWG minimum, split-bolt type, sized to suit
number and size of conductors. Servit Type KS by Burndy
Inc.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 8 of 11
DATE: April 2012
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
High voltage (above 1000 V) cable terminations:
Engineered termination kits, rated for conductor number,
size and voltage class of cable, heat shrinkable type,
stress relieving, with heat activated sealant. Supply
outdoor skirts for outdoor terminations. Type HVT by
Raychem Canada Ltd.
5kV motor terminations: heat shrinkable connection kits,
including compression lug connectors, sealant, cover caps
and tubes. Type MCK-5 by Raychem Canada Ltd.
Low voltage (1000V and lower) motor terminations: heat
shrinkable connection kit, including sleeves, caps and
sealant. Type MCK by Raychem Canada Ltd.
Cable ties: Nylon, one-piece, self-locking type, by Thomas
& Betts Ltd., Burndy Inc., Wieland Electric Inc
TECK cable connectors in hazardous locations: Approved
for application.
TECK cable connectors in wet or outdoor areas: Watertight
type.
Cable pulling lubricant: Compatible with cable covering and
not to cause damage or corrosion to conduits or ducts.
Yellow 77 by Ideal. Industries Inc
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Coordination
.1
Report discrepancies promptly to the Consultant.
.1
Provide wires of number and size (including corresponding
raceways) required, with spare conductors as indicated. Provide
adequate wiring for actual equipment installed.
.2
Provide wire and cable according to the Contract Drawings and
electrical system requirements.
.3
Pull cable into ducts, conduits and cable trays in accordance with
cable manufacturer's recommendations. Use patented cable grips
suitable for cable type, or pulling eyes fastened directly onto cable
conductors.
.4
Limiting pulling tension and minimum bending radii to those
recommended by manufacturer.
.5
Prevent damage to cable jackets by utilizing adequate lubricant
when pulling cables through ducts and conduits.
.6
Support cables in manholes and utility tunnels on cable trays or
cable racks.
.7
Arrange cables in parallel rows on cable trays. Maintain cable
spacing by fastening cables, with “P” clips, every 2000 mm
minimum on straight horizontal runs and to each rung at bends,
Installation
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 9 of 11
DATE: April 2012
including two rungs of adjoining straight sections. Fasten cables
on vertical tray runs every 1000 mm maximum.
3.3
3.4
.8
Connect cables to electrical boxes and equipment enclosures
located in wet or sprinkled areas with watertight cable connectors.
.9
Provide cable grips for vertical and catenary cable suspension
installations to reduce cable tension at connectors and at cable
bends.
.10
Install through wiring in junction and pull boxes having no
connection within the box. Leave 150 mm minimum of slack inside
box.
.11
Facilitate making of joints and connections by leaving sufficient
slack in each conductor at panelboards, outlet boxes and other
devices.
.12
Do not connect more than three lighting circuits for three phase
panels and two lighting circuits for single phase panels to a
common neutral.
.13
Use #10 AWG minimum for home runs to lighting panels
exceeding 25 m.
.14
Install instrumentation signal and thermocouple extension wires in
separate raceways from power and control wiring.
.15
Provide mechanical protection for cables within 1500 mm of the
floor in buildings and within 2000 mm above grade outdoors.
.16
Identify each cable by attaching a cable marker at each end, in all
intermediate manholes, junction boxes and pull boxes.
.17
Provide cable grips on vertical and horizontal catenary cable
suspensions.
.1
Install direct buried cables in 75 mm layers sifted sand, free of
rock, stone and other sharp objects, above and below.
.2
Where indicated in the Contract Documents, protect direct buried
cables with 50 mm thick concrete protection tiles. Extend
protection 50 mm minimum on either side of cabling.
.3
Install direct buried cable at depth of 600 mm minimum. Where
rock is encountered and minimum depth cannot be attained,
install cables in concrete encased ducts.
.4
Install in suitably sized concrete encased duct where cables pass
under roadway or area subject to vehicular traffic or heavy loads.
.1
Insulate equipment pig-tail power circuit connections with wire
sizes #8 AWG and larger, with heat shrink sleeving termination
kits.
Underground Installation
Wiring Terminations
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
Page 10 of 11
DATE: April 2012
1.1
3.5
.2
Terminate armoured cables with accepted connectors suitable for
application, size and type of cable.
.3
Except where pulling tensions exceed allowable cable limits or
where tap connections are required, only install splices in power,
control and instrumentation cable runs with written permission of
Contract Administrator. Where unavoidable, install splices in
junction boxes only.
.4
Make power (1000 V and below), control and instrumentation
wiring taps, splices and terminations in junction boxes with
labelled terminal blocks, securely fastened to avoid loosening
under vibration or normal strain. Terminate lighting circuits and
120 V convenience receptacle circuits with twist on or split-bolt
type connectors and insulating tape.
.5
Terminate control, signal and instrumentation circuit conductors,
including spares, on terminal blocks. Label terminal blocks with
unique alphanumeric designation or as indicated.
.6
Identify each conductor, including spares, by wire markers at each
termination. Indicate circuit designation or unique wire number.
Identify spare conductors as 'SP1', 'SP2', etc.
High Voltage Terminations (Above 1000 V)
.1
Prepare high voltage cable ends. Assemble and install stress
relieving cable terminations where necessary and in accordance
with termination and cable manufacturers' recommendations.
Utilize only personnel trained, experienced and qualified in this
type of installation.
.2
For motor terminations, provide compression lugs with bolt type
connections on the motor leads and incoming conductors. Install
cable stress relief termination kits and motor terminations kits in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Prevent
conductors and splices from coming into contact with enclosure
walls.
.1
Refer to Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing for additional
inspections and tests required under this Contract. Follow all
applicable NETA standards and procedures.
.2
High Voltage Cable (Above 1000 Volts)
.1
Install cable without making final connections so
equipment (motors, switchgear, transformers, capacitors,
and similar items) will not be subjected to test voltages.
.2
Test complete with cable termination fittings.
.3
A competent independent testing agency specializing in
this work to test cable and terminations, including High
Inspection and Testing
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16122
WIRES AND CABLES
DATE: April 2012
Page 11 of 11
.4
.5
1.2
Potential tests, in accordance with the ICEA #S-66-524
and CSA standards.
Connect cable upon successful conclusion of tests. Submit
two copies of certified test results to the Consultant.
Replace defective or substandard cable runs.
.3
Cable and Wire - 1000 Volt and Below
.1
Conduct insulation resistance measurements using a
"Megger" (500 V instrument for circuit up to 350 V
systems, 1000 V instrument for 351-600 V systems).
.2
Record test results in a log book and submit to the
Consultant for reference. Replace or repair circuits which
do not meet Inspection Authority requirements. With
equipment disconnected, measure insulation resistance of
the following circuits:
1.
Power, lighting, heater and motor feeders: Phaseto-phase, phase-to-ground.
2.
Control circuits: To ground only.
.3
Do not perform "Megger" tests on equipment containing
solid-state components.
.4
Disconnect power factor correction capacitors from system
prior to testing.
.4
Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Wiring
.1
Check the continuity of each conductor using ohmmeter or
DC buzzer. Megger or 120 volt filament lamp testing is not
acceptable.
.2
Test thermocouple wiring for continuity and polarity in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.1
Identify wiring including fibre optic cabling, with wire markers.
.2
Colour code power, feeder and branch conductors at both ends
with coloured plastic tapes. Tapes are not required where
conductors are identified by jacket colour. Maintain phase and
colour sequence throughout.
.3
Identify each conductor, including spares, with a unique
alphanumeric designation to facilitate troubleshooting and
maintenance.
.4
Identify PLC wiring at terminal blocks and connection points with
PLC terminal (I/O) address numbers.
Wiring Identification
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 1 of 22
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
References
.1
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes, codes and
standards and all amendments thereto:
.1
Canadian Standards Association:
1.
CSA C22.2 No. 45 Rigid Metal Conduit.
2.
CSA C22.2 No. 56 Flexible Metal Conduit and
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
3.
CSA C22.2 No. 211.2 Rigid PVC (Unplasticized)
Conduit.
4.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 126 Cable Tray Systems.
.2
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1.
RN 1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate
Metal Conduit.
2.
TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Tubing
(PVC) and Conduit.
3.
TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit
and Tubing.
4.
VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems.
5.
VE 2, Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.
.3
Electronic Industry Association (EIA) and
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569-A,
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall include the lump sum price
for Section 16130 – Raceways as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the
Bid Form.
.1
Action Submittals:
.1
Shop Drawings:
1.
Manufacturer’s Literature:
.1
Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
.2
Rigid aluminum conduit.
.3
PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
.4
PVC Schedule 80 conduit.
.5
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.
.6
Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit.
.7
Conduit fittings.
2.
Cable Tray Systems:
.1
Submit shop drawings sealed and signed
by a professional engineer licensed in the
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 2 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Province of Ontario and retained by the
Contractor certifying that cable trays
supports and anchorage are designed in
accordance with the requirements of postdisaster facility in accordance with the
Ontario Building Code Division B, Part 4,
Article 4.1.8.17 for post-disaster structures.
.2
After installation a professional engineer
licensed in the Province of Ontario and
retained by the Contractor shall complete a
Site review and then submit a letter, sealed
and signed, stating that the cable trays
supports and anchorage are designed and
installed in accordance with the
requirements of post-disaster facility in
accordance with the Ontario Building Code
Division B, Part 4, Article 4.1.8.17 for postdisaster structures.
.3
Dimensional drawings and descriptive
information.
.4
CSA Load Class Designation.
.5
Support span length and kilograms-permetre actual and future cable loading at
locations, with safety factor used.
.6
Layout drawings and list of accessories
being provided.
Conduit Layout:
.1
Plan and section type, showing
arrangement and location of conduit and
duct bank required for:
.2
Low and medium voltage feeder and
branch circuits.
.3
Instrumentation and control systems.
.4
Communications systems.
.5
Empty conduit for future use.
.6
Scale not greater than 1:200.
Equipment and machinery proposed for bending
metal conduit.
Method for bending PVC conduit less than
30 degrees.
.2
Information Submittals: Submit copy of manufacturers’ certification
of training for PVC-coated rigid steel conduit installer.
.1
PVC-Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit Installer: Must be certified by the
conduit manufacturer as having received a minimum of 2 hours of
training on correct installation procedures.
Qualifications
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 3 of 22
DATE: April 2012
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Cable Duct System
.1
Scope
.1
This Specification applies to the design and supply of the
cable bus feeder system designed for power distribution
and used to transmit large amounts of power, in indoor and
outdoor locations, both above and below ground levels.
The system design is used to provide a lower installed cost
alternative to conventional power distribution systems by
facilitating installation and replacement of circuit
conductors, and by readily accommodating any future
increased load current requirements.
.2
General Information
.1
This Specification defines the technical requirements
related to the design and supply of the cable bus feeder
system, which shall consist of a ventilated enclosure
system, incorporating unarmoured cable, specifically
engineered to transmit large amounts of power as well as
concrete encasement for underground installations. The
cable bus feeder system shall include all power cable, a
bare copper ground wire, and all necessary components
required to connect, from terminal to terminal, two
electrical equipment units, and shall be comprised of the
following components:
1.
Cables and cable bus enclosure including cable
supports and cable clamping;
2.
Bare copper ground wire clamped to an inside wall
of the enclosure;
3.
Connections, including terminal lugs and adaptor
plates suitable for the specific electrical equipment
being connected at the supply end;
4.
Transition box and flange connections, as required;
5.
Top hat and flange connections, as required;
6.
Fire penetration seals, as required; and
7.
Any other accessories required to complete the
installation,
8.
Any support structure for the cable bus feeder
system; and
9.
Connections for the load end, including terminal
lugs and adaptor plates suitable for the specific
electrical equipment to be connected.
.3
Code and Standards
.1
The components and complete assembly of the Maxiamp
Cable Bus Feeder System and its installation shall meet
the requirements of the following Standards, as applicable:
.2
Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC)
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 4 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.4
Canadian Standards Association – CSA C22.2 #38 –
Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables
Canadian Standards Association – CSA C68.3 – Shielded
and Concentric Neutral Power Cables Rated 5 – 46 kV
IEEE Standard #404 – Standard for Extruded and
Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 to
500,000 Volts.
IEEE Standard #48 – Test Procedure for HV AC Cable
Terminations 2.5-765 kV
Canadian Standards Association – C22.2 #126.1 – Metal
Cable Tray Systems.
Products
Ventilated Cable Bus Enclosure
.1
.2
Enclosure material
1.
The cable bus feeder enclosure shall be
constructed of high strength, high conductivity,
6063-T6 corrosion resistant aluminium alloy
meeting the requirements of CSA C22.2 #126.1,
unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents.
.3
Enclosure Ventilation
1.
The enclosure shall be completely enclosed on
both sides, and provided with ventilated top and
bottom covers designed to prohibit possible
penetration of any size sharp object applied
perpendicular to the enclosure surfaces.
2.
Ventilation openings shall be louvered, with each
opening being no greater than 5 mm wide by
50 mm long.
3.
The number of ventilation openings provided shall
allow sufficient air circulation to ensure free air
rating of the enclosed cables.
.4
Enclosure Top Cover Shapes
1.
For outdoor horizontal straight sections, enclosures
shall have removable ventilated top covers with
sloped peaked tops,
For indoor horizontal straight sections, enclosures
2.
shall have removable ventilated flat top covers.
3.
All other sections shall have removable ventilated
flanged flat top covers.
.5
Cable Bus Supports Within Enclosure
1.
Cables shall be supported within the enclosure and
on each level by metal supports which shall be at
least 45 mm (1.77”) in width.
2.
The metal supports shall be repeated throughout
the cable bus enclosure at regular intervals not
exceeding 305 mm (12”).
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 5 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.
.6
.5
Metal supports on each successive vertical cable
level shall be longitudinally offset by ½ of the
support spacing, relative to the supports in the level
immediately below.
Cable Bus Clamping Within Enclosure
1.
Cable clamps shall be clamped to the metal
supports at intervals not exceeding 915 mm (36”)
2.
Cables shall be secured to a cable support by use
of a one-piece non-ferrous metal clamp, of width
equal to the underlying cable support.
3.
Each clamp shall be formed to provide a sufficient
number of cable ports to secure the designated
number of feeder cables.
4.
Each cable port shall be formed specifically to
accommodate the diameter contour of the
designated feeder cable.
5.
Curvatures for cable ports shall be positioned to
provide uniform lateral cable spacing while
ensuring full free air current rating.
6.
Positioning of cable clamping ports on successive
levels of cable supports shall ensure achievement
of both the highest degree of electrical field
balance, and the lowest degree of system losses.
Power Cables
.1
Each individual power cable shall be of a single,
continuous length between terminals, and shall meet the
requirements of the appropriate Standard listed in
subsection 2.3, consistent with the system design voltage.
.2
Conductors
1.
Conductors shall be annealed uncoated Class B
stranded copper, sized to meet the current load
requirements.
Insulation
.3
1.
Insulation shall be Thermosetting Ethylene
Propylene Rubber Class III (EPR) unless otherwise
stated in the Contract Documents.
Shielding
.4
1.
Strand and insulation shields shall be required on
all cables rated 1000 volts or greater.
2.
Nonmetallic semiconducting shields shall be
thermosetting material, compatible with the
insulation material.
3.
Metallic shielding, when specified in the Contract
Documents, shall consist of overlapped copper
tape which is annealed and uncoated.
.5
Jackets
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 6 of 22
DATE: April 2012
1.
All cables rated 600 volts and greater shall include
an insulation outer jacket in accordance with the
applicable standards in subsection 2.3.
.6
Grounding
.1
The enclosure system shall be certified as a continuous
ground conductor, with provision for a ground clamp at
each end of each enclosure section.
.2
A grounding conductor shall be connected at a single point
to the inside wall of the enclosure system’s top level within
each longitudinal section of enclosure.
.3
A system grounding conductor of bare uncoated copper
and no smaller than #4/0 AWG in size shall be supplied,
and shall be connected to each enclosure section, and
shall be connected to the grounding terminals at the supply
and load ends of the system.
.4
The enclosure connector shall be cable tray ground clamp
of zinc plated copper alloy, suitable for securing two
parallel conductors of minimum size #4/0 AWG to the
enclosure wall, and shall be corrosion resistant.
.7
Penetration Fire Seals
.1
Where a fire separation is pierced by the enclosure
system, all openings around the enclosure and around
each individual cable within the enclosure shall be properly
closed or sealed with an elastomeric three-hour rated
sealing system, in compliance with the National Building
Code of Canada.
.8
Terminal Boxes – Transformer/Distribution Centre
.1
Terminal boxes shall be provided at one or both systems
ends, subject to the space available for cable terminations.
.2
The terminal boxes shall be dimensioned to accommodate
training and terminating of the number and size of the
cables entering the box, while ensuring sufficient
clearances to grounded metal.
.3
The terminal boxes shall be of steel of minimum thickness
of 11 gauge, primed and painted inside and outside. The
outside paint colour shall match that of the transformer of
distribution centre.
.4
Terminal boxes shall include access panels on two sides,
and shall contain ventilation openings on two sides; all
ventilation openings shall be screened to protect against
entry of rodents and animals.
.5
Support arms shall be provided for the terminal boxes
when deemed necessary to carry the weight.
.6
Cable feeder bus entry into an outdoor terminal box shall
be made watertight by thorough and effective sealing.
.7
Outdoor terminal boxes shall contain a screened drain hole
at the bottom of the unit.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 7 of 22
DATE: April 2012
2.2
.9
Terminal Transition Plates and Lugs
.1
Terminal plates when furnished, shall contain a sufficient
mass of copper to transfer the current load without
overheating.
.2
Terminal transition plates when furnished, shall contain a
sufficient number of holes of diameter and spacing to
accommodate the holes of both the apparatus terminal,
and the conductor termination lugs.
.3
All conductor termination lugs shall be of the long barrel
crimp type, the pads of which shall contain a minimum of
two holes of diameter and spacing to match those of the
transition plates.
.10
Installation Procedure
.1
All installations of a Maxiamp Cable Bus Feeder System
shall be in complete accordance with the manufacturer’s
written installation procedure.
.1
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
.1
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 45.
.2
Material: Hot-dip galvanized, inside and outside, with
chromated protective layer.
.2
Rigid Aluminum Conduit:
.1
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 45.
.2
Material: Type 6063, copper-free aluminum alloy.
.3
PVC Schedule 40 Conduit:
.1
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 211.2 and
NEMA TC 2.
.2
Suitable for areas NOT exposed to physical damage,
underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight
exposure, and 90 degrees Celsius (C) insulated
conductors.
.4
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
.1
Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1.
.2
Material:
1.
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 45.
2.
Exterior finish: PVC coating, 40 mils nominal
thickness, bond to metal shall have tensile strength
greater than PVC.
3.
Interior finish: Urethane coating, 2 mils nominal
thickness.
.3
Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with
urethane.
Bendable without damage to either interior or exterior
.4
coating.
.5
Acceptable Manufacturer: “Plasti-Bond Red” by Robroy
Industries.
Conduit and Tubing
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 8 of 22
DATE: April 2012
2.3
.5
Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
.1
Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket.
.2
Suitable for:
1.
Dry Conditions: 80 degrees Celsius insulated
conductors.
2.
Wet Conditions: 60 degrees Celsius insulated
conductors.
.3
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Carlon Products by Gross Automation; Carflex or
X-Flex.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corporation, Xtraflex LTC
3.
EFC International.
.6
Fire Alarm - Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
.1
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 83.
.2
Material: Hot galvanized, with RED factory coating.
.3
Approved Manufacturers and Products: Columbia-MBF,
Atkore International, Inc. - Fire Alarm Red EMT or
approved equivalent.
.1
Rigid Galvanized Steel:
.1
General:
1.
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 45.
2.
Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and
threadless compression fittings are not permitted.
Bushing:
.2
1.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated
throat, rated for 150 degrees Celsius.
2.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Series
BU-I.
.2
O-Z/Gedney; Emerson Electric Co;
Type HB.
.3
Grounding Bushing:
1.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated
throat rated for 150 degrees Celsius, with
solderless lugs.
2.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. Series GIB.
.2
O-Z/Gedney, Emerson Electric Co;
Type HBLG.
.4
Conduit Hub:
1.
Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with
bonding screw.
2.
CSA or ULc listed for use in wet locations.
3.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
Fittings
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 9 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.1
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Series
HUB-B.
.2
O-Z/Gedney, Emerson Electric Co - Series
CH.
Conduit Bodies:
1.
Sized as required by CEC.
2.
Approved Manufacturers and Products (For Normal
Conditions):
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co - Form 35
threaded unilets.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or 8
.2
threaded condulets.
.3
Killark, Hubbell Incorporated - Series O
electrolets.
.4
Thomas & Betts Corporation - Form 7 or 8.
3.
Approved Manufacturers (For Hazardous
Locations):
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co..
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
.3
Killark, Hubbell Incorporated .
Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
Unions:
1.
Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized, malleable iron.
2.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. Series SCC Bolt-On Coupling or Series EC
Three-Piece Union.
.2
O.Z./Gedney, Emerson Electric Co. Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series,
three-piece coupling.
Approved Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers and
Products (For hazardous locations):
1.
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Type EYF, EYM,
or ESU.
2.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS.
3.
Killark;, Hubbell Incorporated Type EY or EYS.
Approved Drain Seal Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Type SF.
2.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds - Type EYD or EZD.
Approved Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers and
Products:
1.
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co.; Type ECDB.
2.
Crouse-Hinds; ECD.
Approved Expansion Fitting Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Deflection/Expansion Movement:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co.; Type DF.
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
2.
Expansion Movement Only:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co.; Type XJ.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 10 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.12
.2
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
Cable Sealing Fittings:
1.
To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection
to conduit.
2.
For Conductors With OD of 13 mm or Less:
Neoprene bushing at connector entry.
3.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co.; CG-S.
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.
Rigid Aluminum Conduit:
.1
General:
1.
Meet the requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 45.
2.
Type: Threaded, copper-free. Set screw fittings are
not permitted.
.2
Insulated Bushing:
1.
Material: Cast aluminum, with integral insulated
throat, rated for 150 degrees Celsius.
2.
Approved Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney,
Emerson Electric Co.; Type AB.
.3
Grounding Bushing:
1.
Material: Cast aluminum with integral insulated
throat, rated for 150 degrees, with solderless lugs.
2.
Approved Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney,
Emerson Electric Co.; Type ABLG.
.4
Conduit Hub:
1.
Material: Cast aluminum, with insulated throat.
2.
UL listed for use in wet locations.
3.
Approved Manufacturers and Products:
.1
O-Z/Gedney, Emerson Electric Co.;
Type CHA.
.2
Thomas & Betts Corporation;
Series 370AL.
.5
Conduit Bodies:
1.
Approved Manufacturers and Products (For Normal
Conditions):
.1
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co.; Form 85
threaded unilets.
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds (Crouse-Hinds);
Mark 9 or Form 7-SA threaded condulets.
Killark; Series O electrolets.
.3
2.
Approved Manufacturers (For Hazardous
Locations):
.1
Appleton Electric Company.
.2
Cooper Crouse-Hinds (Crouse-Hinds).
.3
Hubbell Incorporated - Killark.
.6
Couplings: As supplied by the conduit manufacturer.
.7
Approved Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers and
Products:
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 11 of 22
DATE: April 2012
1.
.8
.9
.10
.11
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Type EYF-AL or
EYM-AL.
2.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds (Crouse-Hinds);
Type EYS-SA or EZS-SA.
3.
Killark, Hubbell Incorporated- Type EY or EYS.
Approved Drain Seal Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Appleton - Type EYDM-A.
2.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds (Crouse-Hinds);
Type EYD-SA or EZD-SA.
Approved Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers and
Products:
1.
Appleton, Emerson Electric Co. - Type ECDB.
2.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds (Crouse-Hinds); ECD.
Approved Expansion Fitting Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Deflection/Expansion Movement: Thomas & Betts
Corporation - Steel City; Type DF-A.
2.
Expansion Movement Only: Thomas & Betts
Corporation - Steel City; Type AF-A.
Cable Sealing Fittings: To form watertight nonslip cord or
cable connection to conduit.
Bushing: Neoprene at connector entry.
1.
2.
Approved Manufacturer: Appleton; CG-S.
.3
PVC Conduit and Tubing:
.1
Meet the requirements of NEMA TC-3.
.2
Type: PVC, slip-on.
.4
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
.1
Meet the requirements of NEMA RN 1.
.2
Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by the
conduit manufacturer.
.3
Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or
urethane finish. Cover shall be of same material as conduit
body. PVC coated by the conduit manufacturer.
.4
Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior.
.5
Overlapping pressure sealing sleeves.
.6
Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories:
PVC-coated.
.7
Manufacturers:
1.
Plastibond Red by Robroy Industries Ltd. or
approved equivalent
.8
Expansion Fitting Manufacturer: Robroy Industries Ltd.
.5
Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
.1
Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut,
O-ring, threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut.
.2
Body/compression nut (gland) design to assure high
mechanical pullout strength and watertight seal.
.3
Manufacturers and Products:
1.
Carlon Products by Gross Automation; Type LT.
2.
O-Z/Gedney, Emerson Electric Co.-; Type 4Q-P.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 12 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.
2.4
Thomas & Betts Corporation - Series 6300.
.6
Watertight Entrance Seal Device:
.1
New Construction:
1.
Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body
with sealing ring, pressure ring, grommet seal, and
pressure clamp.
2.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney, Emerson
Electric Co. - Type FSK or WSK, as required.
Cored-Hole Application:
.2
1.
Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene
sealing ring, and membrane clamp.
2.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Emerson
Electric Co. - Series CSM.
.1
Meet requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 126.1
.2
Type: Ladder, of welded construction. Ladder rung spacing: 300
mm.
.3
Material: Copper-free aluminum alloy 6063-T6 finish.
.4
Dimensions: As indicated on the Contract Drawings. Fittings are
to have a minimum bending radius of 600 mm.
.5
Cover: Louvered, minimum 20-gauge steel.
.6
Barrier Strip: Vertical, solid type, with horizontal fittings and strip
clamps.
.7
Fittings of same cross-sectional tray area, and hardware of same
material as cable tray.
.8
Tray Grounding: Conform to Ontario Electrical Safety Code and
CSA C22.2 No. 126.1
.9
Provide next higher CSA C22.2 No. 126.1 class designation than
required for support of designed span length.
.10
Design Loads: Use working load adequate for actual cable
installed plus 20 percent additional weight allowance for future
cables, with safety factor of 2 in accordance with NEMA VE 1,
Table 3-1.
.11
Expansion Joints: NEMA VE 1 for 14 degrees Celsius maximum
temperature variation.
.12
Furnish Cable Tray with no sharp edges, burrs, or weld
projections.
.13
The Contractor shall design and provide cable trays supports and
anchorage to meet the requirements of the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the Ontario Building Code Division B, part
4, Article 4.1.8.17 for post-disaster structures.
.14
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
Pilgrim Technical Products Ltd.
Cable Trays
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 13 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.5
2.6
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Canstrut Inc.
Thomas and Betts Corporation - Electrotray.
Pursley Inc.
Multi cable transits (MCT) -Firestop
.1
Provide Multi Cable Transits to seal cables at locations as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
.2
Provide type RGB-4 x 4 as used for buildings c/w all stay plates,
modular blocks and MCT lubricant as supplied by Speedline
Technologies - Electrovert.
.1
Identification Devices:
.1
Raceway Tags:
1.
Material: Permanent, nylon or polyethylene.
2.
Shape: Round.
3.
Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped,
embossed, or engraved.
4.
Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not
permitted.
.2
Wraparound Duct Band:
.1
Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive.
.2
50 mm width (minimum).
.3
Manufacturer and Product: Tyco Electronics Corporation Raychem; Type TWDB.
.1
Conduit and Tubing sizes shown on the Contract Drawings are
based on the use of copper conductors.
.2
Diameter: Minimum 21 mm.
.3
Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.
.4
Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
.5
Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with
watertight and dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.
.6
Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete.
Install in PVC sleeve or cored hole through concrete walls and
slabs.
.7
Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where
condensate may collect above sealing fitting.
Accessories
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
General
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 14 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.2
.8
Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in
exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at
conduit low point.
.9
Group raceways installed in same area.
.10
Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 300 mm
from parallel runs.
.11
Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed
raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways.
.12
Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls,
structural members, or intersections of vertical planes.
.13
Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course
with reinforcing steel.
.14
Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.
.15
Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized
conduit or PVC coated galvanized conduit, installed in exposed or
damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing
compound.
.16
Remove burrs, ream and clean metal conduit, and clean before
installation of conductors, wires, or cables.
.17
Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations,
or beams.
.18
Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely
under slab, with no part embedded within slab.
.19
Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and
Category 5 data cables in strict conformance with the
requirements of EIA/TIA 596-A.
.20
Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, install
conduits surface-mounted on walls and ceilings. Conceal or
embed conduits only where indicated in the Contract Documents.
.21
Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they
emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion
exposed.
Installation in Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete (Embedment)
.1
Minimum cover 50 mm, including all fittings.
.2
Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel
location or configuration.
.3
Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to
ensure raceways remain in position.
.4
Conduit larger than 27 mm shall not be embedded in concrete
slabs, walls, foundations, columns or beams, unless approved by
the Consultant.
.5
Slabs and Walls:
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 15 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.3
Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of the slab
or wall thickness at the thinnest point.
Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall.
Separate conduit less than 53 mm trade size by a
minimum of ten times the conduit trade size,
center-to-center, unless otherwise shown on the Contract
Drawings.
Separate conduit 53 mm and greater trade size by a
minimum of eight times the conduit trade size,
center-to-center, unless otherwise shown on the Contract
Drawings.
Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with
minimum separation of 25 mm.
Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside
dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion
joints.
Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water
surface elevation in walls of water holding structures.
.6
Columns and Beams:
.1
Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam
thickness.
.2
Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of
beam or column cross section.
.1
Install conduits in order to conserve headroom in exposed
locations and to minimize interference in spaces through which
they pass.
.2
Conceal conduits in office, washrooms and stairwells.
.3
Surface mount conduits unless noted otherwise in the Contract
Documents.
.4
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) for wiring of life safe system
and concealed wiring.
.5
Use rigid PVC conduit in corrosive areas.
.6
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or
vibrating equipment.
.7
Use explosion proof flexible connection for connection to
explosion proof motors.
.8
Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas. Fill with
compound.
.9
Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 19 mm.
.10
Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more
than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.11
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm in diameter.
Conduit Application
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 16 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.4
.12
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw
conduits up tight.
.13
Install fish cord in empty conduits. Polypropylene 6 mm in all
empty conduits
.14
Run 2-27 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and two 25 mm
spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush panel.
Terminate these conduits in 152 mm x 152 mmx 102 mm junction
boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab,
terminate each conduit in surface type box.
.15
Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. Do not use liquids
to clean out conduits.
.16
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.17
Diameter: Minimum 21 mm.
.18
Exterior, Exposed:
1.
Rigid PVC where allowed by the Ontario Building
Code
2.
Rigid Galvanized Steel.
.19
Interior, Exposed:
1.
Rigid aluminum
.20
Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):
1.
Rigid PVC.
.21
Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:
1.
Rigid PVC.
.22
Under Slabs-On-Grade:
1.
Rigid PVC.
.23
Corrosive Areas:
1.
Rigid PVC.
.1
For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type
transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and
other equipment where flexible connection is required to minimize
vibration:
.1
Conduit Size 103 mm or Less: Flexible, liquid-tight conduit.
.2
Conduit Size Greater Than 103 mm: Nonflexible.
.3
Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight.
.4
Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight.
.5
Length: 450 mm minimum, 1500 mm maximum, sufficient
to allow for movement or adjustment of equipment.
.2
Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas
Required shall be Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible non-metallic,
liquid-tight conduit.
.3
Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel, PVCcoated rigid steel, PVC Schedule 80 conduit.
Connections
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 17 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.5
.4
Exterior Light Pole Foundations: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
.1
Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown on the Contract
Drawings.
.2
Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings
and beams is not permitted.
.3
Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around
penetrations to maintain fire-resistance rating as specified in
Section 07840 - Firestopping.
.4
Apply single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduit
protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 50 mm above
and 50 mm below concrete surface.
.5
Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide
nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.
.6
Entering Structures:
.1
General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with oakum
or expandable plastic compound to prevent the entrance of
gases or liquids from one area to another.
.2
Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor:
1.
Provide a watertight seal.
2.
Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight
entrance seal device on each side.
With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight
3.
entrance seal device on the accessible side.
4.
Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight
entrance seal device into construction with one or
more integral flanges.
5.
Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight
entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight
manner.
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
.3
1.
Penetrate equipment in area established by
manufacturer.
2.
Terminate conduit with flexible nonmetallic conduit
at junction box or condulet attached to exterior
surface of equipment prior to penetrating
equipment.
3.
Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified
in Section 07900 - Sealants.
.4
Corrosive-Sensitive Areas:
Seal all conduit passing through chlorine room
1.
walls.
2.
Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and
field panels containing electronic equipment.
3.
Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified
in Section 07900 - Sealants.
Penetrations
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 18 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.5
.6
.7
.8
3.6
Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and
install a watertight entrance seal device.
Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without
Concrete Encasement):
1.
Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or
watertight entrance seal device.
2.
Fill space between raceway and sleeve with
expandable plastic compound or oakum and lead
joint, on each side.
Manholes and Handholes:
Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding
1.
bushings.
2.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with
wall.
3.
Install such that raceways enter as near as possible
to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown on the
Contract Drawings.
Hazardous Areas Raceway penetrations shall meet the
seal requirements of OESC Section 18.
Support
.1
Provide support from structural members only, at intervals not
exceeding Canadian Electrical Code requirements, and in any
case not exceeding 3.0 m. Do not support from piping, pipe
supports, or other raceways.
.2
Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For
trapeze-supported conduit, allow 25 percent extra space for future
conduit.
.3
Application/Type of Conduit Strap:
.1
Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum or stainless steel.
.2
Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: Zinc coated steel,
pregalvanized steel or malleable iron.
PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC coated metal.
.3
.4
Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC coated metal.
.4
Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze
as follows:
.1
Wood: Wood screws.
.2
Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
.3
Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs
driven in by powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.
.4
Steelwork: Machine screws.
.5
Location/Type of Hardware:
1.
Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
2.
Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
3.
Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
.5
Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for
attaching raceway are not permitted. Do not weld raceways or
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 19 of 22
DATE: April 2012
pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or
hangers.
3.7
3.8
3.9
.6
Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless
steel or nonmetallic spacers, or aluminum or nonmetallic framing
channel.
.1
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the
shortest practical distance.
.2
Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in
conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be
not less than 20 times the cable diameter, 375 mm, minimum.
.3
Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
.4
Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make
filed made bends and offsets with acceptable hickey or bending
machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.
.5
Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or
centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel.
.6
Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if
there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.
.7
PVC Conduit:
.1
Bends 30-Degree and Larger: Provide factory-made
elbows.
.2
Use the manufacturer’s recommended method for forming
smaller bends.
.8
Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable
conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that
significantly restricts conduit flexibility.
.1
Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in
long tangential runs.
.2
Provide expansion/deflection joints for 14 degrees Celsius
maximum temperature variation.
.3
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
.1
Solvent Welding:
.1
Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all
joints.
.2
Install such that joint is watertight.
.2
Adapters:
.1
PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
.2
PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC female adapter.
Bends
Expansion/Deflection Fittings
PVC Conduit
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 20 of 22
DATE: April 2012
.3
Belled-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to
joining.
3.10 PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit
.1
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
All tools and equipment used in the cutting, bending, threading
and installation of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be
designed to limit damage to the PVC coating.
.3
Provide PVC boot to cover all exposed threading.
.1
Install in accordance with Application Information Section of
NEMA VE 2.
.2
Provide accessories as necessary for a complete system.
.3
Install such that joints are not made at support brackets.
.4
The Contractor shall design and provide ceiling trapeze for all
horizontal cable trays.
.5
Install support within 600 mm on each side of expansion joints and
within 600 mm of fitting extremity.
.6
Provide expansion joints in accordance with NEMA VE 1 for
14 degrees Celsius maximum temperature variation.
.7
Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or
grade within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 metres and within a
cumulative maximum of 12 mm.
.8
Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 metres.
.9
Install without exposed raw edges.
.10
Maintain 300 mm vertical separation between multi-tiered trays
having a common support, and at all crossover locations.
.11
Provide bonding jumper at each expansion joint and adjustable
connection.
.12
Ground Conductor: Provide properly sized clamps for each
section, elbow, tee, cross, and reducer.
.1
Install cables individually.
.2
Lay cables into cable tray. Use rollers when necessary to pull
cables.
.3
Secure cables in cable trough at 6 m centers, with nylon ties.
.4
Identify cables every 15 m with size 2 nameplates .
.5
Maintain spacing between the cables to provide the required cable
ampacity.
3.11 Cable Trays
3.12 Cables in Cabletrays
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
Page 21 of 22
DATE: April 2012
3.13 Multi cable transits (MCT)
.1
Ensure that larger diameter cables are installed in lower levels
and the smaller diameter on top.
.2
Ensure all modular blocks be coated with multi cable transits
(MCT) lubricant prior to cable being installed.
.3
All spaces not enclosed with cables and modular blocks be sealed
with filler blocks to ensure a completely sealed system.
.1
Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer’s premolded
insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded
hubs.
.2
Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Terminate conduit in
threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.
.3
Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
.1
Rigid Galvanized or Aluminum Conduit:
1.
Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of
enclosure.
2.
Install grounding bushing.
3.
Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to
equipment ground bus or ground pad; if neither
ground bus nor pad exists, connect jumper to lag
bolt attached to metal enclosure.
4.
Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where
grounding is not required.
5.
Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in
sheet metal boxes having threaded hubs.
6.
Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on outside
of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
7.
Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at
NEMA 4 and 4X boxes and enclosures.
.2
Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquidtight strain relief connectors.
.3
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide
PVC-coated, liquid-tight, metallic connector.
.4
PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter
with lock nut.
.4
Motor Control Center, Switchboard, Switchgear, and FreeStanding Enclosures:
.1
Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding
bushing; provide a grounding jumper extending to
equipment ground bus or grounding pad.
.2
Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end
fittings.
3.14 Termination at Enclosures
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16130
RACEWAYS
DATE: April 2012
Page 22 of 22
3.15 Empty Raceways
.1
Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
.2
Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end
bells.
.3
Provide nylon pull cord.
.4
Identify, as specified in subsection 3.16, Identification Devices,
with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at
intermediate pull point.
.1
Raceway Tags:
.1
Identify origin and destination.
.2
Install at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum
intervals of every 15 metres of exposed raceway, whether
in ceiling space or surface mounted.
.3
Provide nylon strap for attachment.
.1
Protect Products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and
physical damage during construction.
.2
Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals
over all conduit openings during construction.
.3
Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or
scars.
.4
Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching
compound approved by the manufacturer; compound shall be kept
refrigerated according to the manufacturers’ instructions until the
time of use.
3.16 Identification Devices
3.17 Protection of Installed Work
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL
BOXES AND CABINETS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16131
2011-03-15
Page 1 of 2
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods
.2
Section 16122 – Wires and Cables
.3
Section 16335 – Temporary and Transition Electrical Equipment
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and Product data for cabinets in
accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16131 – Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and
Cabinets as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Provide sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged
cover suitable for locking in closed position.
.2
Provide main and branch lugs and connection bars are to match
with the required size and number of incoming and outgoing
conductors as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.3
Provide a minimum of three spare terminals on each set of lugs in
splitters less than 400 A.
.1
Junction and pull boxes shall be of welded steel construction with
screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.
.2
Covers with a minimum of 25 mm of extension all around, for
flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.
.1
Provide Type E Cabinets: sheet steel cabinet with hinged door
and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for
surface mounting.
.2
Provide Type T Cabinets: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door,
latch, lock, 2 keys, containing Unistrut backing flush mounted.
.1
Approved Suppliers:
Measurement and Payment
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Splitters
Junction and Pull Boxes
Cabinets
Control Panel Enclosure
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL
BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 16131
2011-03-15
Page 2 of 2
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
Hammond Manufacturing Company Limited.
Ralston Metal Products Limited.
Rittal Systems Ltd.
Pentair, Inc. (Hoffman).
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
Splitter Installation
.1
Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building
lines.
.2
Extend splitters for the full length of equipment arrangement
except where indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets Installation
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor.
.3
Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets in subsection
2.3 above.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Install size 2 identification labels indicating the system name,
voltage and phase.
Identification
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16136
CABLE BUS FEEDER SYSTEM
Page 1 of 4
DATE: April 2012
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Intent of Section
.1
A complete CSA certified ventilated metal enclosed system shall
be provided by the Contractor, including all necessary fittings,
enclosure, connectors, entrance fittings, insulated conductors,
electrical connectors, terminating kits and other accessories as
required.
.2
The bus system shall be suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use
with conductor spacing and ventilation maintained throughout the
system.
.3
All elements of the bus enclosure shall be designed to eliminate
any sharp edges or projections that may injure personnel or
conductor insulations.
.4
Rigid bus duct is NOT an acceptable alternative.
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Drawings to include electrical detail of conductors (quantity and
ampacity) and enclosure dimensions.
.1
Cable duct enclosure to be factory or field assembled to suit
application.
.2
Cables shall be field loaded.
.3
Each finished section of cable bus enclosure to have nameplate,
containing the manufacturers name, type, current rating of each
phase and neutral cable (where applicable), BIL rating, and
maximum spacing between supports.
.4
Provide approval labels as applicable.
.5
Two complete sets of installation instructions to be shipped with
cable bus system.
.1
Cable duct system rated at 5000 volts, 3-phase, 3-wire, plus one
size #8AWG neutral for protection devices, plus 3/0 ground.
.2
Amperes: as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Shop Drawings
Plant Assembly
Rating
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16136
CABLE BUS FEEDER SYSTEM
Page 2 of 4
DATE: April 2012
1.5
1.6
Measurement and Payment
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price of Section 16136 – Cable Bus Feeder System as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
United Wire & Cable Inc., Maxiamp cable bus system
.2
MP Husky, Cable Bus System
.3
Approved Equal
.1
Cable duct enclosure to be made of fabricated aluminum and field
loaded with insulated cables, supported and segregated by
insulated cable support assemblies fastened to the enclosure at
suitable intervals. Bug and rodent inside protection shall be
provided.
.2
Each straight length of duct enclosure to be factory assembled
with necessary fittings.
.3
The two side walls (main structural members) to be extruded
aluminum at 0.08 inch to 0.125 inch (2mm to 3mm) thick,
dependant on duct height.
.4
The top and bottom enclosure sections shall be minimum 14
gauge aluminum with punched holes (not louvered style) to
provide mechanical strength. The bottom section shall be factory
installed by welding and the top cover shall be removable bolt on
type. Cable Bus covers shall have a minimum of 25 percent
opening of its total cover surface for efficient passage of air.
.5
Cable supports are to be glass reinforced polyester, moulded with
two sets of three or six cable grooves, with one set on each of the
two opposite sides.
.6
Conductor support blocks shall be composite non metallic
material, self extinguishing, and with a minimum of 22 MPA
compressive strength. The blocks shall be designed in segments
to maintain a minimum of one conductor diameter in both the
horizontal and vertical planes as required for free air rating. Cable
supports are to be provided at maximum 24 inch (610mm)
intervals.
.7
The bus enclosure shall have a continuous current rating of a
minimum of 1000 amps (50 degrees Celsius rise) and the
resistance across the enclosure section shall not exceed 50
microhms.
Acceptable Manufacturers
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Enclosure
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16136
CABLE BUS FEEDER SYSTEM
Page 3 of 4
DATE: April 2012
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
.8
The bus enclosure shall be grounded at sufficient intervals for
purpose of preventing a potential above ground on the bus
enclosure in the event of fault. Cable bus enclosure shall be ULC
certified as a grounding conductor.
.9
Termination, entrance and tap boxes are manufactured in material
coinciding with the cable bus enclosure. Termination, entrance
and tap boxes to be certified to CSA 3R standards
.1
Flange to be constructed of 3/16 inch (5 mm) aluminum sheet and
sized to suit cable duct enclosure and complete with all necessary
weather proofing materials (seal plate, heat shrink tubing, etc.).
.1
Cable duct enclosure to have internal, 1 1/2 hour rated fire barrier,
when passing through fire rated walls or ceilings.
.1
Reference: CAN CSA C22.2 No. 18-M1987. CSA approved cables
shall be used.
.2
Power cables of size, type, insulation and quantity per phase, in
accordance with the manufacturers’ data.
.3
The conductors shall be phased and supported to maintain low
impedance and ensure the mechanical strength necessary to
prevent cable movement or damage under short circuit currents of
65,000 amps symmetrical.
.4
Conductors shall be continuous length and pulled in after the bus
enclosure is in place. Electrical connectors shall be used only at
the termination of the conductor runs. All electrical termination
materials shall be provided by the cable bus manufacturer.
.5
Conductor temperature rise calculations and current balance
calculations shall be provided.
.1
Compression type cable connector bolted together and insulated.
.2
Compression type cable splice, insulated.
.1
INDOOR : High density polyethylene tube, 0.125 inch (3mm) thick,
approx. 30 inch (760mm) length, to be used over joints and held in
position by cable support assembly on each side of joint.
.2
OUTDOOR : Tyco Electronics Corporation “Raychem” heat shrink
insulation kits or equivalent, in accordance with the manufacturers’
data.
Flanges
Firestop
Cable
Cable Joints and Splices
Cable Joints Insulation
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16136
CABLE BUS FEEDER SYSTEM
DATE: April 2012
2.7
Page 4 of 4
Bonding
.1
Each Section of cable bus enclosure is bonded by the bolted joint
between sections. Bolts are to be secured by external toothed
plated lockwashers that bite into side walls.
.2
Each expansion joint to be jumpered by 18 inch (455mm) length of
cable on each side of enclosure. Size cable in accordance with
OESC table 16. Terminate cable with compression type lugs and
fixed on each side of enclosure using 3/8-16 inch bolts and
external toothed lock washers.
.1
Confirm all dimensions on site.
.2
Factory authorized representative is to supervise installation and
provide written certification of approval.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
WIRING DEVICES
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16141
2011-03-15
Page 1 of 3
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.2
Section 16335 – Temporary and Transition Electrical Equipment
.3
Section 16505 – Lighting Equipment
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16141 – Wiring Devices as indicated in
Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Submit shop drawings and Product data in accordance with
Section 01300 – Submittals.
.1
15 A and 20 A, 120 V, single pole, double pole, three-way, fourway specification grade switches.
.2
Manually-operated general purpose AC switches with the
following features:
.1
Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.
.2
Silver alloy contacts.
.3
Urea or melamine molding for parts which are subject to
carbon tracking.
.4
Suitable for back and side wiring.
.5
Ivory toggle – office areas.
.6
Brown toggle – non office areas
.3
Use switches of one manufacturer throughout the Contract.
.1
Receptacles with the amperage and voltage as indicated in
Section 16050 – Basic Materials & Methods.
.2
Use receptacles of one manufacturer throughout the Contract.
.1
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Rockwell Automation Canada Ltd (Allen-Bradley).
Measurement and Payment
Shop Drawings and
Product Data
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
Switches
Receptacles
Selector Switch
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
WIRING DEVICES
DATE: April 2012
.2
2.4
2.5
Section 16141
2011-03-15
Page 2 of 3
Schneider Canada Inc. (Square D).
Special Wiring Devices
.1
Ground fault receptacles are to be supplied and installed as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
.2
Supply and install 240/208V receptacles where shown on the
Contract Drawings.
.1
Provide cover plates for wiring devices.
.2
Use cover plates from one manufacturer throughout the Contract.
.3
Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surfacemounted utility boxes.
.4
Stainless steel, 1 mm thick cover plates, with a thickness of 2.5
mm for wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet boxes.
.5
PVC cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted
FS (Fitting Shallow) or FD (Fitting Deep) type conduit boxes.
.6
Receptacles and switches in unfinished areas shall be complete
with coverplates to match related boxes.
.7
Coverplates shall be provided for all blanked off outlets.
.8
One piece gang plates shall be used at locations where more than
one device is to be mounted adjacent to each other.
.9
Weatherproof, double lift, spring-loaded cast aluminum cover
plates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles as indicated
in the Contract Documents.
.10
Weatherproof cover plates complete with gaskets for single
receptacles or switches. Cover plates shall be Scepter
Corporation. type VSC 15/10 or WDR 15/10.
.1
Switches:
.1
Install single throw switches with the handle in the "UP"
position when the switch is closed.
.2
Install switches in gang type outlet boxes when more than
one switch is required in one location.
.2
Mount toggle switches at the height specified in Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements or as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents.
.3
Receptacles:
.1
Install receptacles in gang type outlet boxes when more
than one receptacle is required in one location.
Cover Plates
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
WIRING DEVICES
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
3.2
Section 16141
2011-03-15
Page 3 of 3
Mount receptacles at the height specified in Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements or as otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents.
Where a split receptacle has one portion switched, mount
vertically and switch upper portion.
Cover plates:
.1
Protect the stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic
film until painting and all other Work is finished.
.2
Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are
grouped.
.3
Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on
surface-mounted boxes.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATION
DATE: March 2012
Section 16146
2012-03-08
Page 1 of 2
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Section Includes
.1
Furnish and install one electric vehicle charging station, complete
with all materials and accessories required for operation.
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.1
SAE J1772 – Electric Vehicle and Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Conductive Charge Coupler
1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16146 – Electric Vehicle Charging Station
as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Submit Product data describing:
.1
Electrical power requirements
.2
Cable, connector and electrical output
.3
User control, identification and fee collection system
.4
Control and status display available at station
.5
Materials and finishes of station housing and mounting
accessories
.6
Management and operating instructions
.7
Manufacturer’s standard warranty
.2
Submit shop drawings showing:
.1
Station dimensions
.2
Mounting components and details
.3
Locations and types of electrical connections
.1
Single charging unit
.1
Output: 208-240 VAC at 30 A
.2
Output charging connector: SAE J1772
.3
Charging cable length: 5.48m
.4
Designed and rated for outdoor use
.2
Wall mounted charging station
.3
Owner management functions
.1
Radio frequency identification (RFID) or other card access
Related Sections
References
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Charging Station
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM
DATE: January 2012
.2
.3
.4
2.2
Section 16145
2012-03-08
Page 2 of 2
Capability to meter and charge users
Owner to have ability to designate users
All accessories required for the Region’s management and
control
Products
.1
ChargePoint CT2003 series as manufactured by Coulumb
Technologies, Inc.
.2
EV230WSRR as manufactured by Schneider Electric USA, Inc.
.3
Or approved equal.
.1
Inspect location where station is to be installed.
.2
Verify that location is ready to accept proper installation.
.3
Notify Consultant if conditions are present that would prevent
proper installation. Do not proceed with installation until conditions
are corrected.
.1
Install system and components in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.2
Coordinate with the Region regarding system setup and schedule
for activation.
.3
Demonstrate system operation to the Region’s representatives.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Inspection
Installation
Verify that system is working properly.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 9
GENERAL
Summary
.1
Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and Section
16010 – Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Products installed, but not supplied under the Work of this
Section: Motors and power factor correction capacitors supplied
together with drive equipment as package. Refer to drive
equipment specifications.
.3
Power factor correction capacitors: When required, supplied as
package with motor.
.1
Section 11441 – Dry Pit Centrifugal Pumps
.2
Section 15830 - Fans
.3
Section 15855 – Air Handling Units
.4
Section 15856 – Custom Air Handling Units
.1
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes codes and
standards and all amendments thereto.
.1
Design motors in accordance with applicable sections of
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), National
electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
.2
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada
(EEMAC)
1.
EEMAC Standard MG1, Motors and Generators.
2.
EEMAC Standard M1-6, Motors and Generators.
3.
EEMAC Standard MG2, Safety Standard for
Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation
and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
1.
CSA C22.2 No. 100-04, Motors and Generators.
2.
CSA C22.2 No. 145-M1986, Motors and
Generators For Use in Hazardous Locations.
CSA C390-98, Energy Efficiency Test Methods for
3.
Three-Phase Induction Motors.
.4
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
1.
IEEE 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase
Induction Motors and Generators.
Related Sections
References
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 9
Quality Assurance
.1
Conduct tests by methods detailed in IEEE 112 for three phase
motors.
.2
Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, prior to
shipment from motor manufacturer's factory to the Site, subject
motors to routine tests as defined by NEMA/ANSI and IEEE.
.3
Perform tests at motor full speed.
.4
Statically and dynamically balance motors over 0-125 percent
speed range in accordance with ISO G2.5
.5
Refer to related driven equipment specification for additional
testing requirements in motor manufacturer's factory or driven
equipment manufacturer's factory. Co-ordinate and include costs
associated with additional testing.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16221 – Three Phase Induction Motors as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Submit the following shop drawings, information and data:
.1
Motor and nameplate and performance data.
.2
Efficiency and power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and full load.
.3
Approximate outline dimensions of each motor, showing
sizes and location of terminal boxes and horizontal and
vertical clearances necessary for maintenance purposes.
.4
Speed-torque curve, speed-current curve, rotor WK2
starting time, and locked rotor time.
Maximum safe locked rotor time.
.5
.6
Total weight and heaviest shipping weight of motor.
.7
Permissible number of fully loaded and unloaded starts
over a defined time period (e.g. starts per hour).
.8
Design information regarding shaft and sheave sizes for
coordination with driven equipment.
.9
Diagrams of auxiliary systems, such as resistance
temperature detectors, current transformers for differential
protection. Auxiliary cooling water and leakage detection
system. Space heaters to prevent moisture from
condensing on the windings.
.10
Manuals
1.
Submit bound and indexed copies of operating and
maintenance manuals including, but not limited to,
the following:
2.
Storage instructions
3.
Complete parts list
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.7
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 9
Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list
Installation instructions
Operating instructions
Maintenance instructions
Routine factory test results
Design Requirements
.1
Supply severe duty fixed speed, three lead, single-voltage,
squirrel-cage induction motors designed for full voltage
.2
Design motors and individual components thereof to perform at
full nameplate rating in 40 degrees Celsius temperature and
ambient conditions specified in the Contract Documents. Motor
output power to meet operating conditions without infringing upon
motor service factor rating.
.3
Supply motors with 1.15 service factor
.4
Comply with applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and CSA
.5
If the required horsepower falls between two listed horsepower
ratings, design the motor for the higher horsepower rating.
.6
Minimum efficiency at full load to be 93 percent.
.7
Utilize a design B squirrel cage induction motor, provided that this
design meets starting and operating requirements of equipment.
Minimum starting and breakdown torque as indicated in EEMAC
MG1. If larger load torque or WK² requirements are encountered,
other motor design type selection is acceptable subject to prior
acceptance by the Consultant.
.8
Motors to operate continuously at rated load without exceeding
maximum temperature rise of 80 degrees Celsius above ambient
temperature of 40 degrees Celsius.
.9
Size pump and fan motors for duty point conditions without
including service factor.
.10
Power supply variations: A combination of 10 percent voltage
variation, 2 percent phase voltage imbalance and continuous
operation at rated load in specified ambient is not to raise winding
hot-spot temperature beyond insulation class rating.
.11
Do not exceed the maximum locked rotor current values as listed
in EEMAC Standard MG1 for the specified EEMAC design and
rating.
.12
Maximum overall sound pressure level: 80 dBA measure on "A"
weighing network using an octave band frequency analyzer
conforming to ANSI Standard S1.12. Measure mean sound
pressure level in accordance with IEEE 85.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 9
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
Approved Suppliers
.1
Electric Motor (>40 kW):
.1
U.S. Electrical Motors, div. Emerson.
.2
WEG Electric Motors Corp.
.3
General Electric Company.
.2
Electric Motor (<40 kW):
.1
U.S. Electrical Motors, div. Emerson.
.2
WEG Electric Motors Corp.
.3
General Electric Company.
.4
TECO-Westinghouse Motors (Canada) Inc.
.5
Brook Crompton (Canada) Inc.
.6
Emerson Industrial Automation (Leroy-Somer).
.3
Power Factor Correction Capacitor:
.1
TECO-Westinghouse Motors (Canada) Inc.
.2
ABB Inc.
.1
Frames: EEMAC standard regarding frame/horsepower
relationships for single speed applications.
.2
Frame Construction: The frame shall be constructed of cast or
modular iron cast steel or welded steel plate. The end plates shall
be detachable in order to facilitate the removal of the rotor and aid
in the replacement of stator coils. Aluminum housing or endbells
not acceptable.
.3
Corrosion prevention: Internal parts of motor exposed to external
cooling air, such as air deflectors and fans, shall be of corrosion
resistant material or shall be equipped with corrosion resistant
plating. Mounting hardware shall be of corrosion resistant
material.
.4
Mounting: Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
foot mounted suitable for horizontal installation.
.5
Bases: The motor mounts on the common pump base, as
supplied by the manufacturer.
.1
Windings and terminal leads: Copper conductors, with ends
brought into terminal box.
.2
Insulating material: Epoxy based, vacuum pressure impregnation
(VPI) insulating system, all winding connections including leads,
shall be placed prior to VPI. The insulation system shall meet the
criteria for NEMA Class F insulation. Winding temperature rise
shall be maximum at 80 degrees Celsius as measured by
Enclosures
Stator
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 9
resistance at a 1.0 service factor. Minimum rating phase to phase
5 kV and neutral to ground 5 kV.
2.4
.3
End turn support system: Coil ends shall be braced in order to
prevent fatigue and cracking of insulation during starting and
extended operation. The bracing should be suitable to withstand
an external three phase short circuit at full load and 100 percent
voltage.
.4
High humidity environment: use an anti-fungus treatment.
.5
Winding temperature detection: Where indicated in the Contract
Documents, two temperature sensors per phase in the stator
windings and one each motor bearing with leads brought out to a
separate terminal box. Platinum three wire RTD’s shall be
provided with resistance of 100 ohms at 0 degrees Celsius. One
RTD of each winding will be monitored.
.6
Space Heaters: Space heaters shall be low watt density silicon
rubber wrap around or strip type.
.7
Treat insulation to render stator winding and leads moisture proof,
it must pass a sealed winding conformance test in accordance
with NEMA MG 1-20.49.
.1
Sleeve: Sleeves shall be spherically seated, hydrodynamic babbit
lined, self angling type, with the following features:
.1
The bearings shall be easily removable without disturbing
any part of the pump other than the bearing caps.
.2
Sleeve bearing loading shall not exceed 1200 kPa when
calculated on a projected shaft area.
.3
The L/d ratio for the sleeve bearing shall not be less than
1.0; were “L” is the bearing length and “d” is the sleeve
diameter at the bearing.
.4
Provide bearings with a maximum surface finish roughness
of 0.3 to 0.5 micron, rms.
.5
Provide material with a maximum hardness at least 100
Brinnell points less than the shaft.
The shaft surface finish inside the bearing shall have a
.6
maximum surface roughness of 0.15 to 0.3 micron, rms.
The shaft shall have a minimum surface hardness of 350
bhn (Brinell hardness number).
.7
Design the bearings for operation in reverse rotation at 135
percent of the maximum rated speed.
.8
The bearings shall be pressure oil lubricated by a standalone system. The oil shall be fed under pressure to the
bearings and flow by gravity back to the pressure
lubricating system.
.9
A redundant, two piece, brass oil ring shall be able to pick
up oil from the bottom of the bearing housing to allow
Bearings and Lubrication
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.10
.11
.12
2.5
2.6
2.7
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 9
equipment coast-down lubrication in the event of a power
failure.
The bearings shall only rely on the oil for cooling.
Oil seals shall be floating labyrinth type.
The motor manufacturer shall furnish and install bearing oil
piping, flow switches, gauges, flow control valves, and
isolation valves, as necessary to connect the individual
bearings to the Oil Lubrication System.
.2
Non drive end bearing shall be electrically insulated.
.1
Rotation: For motors designed for single direction operation only,
clearly indicate direction of rotation by means of arrow on nondriving end. Painted arrows are not acceptable.
.2
Shaft extensions: With keys.
.3
Keyway: EEMAC standards for EEMAC frame motors.
.4
The rotor core shall be assembled with laminations of high grade
fully processed and pre-coated silicon steel securely clamped
between heavy end rings. The rotor bars and end rings shall be
copper or copper alloy. Rectangular bars shall be placed in the
slots without insulation or shims. End rings are to be induction
brazed with silver brazing alloy.
.1
Totally enclosed water cooled motors: Integral fan, part of rotor,
non-sparking, abrasion resistant, low noise level material. Air flow
from non-driving end toward driving end.
.1
Terminal boxes: Waterproof, cast iron or heavy wall steel, split
design, threaded conduit holes, field rotatable in 90 degree steps
for bottom, side or top conduit entry.
.2
Terminal box location: On right hand side when viewed from the
non-driving end, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.3
Motor lead terminations: Solderless type for incoming cable
connections and clamp terminal for ground connections. Clearly
and permanently mark motor leads.
.4
Frame to terminal box cable passage: Seal to prevent the
entrance of moisture or foreign matter.
.5
Gaskets: Between cover and box mating surfaces.
.6
Window type: Provide current transformers for differential
protection with 50/5 Amperes-ANSI accuracy C10, - one for each
winding. Provide separate terminal box for the same
Rotor Assembly
Ventilation System
Terminal Boxes
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
2.8
2.9
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 7 of 9
.7
Provide surge capacitors and lightning arrestors, mounted and
connected as close as possible to the motor leads. Their primary
function is to attenuate the incoming very high, rates of current
change that can cause damage to machine winding. Lightning
arrestors to serve as a limitation on the magnitude of the surges.
These units will be accessible only after opening of main terminal
box.
.8
Design all high voltage motor terminal boxes large enough for
installation of stress cones, current transformers and surge
arrestors.
.9
Where ancillary devices are specified in the Contract Documents
provide a separate box for termination of sensor leads. Leads to
be clearly identified, provide nameplate data and connection
diagram.
.1
Finish: Non-machined metal surfaces, one coat, primer and one
coat suitable corrosion and oil resistant paint. Colour,
manufacturer standard, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.2
Highly corrosive areas: Chemical duty, epoxy finish.
.3
Shipping protection: Including machined surfaces, protect with
suitable means to prevent corrosion or moisture accumulation and
damage during shipment and installation.
.1
Lifting provisions: Motors weighing 23 kg minimum, one or more
lifting eyebolts, rings, or lugs capable of supporting weight of
motor. If lugs are concealed by enclosure, attach nameplates to
both sides of motor warning against improper lifting.
.1
Nameplates: Stainless steel or non-corrodible alloy, embossed
lettering, fixed to non-removable part of frame, in easily readable
location, nameplates gives.
.1
Manufacturer’s type and frame designation
.2
Horsepower/kilowatts output
.3
Time rating
.4
Temperature rise
.5
RPM at rated load
.6
Frequency
.7
Number of phases
.8
Voltage
.9
Rated load amperes
.10
Code letter and inrush current
.11
Service factor
Painting
Lifting Provisions
2.10 Nameplates
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.12
.13
.14
.15
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 8 of 9
Enclosure
Manufacturer’s name, mark & logo
Manufacturer’s plant location
Serial number and date of manufacture
.2
Dual voltage and multi-speed motors: Nameplate information
showing wiring diagram and connection for each voltage and/or
speed.
.1
Capacitors to be switched with motors unless otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents. Power factor to be corrected to a
range, minimum of 0.93 lagging.
.2
Rating selection: By motor manufacturer, to prevent overvoltage
and damaging transient torques.
.3
Liquid filled capacitors: With internal or external drip pans to
contain liquid in the event of a rupture.
.4
Enclosure: Splash proof, steel construction with removable cover,
suitable for floor mounting adjacent to motors.
.5
Liquid impregnated polypropylene film for high voltage application.
.6
Internal discharge resistors: To discharge unit to 50 V maximum
within one minute after disconnection from supply.
.7
Ancillaries: Solderless line connectors, EEMAC 12 conduit box
fuses, line terminals, fuse clips.
.1
Protect motor against physical damage and moisture until it is
ready for energization.
.2
Dry out motor in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations if dampness is present.
.3
Install motor on driven machinery, baseplate, structure, slide rails
or concrete base (once fully cured), rigid plumb square, using only
lifting facilities provided.
.4
Make electrical connections as indicated in the Contract
Documents. Install liquid-tight PVC jacketed flexible conduit
section between rigid conduit feed and motor where applicable.
.5
Where applicable, make flexible conduit or armoured cable long
enough to permit movement of motor over entire length of slide
rails.
.6
Check direction of rotation with motor uncoupled from driven
equipment. Correct rotation where required.
.7
Co-ordinate with the personnel or Subcontractor installing the
driven equipment in the alignment and coupling of motor to driven
2.11 Capacitors
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16221
2006-08-30
Page 9 of 9
machinery. Comply with the manufacturers' instructions and use
correct parts such as couplings, belts, sheaves, as provided by
motor manufacturer.
3.2
.8
Where applicable, install power factor correction capacitors
supplied with motor and make final connections.
.1
Before connecting feeder cable, measure winding insulation
resistance between each phase and ground. Repeat tests after
connecting feeder cable at the supply. Where applicable,
disconnect power factor capacitors, surge arresters and solid state
equipment during tests.
.2
Verify the operation and settings of the motor protection system
before energization.
.3
Check motor lubrication, alignment and direction of rotation.
.4
For motors rated 200 kW minimum, employ the services of an
independent testing agency that is otherwise acceptable to the
Consultant to test variation in motor full load and peak current by
means of an oscillograph as indicated by EEMAC MG1.
Tests
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 13
GENERAL
Description
.1
This specification describes a complete Adjustable Speed AC
Drive (ASD) used to control the speed of NEMA design B
induction motors used in areas where low harmonic content is
desired or mandated.
.2
The Contractor shall ensure that the ASD manufacturer will supply
the ASD and all necessary controls as herein specified.
.3
The Contractor shall ensure that the ASD will be manufactured by
a company with a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience in the
production of this type of equipment.
.4
The Contractor shall ensure that the ASD manufacturer will be
able to provide start-up service, 24 hour/day emergency call
service, repair Work, maintenance and troubleshooting training of
customer personnel.
.1
The ASD manufacturing facility shall be ISO 9001 and ISO 14001
certified.
.2
All printed circuit boards shall be completely tested before being
assembled into the complete ASD. The ASD shall be subjected to
a functional test and load test.
.3
All printed circuit boards shall be conformal coated for
environmental protection.
.4
The ASD manufacturer shall have an analysis laboratory to
evaluate the failure of any component including but not limited to
an entire phase module.
.1
The specified ASD shall be designed and materials shall be
furnished in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable
sections of the following codes and standards.
.1
International / European Standards for Design and
Construction:
.2
IEC / EN 60071-1: Insulation coordination - Part 1:
Definitions, principles and rules
.3
IEC / EN 60146: Semiconductor Converters
.4
IEC / EN 60664-1: Insulation coordination for
equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests
.5
IEC / EN 61800-4: Adjustable speed electrical
power drive systems – Part 4: General
requirements – Rating specifications for AC power
Quality Assurance
Codes And Standards
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.6
.7
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 13
drive systems above 1 000 VAC and not exceeding
35 kV
IEC / EN 61800-5-1: Safety requirements electrical
thermal and energy
IEC 62103: Electronic equipment for use in power
installations (EN 50178)
.2
International / European Standards for Transformers
.1
IEC 60146-1-3: Semiconductor Converters –
General requirements and line commutated
converters – Part 1-3: Transformers and reactors
IEC 61378-1: Converter transformers – Part 1:
.2
Transformers for industrial applications
.3
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards
.1
Special international committee on radio
interference (CISPR) 22 Cl A: Information
technology equipment - Radio disturbance
characteristics; Limits and methods of
measurement
.2
IEC / EN 61000-2-4: Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) – Part 2-4: Environment – Compatibility
levels in industrial plants for low-frequency
conducted disturbances
.3
IEC / EN 61800-3: Adjustable speed electrical
power drive systems - Part 3: EMC requirements
and specific test methods
.4
Environmental Standards
.1
IEC / EN 60721-3-1: Classification of environmental
conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities –
Section 1: Storage
.2
IEC / EN 60721-3-2: Classification of environmental
conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities –
Section 2: Transport
.3
IEC / EN 60721-3-3: Classification of environmental
conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities –
Section 3: Stationary use at weather protected
locations
.5
American Standards
.1
IEEE 519: Guide for Harmonic Control and
Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters
.2
IEEE 958: Guide for Application of AC Adjustable
Speed Drives on 2400-13800 V auxiliary systems in
electric power generating stations
.3
IEEE 1566: Standard for Performance of Adjustable
Speed AC Drives Rated 375 kW and Larger
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 13
IEEE C57.12.00: General Requirements for LiquidImmersed Distribution Power and Regulating
Transformers
IEEE C57.12.01: General Requirements for DryType Distribution and Power Transformers
IEEE C57.18.10: Practices and Requirements for
Semiconductor Power Rectifier Transformers
Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) 7.1 NEMA
Safety standard for construction and guide to
selection, installation and operation of Adjustable
Frequency Drive Systems
Qualifications
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd., ACS 2000 Ultra Low
Harmonic (ULH) drive.
.2
Allen Bradley, Rockwell Automation, Inc.
.3
ASD’s that are manufactured by a third party and/or “brand
labeled” shall not be acceptable.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16263 – Adjustable Speed Drives for 5 kV
Motors as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The Submittals shall include the following information:
.1
Outline Dimensions and Weight.
.2
Customer connection and power wiring diagrams as
applicable to the specific installation requirement.
.3
Complete technical product description including a
complete list of options provided.
.4
Cooling air requirements and cooling fan compatibility
.5
Documented test results confirming Ultra low Harmonic
and unity power factor without Power Factor correction
capacitors.
.1
The ASD shall be ‘state of the art’ Voltage Source, 5 level
topology utilizing High Voltage insulated gate bipolar transistor
(IGBT) technology.
.2
The ASD shall be an Ultra Low Harmonic Adjustable Speed AC
Drive that is designed to comply with standard IEEE 519-1992
when installed into a system that already is in compliance with this
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
PART 2. DESIGN
2.1
Description
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 13
standard without the use of a multi-pulse transformer or active
filter components.
2.2
.3
Reliability:
.1
The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the ASD shall
be greater than 40,000 hours, demonstrated. All
components of the ASD shall be considered for MTBF
calculations.
.2
The calculated Availability of the ASD shall be greater than
99.95 percent. The Availability shall be calculated based
on the expected downtime due to corrective and
preventive maintenance.
.3
The manufacturer shall list any control or power
components that require recommended maintenance or
replacement before 40,000 hours of operation. Information
must be available in manufacturer's maintenance manual
and available for submittal.
.4
ASD’s, using electrolytic capacitors in the power circuit, will
not be accepted. Foil capacitors with estimated life of
100,000 hours or greater shall be used.
.5
All power semiconductors and passive power components
in both the rectifier and inverter part shall be medium
voltage rated components rated 3300 V minimum. Low
voltage components are not acceptable in the power
circuit.
.6
In the event of either an input or output power
semiconductor failure, the component or assembly
containing that component shall have a mean time to
repair no greater than 30 minutes.
.4
ASD Output Power Quality
.1
Motor cable voltage reflections shall not result in any
performance restrictions on motor side for cable distances
up to 300 m. .
.2
The ASD shall not induce greater than 2 percent torque
pulsations in the motor air gap in the frequency range up to
100 Hz.
.5
Efficiency
.1
Overall Efficiency of the ASD system shall include the ASD
Isolation Transformer (if required), ASD and all ASD
auxiliaries (such as the cooling system), Power Factor
Correction and Harmonic Filters.
.2
The overall drive system efficiency shall be not less than
96 percent at full load, full speed.
.1
The Ultra Low Harmonic construction of the ASD shall not
contribute any significant harmonics to the system. The ASD shall
Harmonics
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 13
comply with the limits at or below those listed in “Harmonic Control
in Electrical Power Systems, IEEE Std. 519-1992”. .
2.3
.2
All harmonic management devices must be internal to the ASD
enclosure and supplied as a complete solution.
.3
The ASD shall have an active line supply unit which controls the
waveform of the input current and reduces the low order harmonic
current drawn from the power line. Line currents and voltages
shall be nearly sinusoidal.
.4
IGBT’s shall be used in the rectifier and inverter circuits. The
power structure of the inverter section shall be suitable for use in
the rectifier section in order to minimize the number of unique
spare parts required.
.5
The ASD’s design shall not compensate for existing harmonic
content in the distribution system.
.6
The total power factor at the ASD input shall be > 0.95, for the
load range of 20 percent to 100 percent. The Contractor shall
ensure that the ASD manufacturer will provide a Power Factor
Correction Filter if the ASD does not meet this requirement.
.7
The ASD including Power Factor Correction and/or Harmonic
Filter shall never have a leading power factor and take into
account any interaction with other system components. ASD’s
with large capacitance to ground on the input of the drive shall
provide special provisions to maintain power factor above 0.96
throughout the entire speed range.
.1
The ASD shall be rated to operate from 3-phase power at +10/-10
percent of rated voltage. The under voltage trip level shall be a
minimum 25 percent under the nominal voltage.
.2
The ASD shall be rated to operate at the following environmental
operating conditions: ambient temperature 5 degrees Celsius to
40 degrees Celsius continuous. ASD’s that can only operate at 40
degrees Celsius intermittently (during a 24 hour period) are not
acceptable and must be oversized. Altitude 0 to 2000 metres
above sea level without derating, less than 95 percent humidity,
non-condensing.
.3
The ASD shall be rated to operate from input power from 48 Hz to
63 Hz.
.4
Output voltage and current ratings shall match the adjustable
frequency operating requirements of standard IEC and NEMA
design A or NEMA design B motors.
.5
The normal duty overload current capacity shall be 110 percent of
rated current for one (1) minute out of ten (10) minutes.
.6
The heavy duty overload current capacity shall be 150 percent of
rated current for one (1) minute out of ten (10) minutes.
Ratings
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
2.4
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 13
.7
The area classification for the ASD shall be non-hazardous.
.8
The ASD shall be protected from vibration with maximum
sinusoidal displacement of 0.3 mm (2…9 Hz) and maximum
acceleration of 1 m/s2 (2…200 Hz).
.1
All models shall provide a complete, ready-to-install solution.
Medium voltage input power cabling entering and exiting the ASD
enclosure shall be a 3 in – 3 out configuration. External cabling to
an isolation transformer is unacceptable unless specifically
requested.
.2
Construction shall be robust such that all power semiconductors
are shipped completely assembled and installed in the drive
cabinet. Separate shipping of power semiconductor phase
modules is not acceptable
.3
High voltage IGBT power technology shall be used. This
technology shall be used for all power and voltage ranges offered
by the manufacturer. The use of low voltage insulated gate
bipolar transistors (IGBT) or medium voltage symmetrical gate
commutated thyristors (SGCT) is unacceptable.
.4
The ASD shall offer microprocessor based control logic that is
isolated from power circuitry.
.5
The ASD shall use the same main control board for all ratings.
.6
Control connections shall remain consistent for all power ratings.
.7
The ASD shall employ a pulse width modulation (PWM) controlled
AC to DC rectifier (commonly referred to as an active supply unit
or active front end). The ASD shall not require a multi-pulse
transformer in order to meet IEEE 519 standards. If an input
harmonic filter is required to meet IEEE 519 it shall be factory
mounted and wired within the ASD enclosure.
.8
The ASD shall be offered in NEMA Type 1/IP21 enclosures.
.9
ASD shall be of free-standing construction and shall include the
following standard features:
.1
The phase modules in the cabinet shall be of a modular
construction for quick removal and replacement.
Phase modules shall be of modular construction with bus
.2
stab connections to ensure fast and easy handling.
.10
The ASD enclosure doors with access to power semiconductor
parts shall include a mechanical interlocking system with a safety
grounding switch. The enclosure doors can be opened only if the
safety ground switch connects all DC buses to ground, to ensure
all stored ASD and motor energy is discharged. Grounding of any
power circuit via a resistor is not acceptable.
Construction
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
2.5
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 7 of 13
.11
ASD enclosure panels with access to medium voltage parts other
than power semiconductors shall require a tool for entry. All
panels shall have appropriate warnings.
.12
All painted surfaces shall have an ANSI 61 grey exterior finish
unless otherwise specified on Buyer’s Datasheet. Interior
surfaces shall be bright (unpainted) galvanized steel.
.13
The enclosure must be designed to avoid harmonic and inductive
heating and eliminate radio frequency interference
.14
Cooling fans of air cooled ASDs shall have the option for a
redundant fan with automatic switch-over, if specified in Buyer’s
Datasheet. Periodical cycling between active and stand-by fans
shall be initiated automatically. Loss of redundancy shall issue an
alarm.
.15
ASD noise level shall be less than 85 dB(A) at 1 metre distance
for air cooled ASDs.
.1
Each ASD shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control
panel consisting of a back lighted alphanumeric display and a
keypad with the functions:
.1
Run/Stop command
.2
Local/Remote command
.3
Speed Increase/Decrease command
.4
Menu navigation and parameter selection
.2
All parameter names, fault messages, warnings and other
information shall be displayed.
.3
During normal operation, the speed reference, and run/stop
forward/reverse and local/remote status shall be displayed. A
minimum of 2 additional user selectable values shall be available
for display including the following values as a minimum:
.1
Motor speed, current and power
.2
Output frequency, voltage and torque
.3
DC bus voltage
.4
Cooling air pressure drop
.5
Values of analog input and output signals
.6
Status of discrete inputs and outputs.
.4
Password protection shall be available for prevention of
unauthorized parameter access.
.5
The keypad shall be used for local control, for setting all
parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus.
.6
An intelligent start-up assistant shall be provided as standard. The
Start-up routine will guide the user through all necessary
adjustments to optimize operation.
Operator Interface
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
2.6
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 8 of 13
Protective Features
.1
The Contractor will provide a dedicated circuit breaker or vacuum
contactor (hereto called Input Isolation Device); rated to protect
the ASD at specified short-circuit levels. The Input Isolation
Device shall be controlled by the ASD.
.2
The ASD shall have short circuit detection capability at the gate
unit level to allow for short circuit current to be switched off at the
semiconductor level within 25 micro seconds.
.3
A minimum of 40 time tagged fault messages shall be stored in
the ASD’s fault history.
.4
An Emergency Off pushbutton shall be provided on the ASD door.
The Emergency Off pushbutton will trip the upstream main circuit
breaker (MCB) and the motor will coast to stop.
.5
A discrete (binary) input for ‘Process-stop’ shall be provided. The
reaction upon activation of this input shall be either a ramp or
coast to stop’, selectable by the user.
.6
An automatic restart function shall attempt to restart the ASD after
various internal fault conditions. An adjustable time-out setting
shall be provided. The user shall have the option of employing this
feature or disabling it.
.7
The following motor protection functions shall be available at the
ASD.
.1
Motor winding or motor lead phase-to-phase short.
.2
Motor ground fault protection.
.3
Motor phase loss protection.
.4
Stall protection shall be programmable to provide a
warning or fault the ASD after the motor has operated
above a programmed torque level for a programmed time
limit.
.5
Motor overload (overcurrent) protection shall be
programmable to provide a warning or stop the ASD,
applying a minimum of three time dependent thresholds.
The ASD shall provide electronic motor overload
protection.
.8
The following ASD protective functions shall be available.
.1
Overtemperature and pressure drop monitoring
.2
Loss of cooling (fan) failure
.3
ASD internal fault detection
.4
Protection against input phase loss.
.5
Surge arrestors for phase to phase and phase to ground
line voltage transient protection.
.6
The ASD shall provide input phase loss and line under
voltage protection.
.7
A power loss ride through feature shall allow the ASD to
remain fully operational after losing power as long as
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.8
2.7
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 9 of 13
kinetic energy can be recovered from the rotating mass of
the motor and load.
For each programmed warning and fault protection
function, the ASD shall display a message in complete
English words or Standard English abbreviations. The five
(5) most recent fault messages and times shall be stored in
the ASD’s fault history.
Control Inputs And Outputs
.1
The Contractor shall provide 380 to 600 V auxiliary power. The
ASD shall transform auxiliary power for the control section.
Control power shall be defined on customer one line diagram by
the Contractor in the product submittal.
.2
Discrete Inputs
.1
A minimum of ten (10) discrete inputs shall be provided.
Inputs shall be independently programmable with function
selections (run/stop, hand-off-auto, etc.).
.2
Discrete (binary) inputs shall be designed for 24 VDC.
Discrete input functions shall include ‘Run/Stop’,
‘Increase/Decrease’, ‘Disable Local’ (to prevent
unauthorized operation from the local panel) and ‘Remote
Reset’.
.3
Additional (binary) inputs for transformer monitoring (oil
pressure / temperature / level – alarm and trip) shall be
available.
.3
Discrete Outputs
Minimum of four (4) freely programmable digital outputs
.1
shall be provided. Selections shall include:
Operating conditions such as ASD ready, ASD
1.
running, reversed and at set speed
General warning and fault conditions
2.
3.
Relay contacts shall be rated to switch 6 Amps at
24 VDC or 115/230 VAC.
.4
Analog Inputs
.1
Minimum of two (2) analog inputs shall be provided:
1.
Resolution of analog inputs must be at least 10 bit
total resolution
.5
Analog inputs shall be programmable for either voltage or current,
(0-10V, or 0-20mA). Analog input signals processing functions
shall include scaling adjustments and adjustable filtering. Analog
signal functions shall include speed and torque reference signals.
.6
Two (2) analog inputs shall be programmable to form a reference
by addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection or
maximum selection.
.7
Analog Outputs
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
2.8
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 10 of 13
A minimum of two (2) analog outputs configurable for
either voltage or current shall be provided.
Outputs shall be independently programmable to provide
signals proportional to output function selections including
output speed, frequency, voltage, current and power.
.8
RTD Inputs
.1
If transformer winding temperature and/or motor winding
and bearing temperature supervision are required, the
drive shall provide an option for a minimum of 5 inputs. A
Motor Protection Relay shall not be required for adequate
protection.
.9
Interface to Upstream Disconnect
.1
Two (2) outputs and three (3) inputs shall be provided for
interfacing to an upstream disconnect device.
.1
If specified in Buyer’s Datasheet, serial field bus communication
interface modules shall be provided.
.2
The ASD shall be capable of communicating with other ASD’s or
controllers via a serial communications link. A variety of
communications interface modules for the typical overriding
control systems shall be available.
.1
Interface modules shall be available for a wide selection of
protocols including but not limited to:
1.
Modbus
2.
Ethernet IP
3.
DeviceNet
4.
Profibus
.2
I/O shall be accessible through the serial communications
adapter. Serial communication capabilities shall include,
but not be limited to:
1.
Run-Stop control
2.
Speed Adjustment
3.
Accel/Decel time adjustments
4.
The ASD shall have the capability of allowing the
overriding controller to monitor feedback such as
process variable feedback, output speed/frequency,
current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt
hours, operating hours, relay outputs, and
diagnostic warning and fault information.
5.
A connection shall also be provided for personal
computer interface. Software shall be available for
ASD setup, diagnostic analysis, monitoring and
control.
Serial Communications
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
2.9
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 11 of 13
Control Functions And Adjustments
.1
Output frequency shall be adjustable between 0 Hz and 75 Hz.
Operation above motor nameplate shall require programming
changes to prevent inadvertent high-speed operation.
.2
Stop mode selections shall include coast to stop and ramp to stop.
.3
The ASD shall be capable of controlling deceleration of a load
without generating an overvoltage fault caused by excessive
regenerated energy. Overvoltage control on deceleration shall
extend the ramp time beyond the programmed value to keep the
amount of regenerated energy below the point that causes
overvoltage trip.
.4
The ASD shall run with a sensorless control algorithm with static
speed error of less than 0.2 percent and open loop torque step
rise time of less than 10 milliseconds.
.5
The ASD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (flying
start) regardless of motor direction. It should then accelerate or
decelerate to the active reference without tripping on fault or
causing component damage.
.6
The ASD shall provide an automatic current limit feature to control
motor currents during startup and provide a “soft start” torque
profile for the motor-load combination. Current and torque limit
adjustments shall be provided to limit the maximum ASD output
current and the maximum torque produced by the motor.
.7
The ASD shall accept a start/stop command and speed reference
from a local ASD panel, or from a remote panel.
.8
Speed control functions shall include:
.1
Adjustable min/max speed limits.
.2
Three sets of critical speed lockout adjustments.
.3
A built-in PID controller to control a process variable such
as pressure, flow or fluid level.
.9
Five (5) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges shall be
provided to prevent the ASD from operating the load continuously
at an unstable speed.
.1
The ASD shall have optional data logging capability that will
monitor and store all information with respect to system events
and system alerts, as well as information about the ASD.
.1
Data logging shall be independent from ASD control.
.2
All events/alerts related to ASD operating data should be
stored by the data logging system for later analysis.
.3
Data logging system should on an event ASD basis
monitor ASD operation and performance.
.4
Data logging system should allow optionally to trend long
term operating performance of the ASD
2.10 Datalogging
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
.5
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 12 of 13
Data logging system should monitor and register all
changes to the ASD configuration and monitor consequent
performance
.2
The data logging system should contain supporting information
with respect to trouble shooting, tuning, and ASD set-up
parameters
.1
Optionally system should provide Preventive Maintenance
information and monitor the Preventive Maintenance
schedule over time.
.3
The data logging system has to be equipped to enable remote
access.
.1
The data logging system should be equipped with remote
access functionality enabling remote troubleshooting and
performance analysis by Supplier experts (data transfer,
remote collaboration, automated notifications etc.).
.1
Enclosed ASD shall be provided with input emergency off
function:
.1
Emergency off command by the operator shall separate
the ASD from the AC line by opening an upstream line
circuit breaker.
.1
Testing:
.1
The ASD equipment shall undergo standard routine testing
in accordance to applicable standards.
Each ASD shall be factory load tested. This test shall
.2
include a full current test and a light load test with an
induction motor on a dynamometer test stand.
.3
If requested in Buyer’s Datasheet, a factory acceptance
test or factory inspection visit for Buyer’s representative
shall be scheduled upon award of contract.
.2
Spare Parts
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the ASD manufacturer
shall provide a complete list of spare parts for the ASD.
.2
The ASD manufacturer shall provide local support for
renewal parts.
.3
As a minimum, the ASD manufacturer shall include these
spare parts as part of the Work of this Section:
1.
100 percent spares of each type of medium voltage
fuse.
2.
100 percent spares of each type of low voltage
fuse.
3.
Spare filter material
4.
Surge arresters.
2.11 Emergency Off Function
PART 3.
EXECUTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR 5 KV MOTORS
DATE: April 2012
Section 16263
2006-08-30
Page 13 of 13
.3
Preparation for Shipment
.1
Equipment shall be individually crated and tagged with
proper identification of the assembly to which it belongs.
Materials, including detailed wiring diagrams and
.2
instructions for reassembling shipping sections and making
bus connections at shipping splits shall be provided by the
Contractor.
.3
Terminal strips shall be provided for all interconnecting
wiring at shipping splits. Each wire terminal shall be
identified with permanent wire markers.
.4
Installation
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the ASD manufacturer will
provide adequate drawings and instruction material to
facilitate installation of the ASD by qualified electrical and
mechanical personnel employed by others.
.5
Start-Up
.1
The Contractor shall be able to provide commissioning
services and basic hands-on maintenance and operation
training on Site by an registered professional engineer
licensed to practice in Ontario certified by the ASD
Manufacturer.
.2
Microsoft Windows based software shall be provided for
ASD commissioning, parameters setup, fault log viewing,
diagnostic analysis, monitoring and control. The software
shall provide real time graphical displays of ASD
performance.
.6
Product Support
.1
Factory trained application engineering and service
personnel that are thoroughly familiar with the ASD
Products offered shall be locally available at the installation
location.
.2
A 24/365 technical support line shall be available on a tollfree-line.
.7
Warranty
.1
All equipment furnished under this section shall be
warranted by the installing Contractor and the equipment
manufacturer(s) for a minimum period of 24 months from
the date of Total Performance of the Work.
.2
There shall be 24/365 support available on a toll-free-line.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16271
2011-03-15
Page 1 of 2
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.2
Section 16335 – Temporary Electrical Equipment
.1
Submit Product data in accordance with Section 01300 –
Submittals.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16271 – Dry Type Transformers Up To 600
V Primary as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Design:
.1
Type: ANN.
.2
Size, voltage, phase, as shown on the Drawings.
.3
Voltage taps: standard.
.4
Insulation: Class 185 degrees Celsius temperature rise –
80 degrees Celsius over an ambient of 40 degrees
Celsius.
.5
Hipot: standard
.6
Average sound level: 60 db
.7
Enclosure – CSA # 2
.8
Mounting: Wall or Floor
.9
Finish: in accordance with Section 16010 – Electrical
General Requirements.
.10
Rating - kVA
.11
Winding – Copper – delta connected primary wye
connected secondary with neutral grounding provision.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Label size: 7.
.1
Mount dry type transformers up to 75 kVA as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
Product Data
Measurement and Payment
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Transformers
Equipment Identification
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
DATE: April 2012
Section 16271
2011-03-15
Page 2 of 2
.2
Mount dry type transformers above 75 kVA on the floor.
.3
Ensure that there is adequate clearance around transformer for
ventilation.
.4
Install transformers in level upright position.
.5
Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and
just before putting the transformer into service.
.6
Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.
.7
Make primary and secondary connections in accordance with the
Contract Drawings.
.8
Energize transformers after installation is complete.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 6
GENERAL
Scope
.1
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Transient Voltage
Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment having the electrical
characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein and
as shown on the Contract Drawings. To maximize performance
and reliability, the AC surge protection shall be integrated into
electrical distribution equipment such as switchgear,
switchboards, panelboards, busway and/or motor control centers.
.1
Section 16620 – Emergency Power Generators
.1
TVSS units and all components shall be designed, manufactured
and tested in accordance with CSA standard C22.2 No.41.07 –
Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16289 – Transient Voltage Surge
Suppression (TVSS) as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The following shall be submitted to the Consultant:
.1
Provide verification that the TVSS device complies with the
required CSA standards.
.2
Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of
oscillograph results for the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category
C3 & C1 (combination wave) and B3 (ringwave) tested in
accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
.3
Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz
verifying that the device’s noise attenuation equals or
exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz.
.4
For retrofit mounting applications, provide
electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions,
weights, installation instruction details, and wiring
configuration.
.5
Provide test reports in compliance with NEMA LS1 from a
recognized independent testing laboratory acceptable to
the Consultant verifying that the suppressor components
can survive published surge current rating on both a per
Related Sections
References
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 6
mode and per phase basis using the IEEE C62.41. Test
data on an individual module is not acceptable.
1.6
1.7
1.8
Submittals for Construction
.1
The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
.1
Final drawings showing exact connection/configuration of
the incorporated or retrofitted TVSS system. Drawings
shall reflect all of the devices that were submitted to the
Consultant for approval.
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer will have a 24
hour response capability that can provide field engineering
personnel on Site within 24-hours of a request from the Region.
The field service organization must have fully accredited, power
system engineers located nearby and on 24 hr notice time to
arrive at the Site and who are capable of performing complete
analysis, and coordination studies.
Qualifications
Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1
1.9
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of manufacturer’s
instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of
shipment.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
.1
Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets
and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each
major component.
.1
TVSS units installed within low voltage distribution equipment
shall be provided by the manufacturer of the low voltage
distribution equipment in which they are installed.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Manufacturers
Voltage Surge Suppression - General
.1
Electrical Requirements
.1
Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to the Drawings for
operating voltage and unit configuration.
.2
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The
MCOV shall be greater than 115 percent of the nominal
system operating voltage.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
2.3
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 6
The suppression system shall incorporate a hybrid
designed Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOV) surge suppressor
for the service entrance and other distribution level. The
system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium
cell, air gaps or other components that may crowbar the
system voltage leading to system upset or create any
environmental hazards.
Protection Modes – For a wye configured system, the
device must have directly connected suppression elements
between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutralground (N-G). For a delta-configured system, the device
must have suppression elements between line to line (L-L)
and line to ground (L-G).
TVSS Design
.1
Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be
equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal
stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression
platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched
MOV.
.2
Electrical Noise Filter – Each unit shall include a high –
performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Products not able to
demonstrate noise attenuation of 50 dB at 100 kHz shall be
rejected.
.3
Extended Range Filter – The Surge Protective Device shall have a
High Frequency Extended Range Tracking Filter in each Line to
Neutral mode with compliance to UL 1283 and NEMA LS1. The
filter shall have published high frequency attenuation rating in the
attenuation frequencies.
.4
Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed
circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All
internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing
low impedance conductors and compression fittings.
.5
Standard Monitoring Diagnostics – Each TVSS shall provide
integral monitoring options:
.1
Each unit shall provide a green/red solid state indicator
light on each phase. The absence of a green light and the
presence of a red light, shall indicate which phase(s) have
been damaged.
.2
Remote Status Monitor – The TVSS device must include
form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote
annunciation of unit status. The remote alarm shall change
state if any of the three phases detect a fault condition.
.3
Audible Alarm – The TVSS shall provide an audible alarm
with a reset pushbutton that will be activated under any
fault condition.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
.4
.5
.6
2.4
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 4 of 6
Event Counter – The TVSS shall be equipped with a
system designed to indicate to the user how many surges,
sags, swells and outages have occurred at the location.
The event counter triggers each time under each
respective category after significant event occurs.
Push to Test – The TVSS shall be equipped with push-totest feature, designed to provide users with real time
testing of the suppressor’s monitoring and diagnostic
system. By depressing the test button, the diagnostic
system initiates a self test procedure. If the system is fully
operational, the self test will activate all indicator lights.
Voltage Monitoring – The TVSS shall display true Root
Mean Square (RMS) on the L-N voltage protection mode
on Wye configuration and three L-L voltage on delta
configuration.
.6
Overcurrent Protection Fusing: In order to isolate the TVSS under
any fault condition, the manufacturer shall provide:
.1
Individual Fusing: MOV’s shall be individually fused via
Copper Fuse Trace. The Copper Fuse shall allow
protection during high surge (kA) events.
.2
Thermal Protection: MOV’s shall be equipped with Thermal
Fuse Spring (TFS) technology which allows disconnection
of the suppression component at the overheated stage
common during temporary over voltage condition. For
small fault currents between 100 mA to 30 Amp, or if the
occurrence is over a longer period of time, the TFS will
disconnect first.
.3
All overcurrent protection components shall be tested in
compliance with UL 1449 – Limited Current Test and AIC
rating test.
.7
Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capability shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and
ANSI/IEEE C62.45
.1
The suppression filter system shall be repetitive surge
tested in every mode and it shall satisfy the requirements
of ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45
.1
The TVSS applications covered under this Section include
distribution and branch panel locations, bus plugs, motor control
centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. The
TVSS located in the branch panel shall be tested to demonstrate
that it is suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C1
environments.
.2
Lighting and Distribution Panelboard Requirements
.1
The TVSS application covered under this section includes
lighting and distribution Panelboards. The TVSS units shall
System Application
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.5
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 5 of 6
be tested to demonstrate suitability for ANSI/IEEE C62.41
Category C1 environments.
The TVSS shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, subfeed lugs and sub-feed breaker options.
The TVSS shall be installed as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
The panel board shall be capable of re-energizing upon
removal of the TVSS.
The TVSS components shall be connected to the panel
board bus bar in a way which is recommended by the
manufacturer.
The TVSS shall be included and mounted within the panel
board by the manufacturer of the panel board.
The TVSS shall be of the same manufacturer as the panel
board.
The complete panel board including the TVSS shall be
CSA and ULC listed.
.3
Retrofit Installation (externally mounted suppressor).The
maximum conductor lead length between breaker and suppressor
shall not exceed 360 mm (14 inches). Comply with the
manufacturer’s recommended installation and wiring practices.
.4
Locate suppressor on load side of main disconnect device, as
close as possible to the phase conductors and ground/neutral bar.
.5
Provide a 30-amp disconnect. The disconnect shall be directly
integrated to the suppressor and assembly bus using bolted bus
bar connections.
.6
The TVSS shall be integral to switchgear, switchboard, MCC and
Bus Plug as factory standardized design.
.7
All monitoring diagnostics features shall be visible from the front of
the equipment.
.1
All equipment enclosures shall conform to the appropriate NEMA
designation as set out below. Provide enclosures suitable for
locations as indicated on the Drawings and as described below:
.1
NEMA 1 enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a
degree of protection to personnel against access to and
contact with hazardous parts and to provide a degree of
protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt).
.2
NEMA 3R rainproof enclosures intended for outdoor use
primarily to provide protection against rain, sleet and
damage from external ice formation.
.3
NEMA 12 dust-tight enclosures intended for indoor use
primarily to provide protection against circulating dust,
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. (Panelboards
Only).
Enclosures
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
DATE: April 2012
.4
Section 16289
2006-08-30
Page 6 of 6
NEMA 4 watertight stainless steel intended for indoor or
outdoor use primarily to provide protection against
windblown dust and rain, splashing rain, hose-directed
water, and damage from external ice formation. (Side
Mounted Units Only)
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
Factory Testing
.1
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under
this Section. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the
latest version of the applicable NEMA and CSA standards.
.1
The Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Drawings.
.1
The manufacturer shall provide a warranty of a minimum of 24
months commencing on the date of the Total Performance of the
Work against any TVSS part failure when installed in compliance
with manufacturer’s written instructions and Ontario Electrical
Safety Code.
Installation
Warranty
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 kV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
Page 1 of 6
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
Intent of Section
.1
This Section outlines the requirement to supply and install a new
cable bus feeder from connecting incoming hydro to the main
switchgear of existing transformers T1 and T2 as indicated in the
Contract Drawings, to allow rearrangement of incoming hydro
feeders such that both the feeders are independently connected
to the transformers and existing throat is removed.
.1
This Section describes technical requirements to provide safe,
orderly, and secure installation. The Contractor is responsible for
submitting their own detailed arrangement for installation of the
system as part of the Contract.
.2
The substation will continue normal operations and supply power
to allow for uninterrupted operation of the Leslie Sewage
Pumping Station during upgrade Work.
.3
The Contractor shall make changes shall be made to the existing
arrangement, the throat connection to existing load break switch
shall be removed and new metering unit installed in coordination
with the power utility, PowerStream Inc.
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.2
Section 16016 – Staging and Transition
.3
Section 16020 – Demolition of Electrical Systems
.4
Section 16031 - Inspection and Testing
.1
The Contractor shall arrange for installation of a temporary
arrangement to keep the plant running during the construction
work for the changes. The Region does not have any intention to
keep the temporary equipment, or temporary cabling. Remove the
temporary system installation after the new arrangement is in
place and successfully in operation for 14 Days.
.2
Supply and install temporary load break disconnect switch, fuses,
poles, grounding system, cabling, splices, and all ancillaries
required to provide a reliable, metered power supply to the
existing facility during construction period. Submit details of the
proposed arrangement for temporary power system installation to
the Region and PowerStream Inc. for approval. Refer to Contract
Drawings, specifically E08 and E09 for minimum requirements of
the temporary service.
Purpose and Function
Related Sections
Scope
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 KV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
Page 2 of 6
DATE: April 2012
1.5
1.6
.3
Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment, and services
specified, indicated, or requested to reconfigure the incoming
feeders as required and indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.4
Provide a copy of the factory test for the review and approval of
the Consultant.
.5
Submit a copy of the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)Site
inspection and approval prior to energization.
.6
The Contractor shall perform a short circuit and protection
coordination study on the proposed temporary installation, and
submit for approval by PowerStream Inc. and the Consultant.
.7
Restore all affected areas after removal of temporary system.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Item P.5 - 27.6 kV Switchgear Modifications as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The Contractor shall submit copies of the same set of shop
drawings directly to PowerStream Inc and to the Consultant for
their respective review. Provide copies of PowerStream Inc.’s
comments to the Consultant immediately after they have been
received. The following drawings shall be submitted by the
Contractor for review and approval by PowerStream Inc. and the
Consultant before installation of the temporary arrangements on
site:
.1
Temporary Substation Single Line Diagram
.2
Overall single line diagram showing the 27.6 kV circuits
including the incoming PowerStream Inc. feeders and the
4.16 kV busses. The drawing will show the rating of the
equipment and connection to protective and metering
devices where applicable.
.3
Overall Physical Layout of the assembly including:
1.
Existing transformers and 27.6 kV junction boxes,
27.6 kV cable routing from the utility feeders in
maintenance hole to the fused disconnect switch, to
the Power Stream metering pack, to the
transformer, details of incoming and outgoing
feeder terminations and connections.
.4
Installation Details
1.
Interconnection of the incoming cables from
manhole to the fused disconnect switch.
2.
Interconnection of the Power Stream metering
pack.
3.
Interconnection to the transformer 27.6 kV
terminals.
Measurement and Payment
Shop Drawings Submittal
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 KV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
Page 3 of 6
DATE: April 2012
4.
5.
6.
1.7
1.8
Equipment Maintenance
.1
The Contractor will ensure that the equipment operates as
intended by the Contract and without interruption for the duration
of the construction period.
.2
During the period where the facility is operating on the temporary
system in the event of loss of one PowerStream Inc. feeder or
other equipment failure (e.g.. transformer, cable), the Contractor
is responsible for transferring the electrical supply to the alternate
PowerStream Inc. feeder or connecting and energizing alternate
equipment.
.3
The Contractor will perform all troubleshooting, maintenance
and/or repair activities and will bear any and all costs associated
with maintenance and repair of the temporary equipment. Repairs
required to return the Plant to service shall continue to minimize
outage duration.
.4
Where the cause of the failure may be attributed to the acts
beyond the Contractor’s control or responsibility, the Contractor
will return the Plant to service and submit copies of all records
indicating time and material costs to the Consultant.
.1
The Region must have advance notice, and be present for all
opening and closing of circuit breakers, switches, etc.
.2
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may de-energize
equipment where continued energization may endanger
personnel or property. The Contractor shall inform the Consultant
and the Region immediately after any equipment has been deenergized under such conditions.
.1
Install and commission the new PowerStream Inc. metering pack
at new location as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Equipment Operation
PART 2.
2.1
Installation of temporary devices during different
stages of construction.
Provide correspondence from PowerStream Inc.
advising actual Short Circuit MVA values and
protective device settings. Compare calculated
short circuit levels to equipment ratings in tabular
form. Provide recommended settings for all
proposed and existing protective devices in tabular
and graphical format.
Short Circuit and Protection Coordination Study
confirming arc flash levels and relay settings.
PRODUCTS
Power Stream Metering Pack
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 KV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
Page 4 of 6
DATE: April 2012
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
.2
Coordinate with PowerStream Inc. as required to maintain
metered service to their satisfaction.
.1
Supply install and terminate temporary 27.6 kV Copper crosslinked polyethylene (XLPE) cables for supply of 27.6 kV power
cable from manhole to the hydro pole for power availability during
removal of the throat arrangement. The Contractor shall secure
cables and supply strain relief connectors.
.2
Supply and install temporary bare magneto hydro dynamic (MHD)
conductors for 27.6 kV service. All Contractor supplied cables
connected to the transformer shall meet the requirements of
OESC Rule 26-258.
.1
Utilize hot shrink or cold shrink terminations approved by the
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA).
.1
The Contractor shall ensure the continuity and integrity of the
existing grounding system at all times.
.2
Provide temporary grounding system (minimum 4-19 mm x
3000 mm ground rods each buried 300 mm underground,
connected via 4/0 bare copper conductor), in accordance with
OESC Rule 36-302 1(a) and ESA Bulletin 36-10-11.
.3
Provide a ground mat for the operation of the disconnect switch on
the temporary hydro pole.
.4
Interconnect the temporary grounding to all temporary installations
and the existing grounding system via 2-#4/0 copper grounding
conductors.
HV Cabling
Termination Points
Grounding System
Neutral Ground Resistor (NGR)
.1
Supply and install a temporary 80Ω (3000 A, 10 sec) NGR if called
for by the protection study for the transition equipment.
.2
Connect NGR to new ground.
.1
Verify if the protection settings are good for the transition
switchgear, if not modify the settings.
.2
Modify existing protection to prevent damage to overhead lines,
transformer, secondary cabling, etc.
.3
Coordinate with PowerStream Inc. and obtain all necessary
authorizations from PowerStream Inc.
Protection Coordination
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 KV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
Page 5 of 6
DATE: April 2012
2.7
3.2
3.3
Commission and demonstrate to the satisfaction of PowerStream
Inc. the Consultant and the Region.
.1
Supply and install continuous 2.4 m high plywood hoarding c/w
hinged man door around manholes and manholes/work areas in
the transformer yard.
.1
Review different options for completion of construction Work and
layout of the temporary equipment at the Site as required. Provide
details of the proposed location and layout based on the
construction Site set-up, final point of connection to utility feeders,
etc.
.2
Set and secure the temporary cable trays on the agreed upon
location.
.3
Make field connections in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and obtain approval from the ESA.
.4
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.5
The Contractor acknowledges that it has verified and included all
costs associated with a construction sequence that allows
installation of the proposed temporary equipment at a time
acceptable to the Consultant. The Contractor shall not be entitled
to claim any increase in Contract Time or in Contract Price as a
result of the time proposed by the Consultant for the installation of
the proposed temporary equipment.
.1
Make field connections in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2
Make the grounding connections.
.3
Check all existing connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.1
Record existing phase rotation and sequence of each incoming
and outgoing feeder before the start of construction. Check
phase rotation and phase sequence of each incoming and
outgoing feeder before re-energization.
Plywood Hoarding
PART 3.
3.1
.4
EXECUTION
General
Installation
Inspection and Testing
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16330
27.6 KV SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS
DATE: April 2012
3.4
Page 6 of 6
.2
All testing shall be performed in accordance with the NETA
Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical
Power Equipment and Systems 2009 and in accordance with
these specifications.
.3
Testing shall confirm conformance of the equipment to the
requirements of Section 16031 - Inspection and Testing and shall
confirm the proper functioning of the equipment.
.4
The equipment shall be functionally tested as far as practicable in
the Contractor’s plant and, again, in the field to test the operation
of all circuits and devices and to optimize performance.
.5
Conduct a coordination test to confirm fuse sizes and protection
settings. .
.6
Furnish a Test Report certifying successful completion of the
above tests, and any other test.
.7
Conduct a night time thermographic survey (to negate solar gain)
of the current carrying parts after the switchgear has been placed
in service. Provide three copies of all areas surveyed including
photographs and temperature. Correct any hot spots. Reissue
report after hot spots have been corrected.
.1
The Contractor is responsible for the full functionality of the
temporary installation, including ensuring that critical spare parts
are available.
.2
The temporary installation must be fully commissioned and
demonstrated to be reliable, to the full satisfaction of the Region
and the Consultant, prior to transferring loads.
.3
The Contractor shall have all the special tools required for
commissioning and servicing of the equipment (these will remain
the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Site
when the temporary equipment is removed from the Site).
Maintenance and Operation
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
Section 16335
Page 1 of 8
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
Intent of Section
.1
This Section outlines the requirement to supply and install
temporary switchgear in order to allow replacement of the existing
switchgear and some parts of the substation with new in the same
location.
.1
This Section is not intended to describe all details that may be
required to affect the safe, orderly, and secure supply and
installation of a temporary facility. The Contractor is responsible
for submitting their own detailed arrangement for installation of the
temporary system as part of the Contract
.2
The transition switchgear and transition cabling will be used to
supply power to allow for uninterrupted pumping station operation
during replacement of the existing switchgear with new
switchgear. The temporary switchgear will be placed on the
temporary foundation, which is constructed for this purpose and
removed later when the temporary switchgear is removed.
.3
The temporary equipment and cabling shall be CSA certified,
conform to all requirements of Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)
and electrical fault protections are set in coordination with the
existing system.
.1
The Contractor shall arrange for the 4.16 kV Transition
switchgear, transformer, diesel generator, transfer switch, cabling,
control panel, monitoring system on the Region’s SCADA system.
Provide as required or as shown in the Contract Drawings
temporary 600V MCC, 600V-120/208V transformer and 120/208V
panel board, cabling, disconnects, lighting etc. The Region does
not have any intention to keep the transition or temporary
equipment on completion of the Contract.
.2
Supply and install temporary switchgear, MCC, transformer,
lighting panel, cabling, splices, junction boxes, and all ancillaries
required to provide a reliable power supply to the existing facility
during the construction period. Submit details of the proposed
arrangement for temporary power system installation to the
Region and for approval. Refer to the single line Drawing for
minimum requirements of the temporary equipment.
.3
Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services
specified, indicated or requested to install the temporary equipment
as required and indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Purpose and Function
Scope
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
1.4
1.5
Section 16335
Page 2 of 8
.4
Provide a copy of the factory test for the review and approval of the
Consultant
.5
Submit a copy of the ESA Site inspection and approval prior to
energization.
.6
The Contractor shall perform a short circuit and protection
coordination study on the proposed temporary switchgear
installation, and submit it to and for the approval of PowerStream
Inc. and the Consultant
.7
Temporary equipment shall be removed from the Site by the
Contractor after completion of Site Acceptance Testing of
permanent equipment.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16335 – Temporary and Transition Electrical
Equipment as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings directly to and ESA for
their review and comment in parallel with submission to the
Consultant. Provide copies of ESA comments to the Consultant.
The following drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for
review by and approval obtained from PowerStream Inc. and the
Consultant before shipment of the temporary equipment to the
Site:
.1
Switchgear and standby generator single line diagram.
.2
Equipment elevation, layout and overall dimension.
.3
Overall single line diagram showing the HV circuits
including the incoming feeders and the LV busses. The
drawing will show the rating of the equipment and
connection to protective and metering devices where
applicable.
.4
Overall Physical Layout of the switchgear assembly
including:
1.
Plan diagram in fully assembled condition including
existing transformers and HV junction boxes, HV
cable routing from the utility feeders to switchgear
and from the switchgear to the transformer, details
of incoming and outgoing feeders terminations and
connections.
.5
Lighting panel schedules.
.6
Transformer wiring diagram and overall dimension.
.7
Installation Details
1.
Interconnection of the incoming cables from entry
point of the cables to switchgear.
Interconnection of the cable outgoing cable from
2.
switchgear to transformer HV.
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 16335
Page 3 of 8
Interconnection of cable from transformer LV to
indoor switchgear.
Installation of temporary devices during different
stages of construction.
Provide information advising actual Short Circuit
MVA values and protective device settings.
Compare calculated short circuit levels to
equipment ratings in tabular form. Provide arc flash
labels and recommended settings for all proposed
and existing protective devices in tabular and
graphical format.
Short Circuit, Protection Coordination Study and
Arc Flash Study.
Equipment Maintenance
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment operates as
intended by the Contract and without interruption for the entire
construction period.
.2
During the period where the pumping station is operating on the
temporary switchgear, in the event of loss of one feeder or other
equipment failure (e.g. transformer, cable), the Contractor is
responsible for transferring the electrical supply to the alternate
feeder or connecting and energizing alternate equipment. This
transfer must be performed within six (6) hours from the time that
the Contractor is informed of the loss of power by the Region.
.3
The Contractor will perform all troubleshooting, maintenance
and/or repair activities and will be responsible for any and all costs
associated with maintenance and repair of the temporary
equipment. Repairs required to return the pumping station to
service shall continue around the clock to minimize outage
duration.
.1
The Region must be notified a minimum of 24 hours in advance
of, and be present for all opening and closing of circuit breakers,
switches, etc.
.2
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may de-energize
equipment where continued energization may endanger personnel
or property. The Contractor shall inform the Consultant and the
Region immediately after any equipment has been de-energized
under such condition.
Equipment Operation
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
Operation and Maintenance data is for use by the Contractor.
However, provide a duplicate copy to the Region, which will be
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
Section 16335
Page 4 of 8
handed back to Contractor after the equipment is removed from
Site. Copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include:
.1
Complete parts list
.2
Detailed trouble shooting procedures and fault correction
schedules
.3
Data for each type and style of equipment
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Switchgear-General Requirements
.1
All switchgear shall be CSA approved
.2
The switchgear and other appurtenances shall be provided in a
walk in type weather proof, ventilated outdoor enclosure.
.3
The switchgear shall meet PowerStream Inc. and ESA
requirements.
.4
The complete temporary switchgear installation including access,
cable installation, clearances, etc. shall be approved by
PowerStream Inc.. All costs resulting from this requirement are to
be paid by the Contractor.
.5
The switchgear shall be suitable for outdoor operation, 3 phase, 4
wire, 60 Hz, 5 kV for connection to 4.16 kV system.
.6
Loadbreak switches shall be 5 kV design voltage operating at
4.16kV. Impulse levels shall be 150 kV minimum and a minimum
short circuit level of 350 MVA. Switches shall be 3 pole group
operated in a metal enclosed structure and designed for close
coupling to existing transformers.
.7
If applicable a sign stating “CAUTION, SWITCH BLADES LIVE”
shall be installed on all doors and screens where knife blades or
moving contacts may be live when the device is in the open
position.
Ratings – Temporary Switchgear
.1
The switchgear shall be supplied with the following minimum
ratings:
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
Rated maximum voltage, kV
Type
Interrupting device
Nominal operating voltage, kV
Number of phases
Number of wires
Rated frequency, Hz
Rated continuous current main bus, A
Rated short circuit level, MVA
Rated short circuit current at rated RMS voltage,
kA
Short time withstand current (busbars, load break
switches, HV fuse and all primary equipment, kA
(3 sec)
Normal voltage variation, %
System grounding
Basic Insulation Level, kV
Power Frequency Level, kV
Load interrupting (for load break switches), A
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Section 16335
Page 5 of 8
8 kV
Metal-enclosed
5 kV fuse
4.16
3
4
60
1200
800
29 Symmetrical
29
-15%, +10%
Grounded
150
60
600
HV Cabling
.1
Refer to the construction Drawings for HV cable size. Power
Stream Inc. is to be advised and scheduled to participate in the
changeover.
.2
This Contractor shall supply cables or cable busses to connect the
existing transformer and shall meet the requirements of OESC
Rule 26-258.
.1
MCC shall be CSA approved
.2
The MCC shall meet ESA requirements.
.3
The MCC shall be rated at 600 V, 300 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz.
It can be used type from another job site.
.1
Transformer shall be CSA approved and meet ESA requirements.
.2
The transformer shall be dry type, 600-120/208, 45 KVA. It can be
used type from another site.
.1
Lighting panel shall be CSA approved and meet ESA
requirements.
.2
The lighting panel shall be rated at 120/208V, 200A, 3 phase, 4
wire, 42 circuiting 60 Hz. It can be used type from another site.
MCC
Transformer
Lighting Panel
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
2.7
2.8
2.9
Section 16335
Page 6 of 8
LV Cabling
.1
Refer to the construction drawings for LV cable size. The 4.16 kV
cables shall remain in service until the new electrical switchgear
and new generators are tested by conducting an onload test for 4
hours, commissioned and certified by the Consultant as being
operationally reliable.
.1
Utilize cold shrink terminations approved by the ESA,
PowerStream Inc. and Hydro One Networks Inc.
.1
Provide a ground bus with cable lugs at switchgear for connection
of the switchgear and HV cable shielding to the temporary
grounding system.
.2
Bond temporary service to existing grounding system and upgrade
as necessary to have ESA approvals (minimum 4-19 mm x 3000
mm ground rods each buried 300 mm underground, connected via
4/0 bare copper conductor), in accordance with OESC Rule 36302 1(a) and ESA Bulletin 36-10-11.
.1
Review different options for layout of the temporary switchgear,
transformer and lighting panel at the Site and provide details of
the proposed location and layout based on the construction Site
set-up, final point of connection to utility feeders, etc.
.2
Set and secure the temporary switchgear, transformer and lighting
panel at the locations shown in the Contract Drawings.
.3
Make field connections in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and as approved by PowerStream Inc. and the
ESA.
.4
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.5
Apply device settings and verify all equipment ratings as approved
in the Short Circuit and Protective Coordination study.
.6
Refer to Section 16016 – Staging and Transition.
.7
The Contractor acknowledges that has verified and included all
costs associated with a construction sequence that allows
installation of the proposed switchgear at a time acceptable to the
Consultant. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any
increase in Contract Time or in Contract Price as a result of the
Termination Points
Grounding System
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
General
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
Section 16335
Page 7 of 8
time proposed by the Consultant for the installation of the
proposed temporary switchgear.
3.2
3.3
Installation
.1
Obtain the services of an inspection agency approved by the
Consultant to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of
the equipment specified under this Section. The Contractor shall
ensure that the Inspection Agency will provide technical direction
and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the
equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the
assembly and components contained therein.
.2
Set and secure switchgear assembly in place on channel base,
rigid, plumb, and square.
.3
Make field connections in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.4
Make the grounding connections to an acceptable grounding grid.
.5
Check all existing connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.1
Refer to Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing for additional
inspections and tests required under this Contract.
.2
Record existing phase rotation and sequence of each incoming
and outgoing feeder before the start of construction. Check phase
rotation and phase sequence of each incoming and outgoing
feeder before re-energization.
.3
All equipment shall be subject to inspection and testing by, and at
the expense, of the Contractor. All testing, including shop tests
and field tests, shall be performed in accordance with the NETA
Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical
Power Equipment and Systems 2009 and in accordance with
these specifications.
.4
Testing shall verify conformance of the equipment to the Contract
Documents and shall confirm the proper functioning of the
equipment.
.5
The equipment shall be functionally tested as far as practicable in
the Contractor’s plant and, again, in the field to test the operation
of all circuits and devices and in order to optimise performance.
.6
Check fuse sizes.
.7
Place switchgear in service and check ammeter, and voltmeter
readings to ensure proper functioning of the system.
.8
Furnish a test report certifying completion of the above tests, and
any other test.
Inspection and Testing
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
TEMPORARY & TRANSITION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
DATE: April 2012
3.4
Section 16335
Page 8 of 8
.9
Conduct a thermographic survey of the current carrying parts after
the switchgear has been placed in service. Provide three copies of
all areas surveyed including photographs and temperature.
Correct any hot spots. Reissue report after hot spots have been
corrected.
.1
The Contractor is responsible for the full functionality of the
temporary equipment, including ensuring that critical spare parts
are available.
.2
The temporary equipment must be fully commissioned and
demonstrated to be reliable, to the full satisfaction of the Region
and the Consultant, prior to transferring loads.
.3
The Contractor is to have all the special tools required for
commissioning and servicing of the equipment (these will remain
the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Site
when the temporary equipment is removed from the Site).
Maintenance and Operation
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
STATION BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 1 of 7
DATE: April 2012
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
General
.1
Refer to the Contract Documents in order to determine their effect
upon the Work of this Section.
.2
Refer to Section 16010 - General Electrical Requirements.
.3
Coordinate with switchgear manufacturers to ensure adequate
and complete DC supply for the automatic control of breakers in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Documents.
.1
The equipment to be designed and manufactured shall comply
with the latest edition of the following statutes, codes and
standards, and all amendments thereto:
.1
CSA Canadian Standards Association
1.
CSA C22.2 No. 223-M91 CAN/CSA UPD 2: Power
Supplies with Extra-Low Voltage Class 2 Outputs
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
.2
1.
IEEE Standard 323TM-2003
.3
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1.
NEMA Standard PES & PET
.4
OESC Ontario Electrical Safety Code 23rd Edition, 2002
.2
The 125 V DC Charger System shall be in accordance with
standard C22.2 No. 107.
.3
The 125 V DC battery bank shall be sized in accordance with
IEEE 1115-2000.
.4
The 125 V DC battery bank shall be installed and tested in
accordance with IEEE 1106-1995.
.5
The battery bank shall comply with the International Electrical
Commission International Standard IEC 623.
.6
All dimensions and design data shall be in SI (metric) units.
.1
Supply and install a station battery c/w charger for the operation of
the 27.6 kV substation and the 4.16 kV switchgear.
.2
Provide one 125 V DC station battery able to operate as described
in “System Operating Narrative” complete with the following:
.1
One charger.
.2
One battery bank.
.3
Incoming and outgoing circuit breakers.
.4
125 V DC Distribution Panel.
.5
Factory testing.
.6
Manufacturers agent installation commissioning.
Codes and Standards
Scope
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 2 of 7
DATE: April 2012
1.4
1.5
.3
All equipment furnished shall be standard catalogue Products of
the manufacturer and rated for switchgear equipment.
.4
All active electronic devices shall be solid state and rated for
maximum reliability.
.1
The 125V DC charger system shall operate as follows:
1.
Continuous 125V DC will supply an external DC
distribution panel board.
2.
Charger system will be supplied from a separate
600 VAC, three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz supply.
3.
Charger will normally supply DC power to the
batteries, and both charger and batteries will
normally supply the load.
4.
Design the system so that the charger or battery
bank can be taken out of service for maintenance
or repair while the remainder of the system
continues to provide DC output.
5.
The 125 V DC Charger system will be on-line
continuously. The loads will be fed from the
batteries and chargers continuously. In the event
that the input voltage goes into a reduced voltage
operation, called “brown out”, the 125 V DC
Charger output will be supplied or compensated by
the batteries. The output of the 125 V DC Charger
system will be maintained regardless of the input
voltage quality and level.
6.
Any failure in any of the systems will sound an
audible alarm, as well as open a normally closed
dry contact.
The DC battery charger must be able to supply the
7.
complete full load requirements of the DC system.
This includes multiple switchgear breaker
operations.
.2
Load Profile:
.1
The switchgear base load is 1200 VA consisting of
protective relays and control circuits.
.2
The battery also supplies:
1.
The trip and close coils of eight (8) 27.6 kV circuit
breakers and nine (9) 4.16 kV circuit breakers.
2.
The spring charge circuit, trip circuits of eight (8)
27.6 kV circuit breakers and nine (9) 4.16 kV circuit
breakers.
.1
DC Charger System footprint shall not exceed dimensions shown
on the Contract Drawings.
System Operating Narrative
Dimensional Constraints
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 3 of 7
DATE: April 2012
1.6
1.7
Measurement and Payment
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16339 – Battery and Charger System as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Comply with all submittals requirements as specified under
Section 01300 – Submittals.
.2
Submit the following shop drawings, information and data:
.1
Detail specific electrical performance characteristics for the
charger and batteries.
.2
Detail layout, enclosure, cooling requirements and similar
items.
.3
Dimensional outline and equipment arrangement drawings
including clearance requirements, foundation details and
weights.
.4
Electrical schematics, wiring and interconnection drawings.
.5
Provide battery sizing calculations (capacity calculations)
including all assumptions.
.6
General instructions including: start-up and test
procedures, troubleshooting guide, safety notes and
maintenance procedures.
Submittals
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Battery System Nominal Requirements
.1
Battery system shall be capable of the following duty cycle (upon
loss of V AC input voltage):
.1
Base load for the first 40 minutes.
.2
Twelve (12) breaker close and open operations (in
sequence) plus base load during the next ten (10) minutes.
Coordinate with circuit breaker suppliers for ampere
requirements for individual breaker spring charge operation
and for breaker open/close signal.
.3
Base load for the next six hours and forty minutes (400
minutes).
.4
Thirteen breaker close and open operations (in sequence)
plus base load during the next ten (10) minutes.
.5
Base load for the remaining time twenty (20) minutes.
.2
Nominal battery voltage, full charge 125 VDC.
.3
Capable of being recharged in a period of 8 hours to a minimum of
95 percent full charge after supplying rated load for period
specified, with no harmful effects on battery, including leaking or
foaming of electrolyte.
.1
Nickel-Cadmium, Flooded Cell.
Battery Type
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 4 of 7
DATE: April 2012
2.3
Battery Charger
.1
A 125 volt nominal SCR type battery charger to be provided to
operate from a 600 VAC, three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz supply.
Charger to have sufficient capacity to recharge the fully
discharged batteries in 8 hours to 95 percent charged while
simultaneously feeding the continuous loads.
.2
Charger to have the following characteristics:
.1
Regulation: ±1 percent voltage from 0 to 100 percent load
.2
±10 percent input voltage variation
.3
±5 percent frequency variation
.4
Ripple Voltage: 2 percent (RMS)
.5
AC input Breaker, 600 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire, size to suit
.6
Analogue type DC voltmeter, 2 percent accuracy, 75 mm
.7
Analogue type AC Ammeter, 2 percent accuracy, 75 mm
.8
AC and DC surge suppression
.9
Reverse battery protection (blocking diodes)
.10
Automatic current limiting adjustable from 80 percent to
120 percent of normal voltage rating
.11
Convection cooled
.12
Short circuit proof
.13
LEDs to indicate:
1.
AC “ON”
2.
FLOAT “ON”
3.
EQUALIZE “ON”
.14
Charger to normally operate in the float mode and to have
a push-button on the control panel to initiate a timed
equalize charge. The charger to automatically return to the
float mode at the end of the timed out period.
.15
Both the float and equalize voltages to be adjustable.
.16
The float voltage to be adjustable from 110 to 140 volts
DC.
.17
The equalize voltage to be adjustable from 120 to 154
volts DC.
.18
Complete input/output isolation to be provided between the
AC input and DC output.
.19
Charger to be equipped with the following local alarms:
1.
Low DC voltage alarm
2.
High DC voltage alarm
3.
AC failure alarm
4.
Charger failure alarm
5.
Positive or negative DC ground detection alarm
.20
Each of the alarms mentioned in subsection 2.3.2.19 to
have a RED LED on the charger control panel.
.21
Each of the alarms mentioned in subsection 2.3.2.19 to
have two dry contacts indicating status of each alarm.
.22
The charger shall have a single dry contact, normally open,
which will close in the event that any of any of the alarm
conditions listed above.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 5 of 7
DATE: April 2012
.23
.24
2.4
The charger system to be equipped with following:
1.
DC output breaker panel: as shown on Drawings.
2.
Audible alarm when any mode light indicates
trouble. Silence pushbutton not to extinguish
trouble light.
3.
A common LED test/reset switch and two common
Form “C” alarms contacts to also be provided and
tied to SCADA for “AC Failure” and “Battery
Charger Failure” alarm monitoring (in accordance
with the existing PCS Drawings).
The noise generated by the charger, under all operational
conditions shall be less than 65 DBA measured 1 m from
any surface of the cabinet.
System Enclosures
.1
Provide a free standing and self-supporting formed metal
enclosure to be supplied to house the charger and the battery
bank. The enclosure dimensions not to exceed those indicated on
the Contract Drawings.
.2
Enclosure to be NEMA 12, fully metal enclosed type with dead
front construction. Ventilation for battery charger and battery bank
cabinet to be through slotted plates on the front or sides of the
cabinet. The cabinet shall have adequate strength to withstand
stresses imposed by shipping, handling, installation and operation.
.3
Enclosure shall be constructed of steel frames and panels.
Aluminium shall not be acceptable. The Contractor shall provide
an engineered stamped/drawing for the frame supporting the
battery bank (by an engineer licensed to practice in the Province
of Ontario).
.4
One (or two) door(s) shall be provided for the cabinet. Hinges
shall be of the concealed type. Suitable cam type closures shall
be provided to hold the door(s) securely closed. Door(s) shall be
lockable.
.5
The equipment shall be designed for front access only.
.6
The batteries shall be mounted on step type shelves for visual
inspection of all electrolyte levels.
.7
Incoming and outgoing connections shall be through knockouts on
the top or sides of the cabinets.
.8
The cabinets shall be pressure cleaned with a phosphate solution
and finished with one coat of ANSI 61 light grey epoxy enamel
applied by an electrostatic process.
.9
The cabinets shall have provision for handling by a forklift, pallet
truck or sling.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
Page 6 of 7
DATE: April 2012
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Quality Assurance
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer will have a
quality assurance program, implemented to maintain Product
quality. At a minimum, the Contractor shall ensure that an
inspection program which complies with the CSA Z299.4 level to
be offered by the manufacturer.
.1
Complete DC system must carry a parts and labour warranty for
the Warranty Period.
.2
Battery bank to be warranted for 10 years (3 years full and 7 year
pro-rata). The 10-year warranty to commence from the date of
Total Performance of the Work.
.1
DC system must be adequately prepared for shipment to protect it
against damage during normal road transportation, handling and
indoor storage.
.2
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer will indicate any
special requirements for storage of the equipment for a prolonged
period of time at the site, should it be necessary.
.1
A suitable metal nameplate to be secured to the charger via
screws. At a minimum it is to include:
.1
Manufacturer’s name
.2
Model number
.3
Input voltage
.4
Number of phases
.5
Input frequency
.6
Input current
.7
Output current
.8
Output voltage
.2
A suitable metal nameplate to be secured to the battery bank via
screws. At a minimum it is to include:
.1
Manufacturer’s name
.2
Model number
.3
Number of Cells
.4
Cell Voltage
.5
Battery Capacity (Ah)
.6
Battery Voltage
.1
Provide four control fuses.
Warranty
Packaging and Storage
Labelling
Spare Parts and Special Tools
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16339
BATTERY AND CHARGER SYSTEM
DATE: April 2012
Page 7 of 7
2.10 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
.1
Comply with Specification Section 01430 – Operation and
Maintenance Data.
.1
Saft S.A.
.2
Approved equal.
.1
Install charger and batteries in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
.2
Provide a dry contact “General Alarm” signal to SCADA for alarm
of a failure of either Charger
.1
The following requirements are in addition to the requirements
listed in Division 1 – General Requirements.
.1
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer will
perform routine factory tests and inspections on each unit.
The Consultant shall witness these tests.
.2
.3
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer will
provide the Consultant with a minimum of 14 Days notice
for tests.
.4
All technical assistance and test equipment required to
perform these tests to be furnished by the manufacturer.
All test instruments must be calibrated and traceable to
recognized standards.
.5
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer’s quality
assurance department will have detailed test procedures
available for the Consultant to review.
.6
The test and inspection to cover the following:
1.
A quantitative check of all features and items
specified in the purchase order.
2.
Visual inspection of workmanship and finish.
3.
Measurement of dimensions.
4.
Dielectric strength test.
5.
Operational and sequence test.
6.
A functional test to verify electrical performance
.7
Three (3) sets of test certificates shall be submitted to the
Consultant for review and approval before shipment to the
Site.
2.11 Approved Manufacturers
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Installation
Test and Inspection
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 1 of 19
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
General Conditions
.1
Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications, Drawings and the
Contract Documents to determine their effect upon the Work of
this Section.
.2
Refer to Section 16010 – General Electrical Requirements for
general electrical requirements related to this Work.
.1
Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services
required to install the equipment specified herein.
.2
Commission the equipment specified herein and demonstrate, to
the satisfaction of the Region and the Consultant, that the
equipment functions as intended in the design and that all
connections to control and ancillary equipment are functioning as
intended in the design.
.1
Section 16016 – Staging and Transition
.1
Materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes
and standards of the Province of Ontario.
.2
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes, codes and
standards, and all amendments thereto.
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
1.
CSA C22.2 No. 31
2.
CSA C22.2 – 14, “Industrial Control Equipment”
3.
CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code, Part I
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
ANSI C37.20
2.
ANSI C37.09
3.
ANSI C 57.13 Instrument Transformers
.3
Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 2002 and supplements
.4
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1.
NEMA SG-4
2.
NEMA SG-5
.5
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada
(EEMAC)
1.
EEMAC G8.2
2.
EEMAC Standard ICS2-322
Scope
Related Sections
Codes and Standards
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 2 of 19
DATE: April 2012
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Coordination and Constraints
.1
The Contractor must coordinate the medium voltage switchgear
and medium voltage MCCs to minimize the overall footprint of the
switchgear. The following items are key constraints and
coordination issues:
.1
Overall switchgear and related hardware/ accessories
footprint is not to exceed dimensions shown on the
Contract Drawings, however the individual component
sizes may vary.
.2
Contractor shall provide a metal clad vacuum type or gas
insulated vacuum circuit breaker provided it meets the
space restriction and fits in the electrical room and
otherwise complies with the Specifications.
.3
Bus PT’s are included as an integral component of the
main switchgear. Bus PT’s shall be fused.
.1
Manufacturer of the Equipment: The manufacturer of the
equipment must have a satisfactory track record for the proposed
equipment as specified in this Contract. The track record must be
for equipment of similar size and voltage (2400 V to 4160 V),
installed and operated within Canada for a minimum of five years
over the last 5 years..
.1
In the event of any contradictions between this Specification and
the local electrical codes, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
.1
Deviations from this Specification may occur due to special design
conditions. Such deviations may be permissible if they are equal
to or better than the specified requirements, and are approved by
the Consultant.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16345 – 4160 V Medium Voltage Switchgear
as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Submit shop drawings of medium voltage switchgear panels and
components in accordance with Sections 16010 – Electrical
General Requirements and Section 01300 - Submittals, showing
the following:
Track Record of Performance
Conflicting Requirements
Deviations from Specifications
Measurement and Payment
1.10 Submittals
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 3 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Outline dimensions and assembly details, foundation
requirements, weights
Dimensions of all openings and doors
Door hinge locations, maximum opening angles
Floor anchoring method, dimensioned foundation template
and proposed core-hole locations
Dimensioned position and size of busbars
Dimensioned cable entrance and exit locations
Dimensioned cable termination and support details
Dimensioned lifting details
Terminal block arrangements
Materials of construction and construction details
Bills of material
Control schematic and wiring diagrams
.2
Review Co-ordination Study as described in Section 16010 –
Electrical General Requirements. Submit protective device
characteristics data.
.3
Submit final record drawings to the Consultant at completion of
project. Include changes made during field installation and startup. Enclose one copy of final record wiring diagram in plastic
envelope and place in each compartment door pocket.
.4
Submit bound and indexed copies of operating and maintenance
manuals. Include the following:
.1
Complete parts list
.2
Spare parts list
.3
Installation, operation and maintenance instructions
.4
Detailed trouble-shooting procedures and fault correction
schedules
.5
Final record drawings
.6
Certified test results
.5
Submit test results. Refer to Section 16031 – Inspection and
Testing for details of additional inspections and tests.
.6
Refer to data sheets provided in subsection 3.4 for equipment
supply
.1
Provide manufacturer’s type test certificates, and in accordance
with the latest CSA, ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and EEMAC standards.
.2
Conduct equipment inspection and factory acceptance testing at
manufacturer’s plant.
.3
Advise the Consultant in writing, a minimum of ten Working Days
prior to carrying out tests.
.4
The Consultant reserves the right to observe all factory testing.
.5
Perform the following shop tests with the complete assembled
switchgear where practical:
.1
Standard production tests
1.11 Quality Assurance
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 4 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Demonstration of interchangeability for circuit breakers of
equal rating
Mechanical and electrical operation of circuit breakers,
interlocks, draw-out mechanisms, auxiliary devices,
manual devices
Functional tests on all components and circuits to confirm
conformance to all requirements outlined in this Contract.
Polarity and ratio tests on current and potential
transformers
Power and control circuit wiring continuity
Vacuum bottle integrity test
High voltage AC withstand test
Any additional tests customarily performed by the
manufacturer
.6
Test the switchgear as one complete assembly. Testing of
individual shipping sections only will not be accepted.
.7
Prior to shipment, submit to the Consultant four (4) copies of
certified final test results.
.1
Completely assemble the switchgear line-up (main-tie-main) in the
factory prior to factory acceptance testing.
.2
Perform only the minimum disassembly required to safely and
practically transport the equipment to Site and install equipment in
final location.
.1
Maintain switchgear assembly in upright position and keep doors
locked.
.2
Protect door-mounted devices from damage and dust. Block
moving parts to prevent damage from vibration.
.3
Store switchgear in warm, dry area prior to installation.
.1
4160 V, 60 Hz, 3 wire, delta-solidly grounded wye system.
.1
Design a failsafe breaker control and interlock system which
includes the following requirements:
.1
Design shall include a load management scheme, in
accordance with the Contract Drawings, which allows for
the switchgear to work in auto mode and, upon the failure
of any component, allows for the switchgear to operate in
manual mode.
1.12 Shop Assembly
1.13 Storage and Handling
PART 2.
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
Supply Characteristics
4160 V Switchgear
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 5 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
2.3
Direct hardwired safety interlocks to override manual
control commands including lockout 86 relay (refer to
Drawing E-02).
Automatic tripping of breaker due to downstream cable or
equipment fault conditions.
Manufactured Units
.1
Enclosure
.1
As described in subsection 1.5 - Coordination and
Constraints, equipment footprint shall not exceed
dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings.
.2
Switchgear assembly:
.1
Arc resistant metal-clad circuit breaker
cubicles and auxiliary equipment as shown
on the Drawings.
.2
Gas insulated vacuum breaker if the metal clad
breaker cannot adhere to the footprint shown.
.3
Assembly: made up of rigid, formed sheet steel, self
supporting, dead front enclosures, EEMAC type as
indicated in the Contract Documents, bolted together.
Aluminium framed enclosures are not acceptable.
.4
Floor channels: continuous, extending over the full length
of the assembly complete with all necessary fixing
hardware.
.5
Front access: 135 degree swing hinged doors with handle
opener and gaskets;
.6
Rear access: bolted panels with gaskets.
.7
Each vertical section shall contain not more than one high
voltage switching unit (single tier arrangement). The high
voltage switching unit shall be located in the lower half of
each vertical section. The upper half shall contain low
voltage metering and control equipment and wiring.
.8
Circuit breaker compartment: with a horizontal draw-out
circuit breaker, type as indicated in the Contract
Documents; circuit breaker racking and/or levering
mechanism, mechanical interlocks, stationary primary and
secondary disconnecting contacts and automatic safety
shutters. Provision shall be made for padlocking of the
shutter mechanism when the breaker element is removed.
Breaker rack in/out indication to be provided.
.9
Bus and feeder shutter actuators: operate independently
and lockable in the closed position (i.e. while the circuit
breaker is in the ‘test’ or ‘withdrawn’ position), but still in
the cell.
.10
The shutters must be provided with a latch to latch them
open. They must be self reset-able when the circuit
breaker is racked into the service position
.11
Busbar shutters shall be painted signal red and shall be
clearly and indelibly labelled "Busbars" in large white
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 6 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
letters. Circuit shutters shall be painted lemon colour and
shall be labelled "Danger live cables" in large red letters.
Circuit breaker guide rails: to ensure positive alignment
when racking the circuit breaker into position.
Access to the bus work, current transformers and power
conductor terminations: from the rear or bottom.
Breaker lifting device/truck and all accessories to be
provided for the withdrawal and removal of all breaker
elements from their respective cells at each site.
Gland plates: removable in each section for entry of power
and control cables. Furnish non-magnetic gland plates for
entry of single conductor power cables.
Provide viewing windows at rear of switchgear for
thermographic surveys.
Potential transformer enclosure: each set in a separate
compartment (i.e., two sets of bus PTs per switchgear).
Secondary circuits to open before the primary
1.
disconnecting contacts part (to prevent arcing);
2.
Provision to prevent personnel from coming in
contact with the potential transformer primary fuses
until after the primary disconnecting devices are
separated by a safe distance and automatically
grounded.
3.
Shutter mechanism to close off access to stubs.
4.
PT door to be lockable.
Circuit breaker positions: three definite and distinct
positions within the enclosure, as follows:
1.
The "Operating" (connected, service) position - with
the truck fully engaged inside the compartment and
primary and secondary contacts connected;
2.
The "Test" position - with the truck partially drawn
out, primary contacts disconnected, secondary
contacts connected but no live contacts exposed
(shutters closed); and
3.
The "Withdrawn" position - with the truck fully
withdrawn, primary and secondary contacts
disconnected and compartment fully and safely
accessible.
Clearly indicate each breaker position. Mechanical
interlocks to prevent moving the breaker to or from the
connected position with the circuit breaker closed. Dry
contact status in control cell indicating whether breaker is
in Operating Position or in Test Position or Racked out of
cell.
Hoisting: removable lifting hooks and/or angles, on each
shipping section.
Phase bus: high conductivity, hard drawn copper, fully
insulated.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 7 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.22
.23
.24
.25
.26
.27
.28
.2
Bus mounting insulators: track resistant co-ordinated
dielectric properties and mechanical strength to withstand
full thermal and mechanical stresses developed by
maximum available short circuit currents.
Bus joints, ends and connections: electrolytically silver
plated, fasten with a minimum of two bolts. Insulate with
preformed insulating boots, secured with non-conducting
screws. Make witness marks on all nut and bolt
assemblies.
Bus work maximum temperature rise: not to exceed 65
degrees Celsius over an ambient temperature of 40
degrees Celsius.
Insulation Class: 105 degrees Celsius
Ground bus: 6 mm x 50 mm minimum, extend through the
entire length of switchgear, securely fastened to the metal
work in each compartment. Furnish compression type,
solderless lugs for connecting the ground bus plant
grounding conductors at each end.
Circuit breaker draw-out mechanism: with a sliding ground
contact to connect to the ground bus. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts to the ground bus.
Ground balls and insulated boots as provided by A B
Chance Company shall be installed at all cable entry points
to facilitate easy grounding of equipment for maintenance
purposes. Two sets of 3 phase to ground, 3/0 grounding
cables to be supplied for each site, for use with supplied
ground balls.
Metal Clad Circuit Breakers
.1
Design: three pole arc resistant vacuum circuit breakers,
draw-out type, electrically operated, mechanically and
electrically trip-free, motor operated, stored energy closing
and rated as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.2
The actions of isolation from the power supply and
withdrawal of the circuit breaker shall be separate and
independent actions. Means shall be provided in the
equipment to lock and padlock the circuit breaker in the
‘operating’ or ‘test’ position
.3
Isolation (drawing the circuit breaker between operating,
test and withdrawn position) shall be achieved by
mechanical devices through the closed circuit breaker
compartment door. Isolation shall be achieved without the
need for tools or special attachments/devices which are
not integral to the switchgear other than a specific device
which represents an extension of the isolating mechanism
(i.e. a racking or winding handle).
.4
Operating voltage of circuit breaker operating mechanism
shall be of the 125 VDC motor wound spring type. It shall
be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit
breaker in either open or closed positions. In normal
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 8 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
operation, recharging of the operating springs shall
commence immediately and automatically upon completion
of the closing operation. Closure while a spring charging
operation is in progress shall be prevented, and release of
the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged
The operating mechanism shall have a hand-charging
amenity and it shall be possible to discharge the operating
springs at the Site from a charged condition without
difficulty. Manual spring release shall also be provided.
The charging spring motor shall be interlocked so that it
cannot operate when manual charging is selected. .
Interchangeability: circuit breakers of the same type and
current rating to be interchangeable, electrically and
mechanically, but it shall be impossible to interchange
circuit breakers of different current ratings.
Neither the circuit breakers nor any other part of the
switchgear or supporting structures shall be permanently
strained when making or breaking the rated short circuit
currents.
Each circuit breaker shall be capable of making and
breaking short circuit faults in accordance with the ANSI
Standards referred to in subsection 1.4 and the
requirements of these Specifications. All current carrying
equipment shall be capable of withstanding the rated
currents for a period of 2 seconds.
Test Certificates must be supplied for the breakers. The
testing must be conducted on breakers that are identical to
the breakers that will be supplied under this Contract.
Mechanical tripping features on all the circuit breakers via
an emergency button shall be provided.
Manual means of operation to be provided for all circuit
breakers for maintenance purposes.
Operating mechanisms shall be designed so that the circuit
breaker is free to open electrically and mechanically.
An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be
provided to show whether the circuit breaker is open or
closed.
Stored energy mechanism: means of manually charging
from the front of the circuit breaker; mechanical indication
to show the status of the stored energy mechanism,
automatically discharge before the breaker is withdrawn
from the cell.
Secondary disconnecting contacts or plug and socket: self
aligning for connection of control circuits in the circuit
breaker to control units in the circuit breaker cubicle.
Additional truck operated and mechanism operated
auxiliary contacts: wired to terminal blocks, rated at a
minimum 10A at the rated control voltage of 125 V DC.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 9 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.3
2.4
Operation counter: non-resettable mounted on the face of
the breaker.
Primary draw-out power disconnecting devices: removable
element to consist of a flexibly-mounted, self-aligning
assembly of bridging segments, formed so each segment
will make high pressure contact with the fixed terminal at
one end and with the circuit breaker terminal at the other
end. Heavily silver-plate all contact surfaces.
Contact wear indicators: easily accessible with the circuit
breaker in the withdrawn position.
Auxiliary contacts: a minimum of three spare 'A' contacts
and three spare 'B' contacts (or six spare convertible “A” or
“B” contacts) on each circuit breaker in addition to the
contacts required for switchgear operation, controls and
those shown on the Contract Drawings.
Interlocks must be provided to prevent incorrect operation
of switchgear. The operator must be forced into the only
safe and logical sequence of operations to actuate
switching devices. Interlocking shall be achieved by
mechanical means.
The following interlock provisions are mandatory for circuit
breakers:
.1
The withdrawal or engagement of a circuit breaker
shall be impossible unless it is in the ‘open’
position.
.2
The operation of a circuit breaker shall be
impossible unless it is in the ‘operating’ or ‘test’
position.
.3
It shall be impossible to close the circuit breaker
between service and test position.
.4
Switching operations shall be performed with the
circuit breaker compartment door closed,
.5
The door of the compartment shall be prevented
from being opened unless the unit is isolated,
.6
Withdrawable units shall be prevented from being
withdrawn or from being replaced without being
isolated,
One Breaker Test station at the Site shall be included,
including an ‘umbilical’ cord to allow testing of breaker
outside switchgear.
Gas Insulated Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Electrical Interlocking and Load Management Scheme
.1
Provide electrical interlocking between the main and tie breakers
in the switchboard to prevent paralleling the incoming feeders in
accordance with the control schematic drawings and as follows:
.1
Only two of three breakers, in the fully racked in position,
can be closed at any one time; and
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 10 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
.4
2.5
Automatically trip the tie breaker, should all three breakers,
in the fully racked in position, become all closed at the
same time.
Allow all three breakers to close when one or more of the
breakers is in the disconnected or test position.
Electrical interlocks shall function so as to prevent the
closing operation but not the opening of a circuit breaker.
Breaker and Switchboard Controls
.1
The control and monitoring shall conform to Section 13010 –
Process Control: General Requirements.
.2
Each breaker control is to be internally wired to allow the control
modes and interlocks and controls to operate as follows:
.1
Circuit breakers shall utilize vacuum breaking technology,
and shall be arranged for either vertical or horizontal
isolation complying with the requirements of ANSI C37.
.2
It shall not be possible to render the electrical tripping
feature inoperative by any mechanical locking device.
.3
It shall be possible to verify full functional operation,
indication and closing, tripping and interlock circuit when
circuit breaker is in the test (isolated) position.
.4
Provide separately fused circuits for the closing and
tripping circuits.
Provide continuous monitoring of the integrity of the trip coil
.5
by mounting the “breaker closed” red pilot lamp in series
with the trip coil. Also provide trip coil monitoring by the
multifunction relay associated with the breaker.
.6
Provide continuous monitoring of the integrity of the
tripping power supply circuit for each breaker.
.7
A rugged copper bar type grounding device shall be
provided on the breaker element to positively ground the
breaker frame to the switchgear ground bus in a test and
connected position.
.3
Current Transformers
.1
Provide multi-tap current transformers as shown on the
Drawings with a 5A secondary current rating.
.2
Provide a zero sequence current transformer with current
ratio as recommended in the Coordination Study, refer to
Section 16015 - Electrical System Analysis.
.3
Rated nominal voltage, class, frequency and basic impulse
level shall be not less than the main bus.
Mechanical and thermal withstand ratings shall be not less
.4
than the circuit breakers.
.5
Burden: capable of driving the combined burden of relays,
meters, transducers and loads up to a minimum of fifteen
(15) times nominal rating without saturating.
.6
Accuracy class shall be suitable for protection relaying and
Region metering.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 11 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.7
.8
.9
.10
Provide saturation curves for all current transformers.
Clearly and permanently mark the polarity of secondary
terminals.
Wire the secondary terminals to automatic shorting type
terminal blocks mounted in the cubicle.
Provide auxiliary current transformers as required.
.4
Potential Transformers
.1
Primary and secondary voltage ratings of 4160/120 V
unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Insulation class shall be equal to the main bus.
.2
.3
Provide properly rated fuses for primary winding protection.
.4
Provide properly rated fuses for ungrounded secondary
circuit protection.
Burden: capable of supplying 1.5 times the combined
.5
burden of all known connected relays, meters, transducers
and loads.
.6
Accuracy class: suitable for the specific application.
.7
Wire secondary leads to link type terminal blocks mounted
in the cubicle.
.8
Potential transformers used for protective and metering
devices shall not supply any other loads.
.9
Clearly and permanently mark the high voltage and low
voltage terminals.
.5
Protective Relays, Instruments and Meters
.1
All protective relays for medium voltage circuit breakers
shall be General Electric Company, Multilin SR750 relays.
Relay power supply from plant 125V DC source as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
.2
Fully test relays during commissioning.
.3
Provide door-mounted flexitest blocks for all metering,
instrumentation and relaying circuits.
Acceptable manufacturers:
.4
1.
General Electric Company, Multilin
.5
Mount protective relays, instruments and meters on the
front door.
.6
Test blocks: door mounted for all metering, instrumentation
and relaying circuits.
Auxiliary and time delay relays: dust-proof, plug-in type,
.7
mounted in the cubicle.
.8
Auxiliary tripping relays: lock-out type, front door mounted
reset handles.
.9
Auxiliary relays: with no less than four normally open and
four normally closed contacts.
.10
Lock-out relays: with a minimum of 16 contacts.
.11
Time delay relays: easily adjustable, with a minimum of two
normally open and two normally closed contacts.
.12
Mount door mounted devices between 900 mm and1700
mm above floor where possible. Where not possible,
request written approval from the Consultant.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 12 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.6
Control and Selector Switches
.1
Circuit breaker local control switches shall have the
following characteristics:
1.
Three position (Close-Neutral-Trip);
2.
Pistol grip handle, spring loaded to return to the
neutral position;
3.
Mechanical position indicator showing position of
last manual operation;
4.
Heavy duty type
5.
Rated 600 V, 20 A, double-series-connected, silverplated contacts enclosed in an easily removable
dust tight cover
6.
With a minimum of one (1) spare NO/NC contacts
on each position for remote monitoring.
.2
Mounting height: 900 mm to 1700 mm from floor.
.7
Indicating Lights
.1
Indicating lights: long life, 125 V DC, Push-to-test clustered
LED type lamps with series resistors.
.2
Coloured lens caps: heat resistant, interchangeable and
easily removable from the front. Red for circuit breaker
closed; Green for circuit breaker open.
.3
Lamps replacement: easily replaceable from the front,
without disconnecting the power supply.
.4
Mounting height: 900 mm to 1700 mm from floor.
.8
Control Power
.1
Breaker trip, closing and auxiliary circuits: supplied from a
single external 125 V DC supply.
.2
Control power disconnecting means: two pole, non-fusible
disconnect switch in each circuit breaker compartment for
isolating the tripping, closing and auxiliary circuit supplies.
.3
Provide a 125V DC supply to each Multilin relay, as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
.4
Control power circuit protection: High Rupturing Capacity
(HRC) fuses rated appropriately.
.5
Fuse holders suitable for cartridge type HRC fuses rated
250 V, 30 A.
.6
Trip circuit disconnecting means: disconnect switch for
each breaker must be suitably rated as indicated in the
Contract Drawings and calibrated for trip settings in
accordance with the short circuit and coordination study.
Trip circuit protection: with a suitably sized HRC fuse. Trip
circuit: separate from the closing and auxiliary circuits.
.7
Trip circuit monitoring relay: for each breaker, with two
normally closed and two normally open contacts which
may be used for remote annunciation of loss of breaker
tripping power supply.
.9
Control and Instrumentation Wiring
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 13 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Control and instrumentation wiring: no smaller than #14
AWG, 600 V, multi-stranded, extra flexible, copper, heat
and flame retardant insulation, single conductor type.
Current transformer wiring: a minimum of #10 AWG.
Wiring termination: in terminal blocks GE MULTILIN 515.
Wire identification: At both ends with Oil-resistant, Type Z
markers by Wieland Electric Inc. at conductor ends.
Adhesive cloth or Mylar tapes not acceptable.
Terminal blocks: rail mounted, modular, 600 V rated,
minimum 25 A, with grounded metal barriers separating
voltage levels, tubular clamp type, clearly identify. Current
transformer terminal blocks: automatically short circuiting
link type.
Separation of terminals and wiring: by class of signal AC,
DC, voltage level.
Spare terminal blocks: 30 percent in each cubicle.
Brace, support and bundle all wiring to present a neat
appearance.
Cell interconnecting wiring: terminate on terminal blocks;
clearly mark and tag wires to indicate where to terminate.
Shipping split interconnecting wiring: pre-cut to length and
terminate with compression type lugs.
Cable supports: for control cables and wiring, including
external cables and wiring.
.10
External Connections
.1
Cable termination: cable and terminating assembly
supports; compression type, minimum of two bolt holes
compression lugs sized to match the cable size as
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Terminating pads: with
standard NEMA hole patterns.
.2
Stress relief cones: sufficient space for fitting and making
off.
.3
Insulating materials: sufficient to insulate the exposed
cable ends and bus after completing the connections,
insulation level equal to the insulation level of the main
bus.
.11
Surge Arresters
.1
Surge arresters: To be installed on the line side of each of
the new main breakers. Surge arrester to be sized for a
4160 V solidly grounded system.
.12
Nameplates and Markings
.1
Refer to Specification 16010 – Electrical General
Requirements for all physical requirements for all labels,
nameplates and warning signs.
.2
Nameplates: to identify each compartment equipment and
components on both the front and rear of the switchgear
assembly.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 14 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
2.6
Phase bus identification: in the termination compartment
with the letters A, B, C and/or colour coding Red, Black,
Blue.
Clearly and permanently mark automatic shutters as
follows:
1.
For incoming circuit breaker cubicles: Incoming,
Bus.
2.
For feeder circuit breaker cubicles: Bus, Load.
3.
For tie breaker cubicle: Bus 0100, Bus 0200.
4.
Letters: a minimum of 25 mm high.
.13
Mimic Bus
.1
Through-out the entire length of the switchgear, both front
and back, provide a lamacoid representation of the
switchgear major components including the 4160 V bus,
main and tie breakers, termination and feeder points, CT’s,
PT’s, and relays, and any other major components.
.2
Mimic bus to be red, fastened with SS screws.
.14
Finish
.1
Painted surfaces: to be ground smooth, thoroughly
cleaned, etched in a phosphate solution and coated with a
rust inhibiting primer. Interior and exterior finish as
indicated on the Contract Documents.
.2
Circuit breaker painted surfaces: same colour as the
switchgear external finish.
.3
Touch up paint: one litre of original paint of each colour.
.15
Accessories
.1
Accessories: as indicated in the Contract Drawings or as
required for complete functional system in accordance with
the scope of the Contract.
.1
The Contractor is responsible for the supply of all parts needed
during commissioning.
.2
Provide an itemized list of all recommended spare parts, and unit
prices, required for routine and minor overhauls for two (2) years
of normal operation. Each piece of equipment shall have part
number or designation.
.3
Use identical equipment and components where practical to
permit inter-changeability of parts, minimize spare parts inventory,
and to simplify maintenance.
.4
Where two or more items of equipment perform similar functions,
use the same make and, where practical, the same model number
and size.
.5
Supply two sets of all special tools required for commissioning and
servicing of the equipment.
Spare Parts and Tools
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 15 of 19
DATE: April 2012
PART 3.
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
General
.1
Install embedded floor channels as required to align them on the
floor.
.2
Set and secure cubicles in place, rigid, plumb and square on floor
channels.
.3
Make ground connections.
.4
Interconnect cubicles with bus connectors supplied by
manufacturer, and with cable bus, as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.5
Connect inter-cubicle wiring.
.6
Make power supply connections to incoming terminals after
performing functional tests requiring closing of incoming breaker.
.7
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and
electrical continuity.
.8
Ensure correct phasing prior to attempting parallel operation.
.9
Install and connect external control, metering and instrumentation
cables.
.10
Ensure controls are fully functional as described by the supplier of
the switchgear system, including protective devices,
synchronisation controls, automatic and manual operation.
.11
Thoroughly clean interior and exterior.
.12
Connect load side terminals to feeders as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.1
Prior to energization of switchgear, perform the following checks:
.1
Measure insulation resistance on bus, phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground, with breakers in normal operating
position with main contacts open. Disconnect lightning
arresters and withdraw potential transformers when
carrying out these tests.
.2
Measure control circuit insulation resistance to ground. Do
not carry out insulation resistance test on circuits
incorporating solid state devices.
.3
Allow for required support from manufacturer during site
testing.
.4
Employ services of manufacturer or qualified independent
testing agency to inspect, program and calibrate protection
relays and sensors, refer to Section 16031 – Inspection
and Testing for additional inspections and tests. Verify
settings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
setting data provided by Coordination Study.
1.
Ensure correct protection devices installed in
accordance with the co-ordination study, including
Testing
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 16 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
3.3
current transformer ratings, fuse ratings, and
protective device settings.
2.
Ensure all “settable” protective and control devices
are fully programmed, and properly set in
accordance with the coordination study. For any
parameters not included as part of the coordination
study, ensure units are programmed in accordance
with the manufacture’rs recommendations and load
requirements (for example: this may include
protection relays monitoring parameters). All such
settings are to be submitted to the Consultant prior
to equipment energization for review and approval.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure all
settings and programmed values are properly and
completely set in all devices. Proper coordination
with equipment supplier will ensure that no
parameters are missed.
Inspect current transformers, potential transformers and
relays for correct polarity. Ensure shorting jumpers
installed on unused CT circuits.
Carry out functional tests and checks simulating operating
and fault conditions.
Check mechanical and electrical interlocks and safety
devices.
Check ground connection are made.
Energize incoming circuit breaker(s).
Ensure fully operational system.
Refer to Section 16031 – Inspection and Testing for all
additional tests and requirements.
Training
.1
As described in Section 01820 – Demonstration and Training.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 17 of 19
DATE: April 2012
3.4
Switchgear Data Sheets
.1
Enclosure Data:
EQUIPMENT NUMBER: n/a
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE DESCRIPTION:
REQ'D
DESCRIPTION
REQ'D
CONTROL VOLTAGE
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Location
Closing Circuit
125 VDC
Tripping Circuit
125 VDC
Trip Healthy Indication
Yes
Indoor
Ambient Design Temperature
40ºC
ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS
Nominal Voltage Class
Number of Phases
3 Exterior Paint Colour
Frequency
Maximum Design Fault Level
(Symmetrical)
Main Bus Rating
250 MVA SURGE ARRESTERS
Yes
40kA At incoming of each main breaker.
2000 A
System Grounding Type [Solid/Low
Resistance/High Resistance]
Indoor/Outdoor
Grey (ANSI61)
60 Hz
Nominal MVA Class (at 5 kV)
Enclosure:
4160 V FINISH
EEMAC Type
Solid
1A POWER CONDUCTOR
TERMINATIONS
Indoor Type:
Incomers
Feeders
Entry
Cable bus duct
Bus
Top
CONTROL CONDUCTOR
TERMINATIONS
Type
Entry
REMARKS: Refer to Drawings for more specific requirements.
Bottom
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Page 18 of 19
DATE: April 2012
.2
4160 V Main Breakers
EQUIPMENT NUMBER: ELS-SWG-XXXX
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE DESCRIPTION:
REQ'D
DESCRIPTION
REQ'D
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Type: Vacuum/Vacuum SF6
Vacuum ACCESSORIES
Rating
2000 A levering/racking device
Yes
Voltage Class
4160 V hoisting device/mobile lifting
device
Yes
MVA Class (At 4160V)
Maximum Available Fault Level
(Symmetrical)
250 MVA extension rails
40kA removable ramp
Yes
Yes
Electrically Operated
Yes ground and test device
Yes
Draw Out
Yes test jumpers for testing breakers
outside switchgear
Yes
Control Voltage
125 V dc test cabinet
test plug to match current test
block
Yes
Yes
Manual Close (Yes, Blocked –
tool accessible)
Yes test plug to match potential test
block
Yes
Manual Open
Yes test plugs suitable for integral
relay test blocks
Yes
FEEDER MANAGEMENT
RELAY (FMR), GE MULTILIN
SR750
FMR provided by [Owner,
Contractor]
FMR Panel mounting case
required
special tools and hardware
required for installation,
maintenance, operation,
inspection and testing
Yes
anti-condensation heaters
Yes
Contractor motor anti-condensation heater
controls
Yes
REMARKS: Refer to Drawings for more specific requirements.
Yes
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16345
4160 V MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
DATE: April 2012
Page 19 of 19
.3
4160V Tie Breakers:
EQUIPMENT NUMBER: ELS-SWG-XXXX
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE DESCRIPTION:
REQ'D
DESCRIPTION
REQ'D
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Type: Vacuum/Vacuum SF6
Vacuum ACCESSORIES
Rating
2000 A levering/racking device
Yes
Voltage Class
4160 V hoisting device/mobile lifting device
Yes
MVA Class (At 4160V)
Maximum Available Fault Level
(Symmetrical)
250 MVA extension rails
40kA removable ramp
Yes
Yes
Electrically Operated
Yes ground and test device
Yes
Draw Out
Yes test jumpers for testing breakers
outside switchgear
Yes
Control Voltage
125 V dc test cabinet
test plug to match current test block
Yes
Yes
Manual Close (Yes, Blocked –
tool accessible)
Yes test plug to match potential test block
Yes
Manual Open
Yes test plugs suitable for integral relay
test blocks
Yes
special tools and hardware required
for installation, maintenance,
operation, inspection and testing
Yes
FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY
(FMR), GE MULTILIN SR750
Not applicable anti-condensation heaters
Yes
FMR provided by [Owner,
Contractor]
Not applicable motor anti-condensation heater
controls
Yes
FMR Panel mounting case
required
No
REMARKS: Refer to Drawings for more specific requirements.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 1 of 18
DATE: April 2012
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
Scope of Work
.1
Furnish and install solid state starter(s) as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as specified herein, including all required
appurtenances. The solid state starter(s) shall be microprocessor
controlled, suitable for use with three phase standard induction
motors rated 7,200 VAC or less. The starter(s) shall provide
Closed Loop Current Control, Sensorless Linear True Torque
Control, and KW Ramp Control for smooth and stepless motor
acceleration and deceleration.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16346 – Medium Voltage Solid State
Starters as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
The solid state starter(s) shall be the domestic product of a
manufacturer incorporated, located, and manufacturing the
products in Canada. They shall have produced medium voltage
solid state starters of the same type and size for a minimum of 10
years consecutively. Brand labeled or third party integrator
supplied starters are not acceptable.
.2
Starter manufacturer shall provide a reference list of not less than
20 installations within the last 10 years with contact names and
phone numbers for verification, as well as a general installation list
of over 200 installed units in operation successfully for more than
5 years. Additionally, an application and industry specific user list
shall be provided. Successful experience in the specific voltage
class and horsepower range, specified in this Contract and
applications in water and wastewater facilities must be
demonstrated.
.3
A Reduced Voltage Start Analysis must be provided to simulate
and illustrate the coordination between the power distribution
system, solid state starter(s), and the motor. The analysis shall
indicate the optimum motor current start profile, acceleration
times, and the equivalent locked rotor heating time of the motor
under specific reduced voltage start profiles. The analysis shall
be provided in PDF format. The following graphs must be
produced:
.1
Motor Current and Torque verses Speed
.2
Load Torque (as a percentage of rated motor torque)
verses Speed
.3
Developed Torque, Load Torque and Accelerating Torque
verses Speed
Measurement and Payment
Quality Assurance
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 2 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.4
1.4
Motor Current and Speed verses Time
.4
The analysis stipulated above, must be included in the submittal
process and final as built documentation. This data will be used at
time of commissioning so accuracy is critical. The submittal shall
be subject to review and approval by the Consultant..
.5
For safety, reliability, and continuity of warranty, any modifications,
alterations, etc., required to conform to the requirements of this
Specification shall be performed by the starter manufacturer only.
Distributor or other third party modifications to a manufacturer’s
standard product are specifically prohibited.
.6
Solid state starter manufacturer shall supply proof of
conformance for Electro-Magnetic Compatibility upon request.
Field labeling is not acceptable.
.7
The solid state starter shall be domestically designed,
manufactured and tested to conform, where applicable, to the
following industry standards and specifications:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.2
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada
(EEMAC)
.3
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
.4
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.1
NEMA ICS2
.5
Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC)
.1
ULC 347
.6
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.8
Environmental Requirements:
.1
Temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius.
.2
Relative Humidity: Up to 95 percent, non-condensing.
.3
Designed, tested and certified to meet Uniform Building
Code on non-building structures, for Zone 1, 2, 3, and 4
requirements. Specifically, UBC Zone 4 (Earth Quake)
Seismic Design Response Spectra Analysis. Altitude of up
to 1,000 m. For altitude greater than 1,000 m, refer to
manufacturers de-rating formula.
.1
Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals.
.2
Provide the following:
.1
Elementary wiring and interconnection diagrams in
accordance with NEMA Industrial Control and Systems
(ICS) standards.
.2
Size, type, and rating of all system components including
the interrupting, withstand, and continuous current rating
of:
Bus Bars
.1
Submittals
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 3 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.5
.2
Starter Units
.3
Incoming Line Units
Enclosure frontal elevation and dimension drawings.
Internal component layout diagrams.
Available conduit entry and exit locations.
Manufacturer’s Product data sheets.
UL 347 certification file number.
CE declaration of conformance (for Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC)).
Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1
Handling and shipment of the equipment shall be in such a
manner to prevent internal component damage, breakage, and/or
denting and scoring of the enclosure finish.
.2
Equipment shall be stored indoors in a clean, dry environment.
Ambient storage temperature shall be –40 degrees Celsius to 70
degrees Celsius and humidity 20 percent to 95 percent noncondensating. Energize space heaters if furnished.
.1
Benshaw Canada Controls Inc. or an approved equal, provided
that the solid state motor starters being supplied are the end
product; designed, engineered, manufactured and packaged by
the original solid state starter manufacturer. Brand labeled solid
state motor starters, packaged and supplied by a manufacturer
that is not the original solid state motor starter manufacturer, is not
acceptable.
.2
All “named” Manufacturers are obligated to meet the detailed
requirements of this Specification. The Consultant will be the sole
determiner of the acceptability of a proposed exception. In no
case will adjustments to the Contract Price be allowed later for
conformance to the Specifications.
.1
At a minimum, the starter(s) shall conform to the following
requirements:
.1
Size:
750 kW
.2
Minimum Overload
500 percent of Starter FLA
for 30 seconds
.3
Rating:
115 percent continuous
.4
PIV Ratings, 4,800 VAC:
12 KV
.5
Rated Short Circuit:
350 MVA at 5KV
.6
Insulation Test:
25 KVDC
.7
Basic Impulse Load Level: 45 KV BIL Standard, 60KV
BIL Optional
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Manufacturers
Equipment Design Criteria
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 4 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.8
.9
.10
.11
Transient Voltage
Protection:
Under Voltage
Protection:
.12
Control Input:
.13
Fault level as a
Fused (E2) controller:
Starts Per Hour:
Min Time Between Restarts:
Audible Noise:
.14
.15
.16
.17
2.3
Overall Efficiency
w/o Bypass:
Overall Efficiency
with Bypass:
SCR Firing Technique
Basic Motor Control
Algorithm
Average 99.78 percent
99.9 percent
Fiber Optic Continuous Hard
Gate Drive
dv/dt circuits / phase
80 percent Pickup
60 percent Dropout
120 VAC or dry contact, 2/3
wire
NEMA/EEMAC 50KA SYM
Maximum of 5
Not less than 12 minutes
Not to exceed 60dbA @ 1
metre at any time
True torque control and
current ramp control
Enclosure Construction
.1
Construct to comply with the requirements of NEMA Part ICS 2324 as Class E2 controller.
.2
Basic structure shall be welded type construction utilizing
minimum 11 GA sheet metal.
.1
Doors shall be minimum 12 GA sheet metal, pan type with
flanges formed to provide sturdy, rigid structure.
.2
Provide electrical and/or mechanical door interlocks to
prevent doors from being opened with power applied.
.3
Doors shall be hinged to allow 90 degree swing.
.4
Total structure height shall not exceed 2.3 m (92.5 inches).
.3
The solid state starter(s) enclosure shall be indoor, sealed, nonventilated NEMA 12, or NEMA 3R.
.1
The starter(s) and any required accessories or auxiliary
items shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings.
Any costs associated with furnishing equipment which
exceeds the available space shall be borne by the
Contractor. Typical allowable enclosure dimensions are 36
Width x 30 Diameter x 92.5 Height (inches) for 2,200 kW, 5
KV and below; each starter.
.2
Provide removable lifting provisions.
.3
The starter cabinet shall contain the following:
.1
Main load break and fault make isolating switch.
.2
Vacuum inline and bypass contactors.
.3
Auxiliary metering and control devices as shown on
the Contract Drawings.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 5 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.4
.4
Low voltage control panel.
.1
Metal parts to be given thorough rust resistant
treatment.
Primer shall be Sherwin-Williams Canada Inc.
recoatable epoxy primer B-67.
Finish shall be Sherwin-Williams Canada Inc high
solid polyurethane polane T plus.
Colour shall be ANSI 61.
Finish:
.2
.3
.4
2.4
2.5
Wiring
.1
Complete with internal power and control wires including
terminations for external connections. Phase sequencing shall
have proper identification. Control wire shall be #14AWG
minimum with termination markings.
.2
The Contractor shall allow for a minimum of 350 mm of space for
the installation of Stress Cones during wiring of the starter.
Medium Voltage Combination Starter
.1
Main Isolation Switch:
.1
Externally operable, ganged 3 pole load break, fault make
unit.
.2
The switch shall interrupt no-load current of control
transformer supplied in controller.
.3
In off position, the switch shall ground medium voltage
power components, to discharge hazardous stored energy,
to provide safer operation and maintenance.
.2
Operational Features:
.1
One N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact as standard.
.2
Disconnect Switch will remain connected to external
operating handle at all times, fully interlocked with inline
contactor.
.3
Must be capable of being padlocked in open position with
up to three locks.
.4
Mechanically and/or electrical interlocked to prevent
opening of medium voltage door when isolating switch is in
the closed position and prevent closing of the isolating
switch when medium voltage door of starter is open.
.5
Removes power to coil of inline and bypass contactor
before removing line power during manual operation of the
disconnect switch.
.3
Required Ratings:
Rating Description
Rated interrupting current,
400 A Load
RMS
Break
Rated interrupting current,
400 Amp
Current
600 A Load
Break
600 Amp
1200 A Load
Break
1200 Amp
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 6 of 18
DATE: April 2012
RMS
Continuous current, RMS
Impulse withstand BIL
Momentary current, RMS
(asymmetrical )
Short-time current RMS
Fault closing current with
Current Limiting Fuses
400 Amp
600 Amp
45KV Standard, 60KV Optional.
22.5 KA
40 KA
(asymmetrical)
(asymmetrical)
14 KA, (2 sec.)
25 KA, (2 sec.)
22.5 KA
40 KA
(symmetrical)
(symmetrical)
1200 Amp
61 KA
(asymmetrical)
38 KA, (2 sec.)
61 KA
(symmetrical)
.4
Power Fuses & Holders:
.1
Current limiting type rated 50 KAIC symmetrical.
.2
Fuse size shall be manufacturer’s standard.
.3
Fuses shall be vertically mounted in the enclosure for ease
of inspection and removal without special tools.
.4
Provide blown fuse indication.
.5
Power fuse holders shall be clip-in style, part of starter
assembly.
.6
Fuse clips shall be designed to accept current limiting
fuses for NEMA Class E2 application
.5
SCR Stacks:
.1
Arranged horizontally for proper heat management.
.2
Heat sinks sized for specified Starts Per Hour without
requiring auxiliary cabinet cooling fans.
.6
SCR Gating:
.1
Provide Fiber Optic Continuous Hard Gate Drive Signals
and Fiber Optic Cable to SCR stacks for safe isolation of
control and power circuits and precision control of SCRs.
.7
An inline (main) contactor and a bypass contactor shall be
provided.
.1
Vacuum break type: Fixed mounted style
.2
Current rating: Manufacturer standard for horsepower
rating
.3
Voltage rating: 7,200 VAC minimum
.4
The main and/or bypass contactor shall be sequenced by
the starter manufacturer for proper operation of the solid
state starter.
.5
The bypass contactor shall bypass the SCRs after starting
and while the starter is in the run (full voltage) mode.
A standard option must be available for Dual Redundant.6
Emergency Bypass Starting.
.8
Line Reactors (Optional):
.1
Line reactor(s) shall be supplied with the starter(s) if the
power source is 20 MVA or greater, or the motor leads
exceed 300 m in length. Line reactor(s) shall be provided
loose in a separate enclosure for field mounting by
Contractor, or mounted and wired by the starter
manufacturer within the starter enclosure.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 7 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.2
2.6
Adequate length of 5 KV rated cable, power cable
lugs and associated mounting hardware shall be
supplied by the starter manufacturer for use in
connecting the line reactor. Submittal Drawings shall show
the wiring of the line reactor as reference for the installer.
.9
Power Factor Correction
.1
The starter must be furnished to provide connections to
power factor capacitors once motor is up to speed. If
external power factor capacitors are used, starter must
include a 400 AMP vacuum contactor and one per phase,
6 inch coils of rated power wire. If power factor capacitors
are internal, starter must provide a 400 amp vacuum
contactor, one 6 inch coil of rated power wire per phase
and power factor correction capacitors. Internal power
factor correction capacitors must correct power factor to .95 or greater.
.2
Power factor correction capacitors must be fuse protected.
Optional protection may be over current protection, or over
/ under current, ground fault current and over voltage.
.10
Ground Bus:
.1
A continuous copper ground bus shall be provided along
the entire length of the controller line up. The ground bus
shall be ¼” x 1” or ¼” x 2” (6.4 x 51mm) bare or plated
copper.
.11
Ground Ball:
.1
Each controller shall be equipped with a Grounding Ball on
the ground bus, as well as two per phase. Grounding balls
on the phases must be positioned on the load terminals as
well as the primary side of the short circuit fuse. Grounding
balls must be capable of a short circuit withstand rating of
30 KA for 30 cycles and 43 KA for 15 Cycles.
.1
Control Power Transformer
.1
Provide an internal 120 VAC step down transformer,
mounted separately in the medium voltage power section,
1,000 VA minimum with 500 VA for miscellaneous use.
.2
Supply two fuses on primary and one fuse on secondary
side with one leg grounded.
Disconnect primary of control transformer from power
.3
supply with isolating switch (if supplied) in open position.
.4
The Control Power Transformer shall also be sized to
power the motor space heater, if applicable. The motor
space heater is rated 500 Watts, 120 V. An auxiliary
contact shall activate and deactivate the motor space
heater.
Control Hardware
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 8 of 18
DATE: April 2012
2.7
.2
Control Wiring: Control wire shall be #14AWG, 600 V, stranded,
minimum with termination markings and continuously labeled over
its entire length for ease of identification.
.3
Terminal Strips: Rated for 600 V, suitable for contactor
termination of up to #10AWG wire.
.4
Provide push buttons, pilot lights, and control relays, heavy duty,
rated to 600 V.
.5
Low Voltage Compartment:
.1
Locate low voltage section behind separate door and
physically isolated from medium voltage section.
Door to permit access to control logic without exposure to
.2
medium voltages.
.3
Customer interlocking and control as well as metering,
relays, and pilot devices shall be located in this section.
Optically isolate main control PC card located in low
.4
voltage section from medium voltage Gate Driver cards on
power poles.
.5
Controller shall include 120 VAC test capability to power
and adjust microprocessor control when isolating switch is
in open position, with the following features:
.1
Test circuit shall consist of receptacle and plug
mounted in low voltage compartment and
accessible only when low voltage door is open.
.2
In test position, plug may be inserted into the
provided receptacle and connected to external
120V source of power.
The above features shall isolate control transformer
.3
and prevent energizing control transformer
secondary from test voltage source.
Solid State Starter Logic Control
.1
Starter(s) shall be fully microprocessor controlled and operated.
At a minimum, the logic control shall include the following:
.1
Default motor starting control algorithm must be one of the
following:
.1
Closed Loop Current Control providing a linear,
squared or “S” curve increase in current from the
initial current setting to the maximum setting
.2
TruTorque Control for precise regulation of motor
and load applied torque
Power Control Acceleration controlling the power
.3
(kW) drawn from the power source
.4
Open Loop Voltage Ramp providing a linear
increase in voltage from the initial voltage setting to
the maximum setting
.5
Tachometer Feedback Ramp providing a linear
ramp of motor speed
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 9 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.6
.2
.3
.4
.5
Dual Acceleration Ramp profiles for selecting any
two of the above starting algorithms
.7
Cyclo Speed Control to run the motor at 1 percent
to 40 percent rated speed
.8
Auto Start Control allowing the starter to
automatically start if the start signal is high when
the control card is powered up and/or high after a
fault reset
Default motor deceleration control algorithm must be one
of the following:
.1
Coast deceleration allowing the motor and load to
coast to a stop
Closed Loop Current Control providing a linear,
.2
squared or “S” curve decrease in current
.3
Voltage deceleration control using an open loop
voltage ramp, ramping the voltage down to
decelerate the motor
.4
TruTorque Control for precise regulation of motor
and load applied torque
Standard Duty or Heavy Duty DC Injection
.5
Breaking for fast deceleration of motor speed
.6
Tachometer Feedback Ramp providing a linear
ramp of motor speed
Embedded Modbus RS485 for communications purposes
as published by the Telecommunication Industry
Association (TIA)
Optional communications ports Profibus DP,
Ethernet/Modbus TCP, Devicenet, LonWork
Provide additional motor control functions:
.1
Motor winding heater control supplying a low
current to heat motor windings
.2
Energy Saver function which reduces energy
consumption of motor while running
.2
Provide a door mounted Display & User Interface Module with the
following functions:
Backlit LCD- 2 Lines, 16 Characters
.1
.2
Tactile Feedback Buttons
.3
Pass Code Protection
.4
Built in Start/Stop Pushbuttons
.5
Status Indication via LCD Display and LED’s
.6
Scrolling Menu/Parameters
.7
Discrete Enter Command Button
.8
Meter Mode Display
.3
Power Outage Ride Through:
.1
The starter shall be furnished with the ability to ride
through short-term power losses of up to 3 seconds
duration without shutdown and/or dropout of internal
control logic. An uninterruptible power supply is required.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 10 of 18
DATE: April 2012
2.8
.4
Built In Self Test (Standard BIST):
.1
The starter must contain a built in self test (BIST) feature
that has the capability to perform a test sequence to
ensure it is operating properly while isolating test
personnel from high voltages.
.2
BIST must provide proper interlocking to ensure that the
test can be done only when not in service.
.3
BIST must operate the vacuum contactors one time each
to verify proper operation. It must alarm through the
integral LCD display if the sequence fails.
.4
BIST must verify SCR gate firing of all SCRs within the
starter(s) and offer the ability to measure the gate voltage
with a DC voltmeter or oscilloscope.
.5
BIST must provide control power to all auxiliary devices to
allow for verification of proper operation of each of these
devices.
.5
Programmable Analog Outputs:
The analog output function shall be configured to one of the
available output function selections and output scaling shown
below. The analog output is updated every 25 msec.
.1
Off
.2
0-200 percent Current
.3
0-800 percent Current
.4
0-150 percent Voltage
.5
0-150 percent Overload
.6
0-10 kW
.7
0-100 kW
.8
0-1 MW
.9
0-10 MW
.10
0-100 percent AI
.11
0-100 percent Firing
.12
Calibration
.1
Provide the following Starter Diagnostic Functions:
.1
Alpha/Numeric Fault Display
.2
Revolving 99 Most Recent Events
.3
Start/Stop Recorder
.4
Date & Time Stamped Events
.5
Motor Thermal % Capacity Display
.6
Closed Loop Motor Stall Detection
.7
Open Loop Motor Stall Detection
.8
Open Gate Detection
.9
Starter Status Indication
.10
Pre-Start: Pending Fault Indication
.11
Pre-Start: Phase Rotation Indication
.12
Control Board Built in Self Tests
.13
Starter/System Level Built in Self Tests
Starter Protection & Monitoring
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 11 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.2
Self Check Parameter Set-Up
LED Indication SCR Status
Full Screen Meter Mode
9 Event Fault Log
Zero Sequence or Residual Ground Fault Detection
10 year Lithium
Provide the following Metering Functions:
.1
Accuracy
The solid state starter shall be capable of measuring the
following parameters within the accuracies of the
measurements as noted below:
.1
CT Inputs: True RMS, Sampling @ 1.562kHz
.2
Line Voltage Inputs: True RMS
.3
Current: 0-40,000 Amps
3 percent
.4
Voltage: 0-15000 Volts
3 percent
.5
Watts: 0-9,999 MW
5 percent
.6
Volts-Amps: 0-9,999 MVA
5 percent
.7
Vars: 0-9,999 Mvar
5 percent
.8
Watt-Hours: 0-10,000 MWh
5 percent
.9
PF: -0.01 to +0.01 (Lag & Lead)
5 percent
.10
0.1 Hz
Line Frequency: 23-72 Hz
.11
Residual Ground Fault: 5-100% FLA 5 percent
.12
Run Time:
3 seconds per 24 hour period
.13
Analog Input: Accuracy
3 percent of full scale
.14
Analog Output: Accuracy
2 percent of full scale
.15
Zero Sequence CT
3 percent
.2
Metering Functions: The solid state starter shall be capable
of displaying the following metering functions:
.1
Status
.2
Average Current
.3
Line 1 Current
(Energy)
.4
Line 2 Current
.5
Line 3 Current
Current Imbalance Level
.6
.7
Residual Ground Fault Current
.8
Average Voltage
.9
L1-L2 Volts
.10
L2-L3 Volts
.11
L3-L1 Volts
.12
Overload
.13
Power Factor
.14
Watts (Power)
(Optional)
.15
Zero Sequence GF
.16
Volt Amps
.17
VARS
.18
kW Hours (Energy)
.19
MW Hours
.20
Phase Order
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 12 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.21
.22
.23
.24
.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
.3
Line Frequency
Analog Input
Analog Output
Run Days
Run Hours
Starts
TruTorque %
Power %
Maximum Phase Current
RTD 1-16 (Optional)
Peak Accel Current
Last Start Time
Provide the following programmable Relay Outputs:
.1
General Fault Relay
.1
No fault:
.2
UTS Time Limit Expired
.3
Motor Thermal Overload Trip
.4
Jog Time Limit Expired
.5
Phase Rotation Error, not ABC
.6
Phase Rotation Error, not CBA
.7
Low Line Frequency
.8
High Line Frequency
.9
Input power not three phase .
.10
Stack Protection Fault (stack thermal overload)
.11
Bypass Contactor Fault
.12
Control Power Low
.13
Current Sensor Offset Error
.14
External Fault on DI 1 Input
.15
External Fault on DI 2 Input
External Fault on DI 3 Input
.16
External Fault on DI 4 Input
.17
External Fault on DI 5 Input
.18
External Fault on DI 6 Input
.19
Modbus Timeout Fault
.20
CPU Error – SW Watchdog
CPU Error - Program EPROM Checksum Fault
.21
.22
CPU Error – Parameter EEPROM Checksum Fault
.23
Low Line L1-L2
.24
Low Line L2-L3
.25
Low Line L3-L1
.26
High Line L1-L2
.27
High Line L2-L3
.28
High Line L3-L1
.29
Phase Loss
.30
No Line
.31
I.O.C .
.32
Overcurrent
.33
Undercurrent
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 13 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
2.9
.34
Current Imbalance
.35
Ground Fault
.36
No Current at Run
.37
Shorted / Open SCR
.38
Current at Stop
.39
CPU Error–SW fault
.40
Analog Input #1 Level Fault Trip(local)
Optional Programmable Relay Outputs
.1
OFF
.2
Fault (fail safe)
.3
Fault (Non Fail Safe
.4
Running
.5
Up to Speed
.6
Alarm
.7
Ready
.8
Locked Out
.9
Overcurrent
.10
Undercurrent
.11
Overload Alarm
.12
Cool Fan Control
.13
Shunt Trip (Fail safe)
.14
Shunt Trip (Non fail safe)
.15
Ground Fault
.16
Energy Saver
.17
Heating
.18
Slow Speed (Cyclo-converter)
.19
Slow Speed Forward (Cyclo-converter)
.20
Slow Speed Reverse (Cyclo-converter)
.21
DC Injection Braking
.22
PORT (Power Outage Ride Through)
.23
Tach Loss
Output relay contacts shall be:
.1
Quantity (Qty) 2, form C 5 Amps resistive (125V), 3
Amps resistive (250V)
.2
Qty 3, form A 5 Amps resistive (125V), 5 Amps
resistive (250V).
Qty 2, form C 10 Amps resistive (125V)
.3
Motor Protection & Monitoring
.1
Provide motor monitoring and protection features as described
below. Listed motor protection functions shall be supplied with all
requisite PT’s and CT’s .
.2
RTD Monitoring, for 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs
.1
8 channels, programmable, expandable to 16 channels
.2
Meter display in oC or oF, +/- 1 percent of the following:
.1
Individual RTD temperatures
.2
Sample and hold
.3
Individual Alarm and Trip set points
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 14 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.4
Remote monitoring capability with RS-485 Standard (as
published by the Telecommunication Industry Association)
communication to Starter Overload Biasing
.3
The following ANSI protective device functions shall be provided:
.1
ANSI 14 – Speed Switch and Tachometer Trip
.2
ANSI 19 – Reduced Voltage Start
.3
ANSI 27 / 59 – Adjustable over/under voltage protection
(Off or 1 to 40 percent, time 0.1 to 90.0 sec. in 0.1 sec.
intervals, independent over and under voltage levels)
.4
ANSI 37 – Undercurrent detection (Off or 5 to 100 percent
and time 0.1 to 90.0 sec. in 0.1 sec. intervals)
ANSI 38 – Bearing RTD
.5
Other RTD
Open RTD Alarm
.6
ANSI 46 – Current imbalance detection (Off or 5 to 40
percent)
.7
ANSI 47 – Phase rotation (selectable ABC, CBA,
Insensitive, or Single Phase)
.8
ANSI 48 – Adjustable up-to-speed / stall timer (1 to 900
sec. in 1 sec. intervals)
.9
ANSI 49 – Stator RTD
.10
ANSI 50 – Instantaneous electronic overcurrent trip
.11
ANSI 51 – Electronic motor overload (Off, class 1 to 40,
separate starting and running curves available)
.4
Miscellaneous Functions:
.1
Time between starts
.2
Broken RTD alarm
.3
Short/low RTD alarm
.4
Undervoltage alarm
.5
RS-485 Modbus communications
.6
99 time/date stamped event records
.7
9 Fault Event Date/Time/Status recorder
.5
Provide the following programmable Motor Control Functions:
.1
Motor Starting/Running
.1
Realtime true torque control
.2
Ramp to Limit
.3
Full Voltage Start
.4
Initial Current (50-600 percent)
.5
Start Ramp Time (0-120 Seconds)
.6
Maximum Current (200-800 percent)
.7
Slow Speed Cylco control
.8
Dual Kick Start (0.1-10 Seconds)
.9
Dual Ramps
.10
Programmable 1-6400 Amps
.11
Motor Service Factor (1.0 to 1.99)
.12
Power Outage Ride Through
.2
Motor Stopping:
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 15 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
.4
.6
Real time true torque control
Fail Soft on Motor Overload
Auxiliary Motor Feeder Control
Optional fully programmable “S” curve or linear
pump deceleration
.5
DC Injection Braking
Interlocking/Logic:
.1
Restart Block-Backspin Timer
.2
Overload Lockout
.3
Intelligent Overload
.4
Overload Reset Time
.5
General Fault Digital Relay Output
.6
Assignable Digital Relay Outputs (2)
.7
Frequency Tracking (23 – 72 Hz)
.8
Up to Speed Indication/Contact
.9
Digital Inputs (8)
.10
Analog Input
.11
Tachometer Input
.12
User Selectable # of Auto Restarts
.13
User Selectable Fault Priority
.14
Fully Programmable 6 output Relays
.15
Programmable “Ready” Contact
Maintenance Mode
.1
Emergency Restart after Fault Lockout
.2
Selectable CT Ratios
.3
Current Limited Jog
.4
Built In Self Test: Provide built-in self testing
(BIST) capability to perform the following functions
to verify satisfactory starter operation:
.1
Sustained generation of SCR gate firing
signals for 3 minutes to allow
measurements to be made for the
presence, amplitude and duration of the
gating signals.
.2
Engage the bypass and inline contactors
one time, utilizing auxiliary contact feedback
to the micro processor to verify correct
operation of the contactors.
.5
Real Text Event Recorder
Provide the following programmable Motor Protection Functions:
.1
Motor/Machine Faults
.1
Electronic Overload
.2
Overload Reset
.3
Overload Warning
.4
Acceleration Timer
.5
Mechanical Jam/Electronic Shearpin (Selectable
Trip or Warning)
.6
Motor Thermal Capacity Protection
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 16 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.7
.8
.9
.10
.2
.7
Undercurrent Alarm (Selectable Trip or Warning)
Time Between Restarts
Trip Reset Protection
Machine Ground Fault Protection (Selectable Trip
or Warning)
Electrical System Faults
.1
Undercurrent Protection
.2
Current Imbalance (10-40 percent)
.3
Undervolt Protection (10-30 percent)
.4
Overvolt Protection (10-30 percent)
.5
Phase Reversal Protection
.6
Underfrequency Protection
.7
Overfrequency Protection
.8
Overload Alarm
.9
Generator Set Frequency Tracking
.10
Restart After Non-critical Fault
.11
Ground Fault Protection
Brush Type Synchronous Motor Only-ANSI devices.
Provide the following:
.1
#81- Frequency Trip/Alarm
.2
#13- Synchronous Speed
.3
#31- Separate Excitation
.4
#40- Machine Field Relay
.5
#56- Field Application Relay
.6
#78- Phase Angle Out of Step
.8
Ground Fault Current Detection
The Solid State Starter must comply with the UL 1053 Standard
for Safety for Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment.
Provide a Class 1 ground-fault current sensing device for
protection of equipment for use in locations that will operate to
cause a disconnecting device to open all ungrounded conductors
at predetermined values of ground-fault current in accordance with
the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Rated for service
entrance operation on 1000 amp and greater.
2.10 Pump Protection & Monitoring
.1
Basic motor control algorithm shall be sensorless torque control.
Provide the following operation via a real-time control method that
dynamically determines motor efficiency in order to provide true
torque control of the motor to control pressure overshoot, and
deceleration to eliminate water hammer. Starters utilizing open
loop voltage or closed loop current control algorithm are not
acceptable. The torque control shall provide the following:
.1
Pressure surge and transient reduction
.2
Water hammer elimination
.3
“Soft” check valve opening and closing
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
Page 17 of 18
DATE: April 2012
.2
Provide the following pump monitoring and protection, including all
related sensing devices as described below. Listed pump
protection functions shall be via the starters integral control
package .
.1
Pump jam protection
.2
Self compensating for load and voltage
.3
Low flow and run dry protection
.4
Backspin detection
.5
Shaft windup elimination on long shaft machines
.1
Factory Testing Specification:
.1
The solid state starter manufacturer shall functionally test
the starter at rated voltage on an AC three phase induction
motor (LOW VOLTAGE TESTING OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED).
.2
As a minimum, the manufacturer must test and certify
starting, stopping and logic interlock functionality.
.3
In addition, the manufacturer shall provide a load test of
the starter at rated current (including the service factor
rating).
.4
The starter manufacturer must be UL load test certified.
.5
The starter manufacturer shall issue a test report certifying
that the starter has met the design requirements of the
specification.
.2
Starters furnished herein shall undergo the following additional
factory testing:
.1
All incoming material shall be inspected and/or tested for
conformance to quality assurance specifications.
Power semiconductors shall be fully tested for proper
.2
electrical characteristics, including dv/dt and di/dt.
.3
All subassemblies shall be inspected and/or tested for
conformance to quality assurance specifications.
.4
Each completed unit shall be functionally tested prior to
shipment to ensure conformance to the Specifications.
.1
Computer Based Training (CBT) must be provided with the starter
at time of shipment. The course, supplied in DVD/CD format, will
be interactive training covering medium voltage solid state starter
design basics, equipment overview, programming and operation,
commissioning, maintenance, and service.
.2
Provide 2 Days of training prior to startup and another 2
consecutive Days for startup and operational training.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Testing
Startup & Training
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
Section 16346
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTERS
DATE: April 2012
3.3
3.4
3.5
Page 18 of 18
.3
Services shall include startup of equipment and field/classroom
training for Owner’s personnel.
.4
Startup and training shall be provided by original solid state motor
manufacturer personnel only. The use of agents, manufacturer’s
representatives, third party brand labelers, packagers, associated
integrators or manufacturer’s distributors for startup and training
shall not be permitted.
.1
Factory support must be provided by the original equipment
manufacturer 365 Days a year, 24 hours a Day.
.2
Factory support and service must be provided by original solid
state motor control manufacturer’s trained technicians. The use of
agents, manufacturer’s representatives, third party brand labelers,
packagers, associated integrators or manufacturer’s distributors
for service shall not be permitted. At the Region’s request,
verification of the technicians qualifications must be provided.
.1
Starters furnished herein shall include a three (3) year
manufacturer’s warranty. The warranty shall be provided in
writing and shall cover (from date of Total Performance of the
Work) all solid state power sections and PowerController solid
state cards with two (2) year manufacturer’s warranty (from date
put in service) on other equipment of each system.
.2
Additionally, solid state starter manufacturer shall guarantee in
writing, availability of parts, service, and technical support for said
product for a minimum of 7 years.
.3
There shall be no transfer of warranty by manufacturer/
vendor/supplier. The supplier of the Product shall be the warranty
holder and original equipment manufacturer. Third party warranty
transfer is not acceptable including any third party brand labelers,
packagers, associated integrators or manufacturer’s distributors.
.1
A complete spare parts list shall be provided at time of submittal of
shop drawings.
.2
Spare parts shall include, but not be limited to:
.1
One each of each type of Printed Circuit Board
.2
One of each type and size of control fuse
.3
Three of each type and size of power fuse
.4
One complete spare Power Cell of each type and size
used.
Factory Service
Warranty
Spare Parts
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
DISCONNECT SWITCHES – FUSED AND UNFUSED
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16414
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 2
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.2
Section 16141 – Wiring Devices
.3
Section 16335 – Temporary and Transition Electrical Equipment
.1
Submit Product data in accordance with Section 01300 –
Submittals.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16414 – Disconnect Switches – Fused and
Unfused as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Supply and install safety switches, fused or non fused, as required
complete with fuses as shown on the Drawings or required by the
OESC. Safety switches shall be quick make and quick break
construction with safety interlock and HP ratings as indicated on
the Contract Documents.
.2
Provide for padlocking in off switch position by three locks.
.3
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when the handle
is in the ON position.
.4
Fuses: size as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.5
Fuseholders: relocatable and suitable without adaptors, for type
and size of fuse indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.6
Quick-make, quick-break action.
.7
ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.8
Switches are to be housed in an EEMAC 12 enclosure when
located indoors and EEMAC 4 enclosure when located outdoors.
.9
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Schneider Canada Inc. (Federal Pioneer).
.2
TECO-Westinghouse Motors (Canada) Inc.
.3
Schneider Canada Inc. (Square D).
.4
Eaton Yale Company (Cutler Hammer).
Product Data
Measurement and Payment
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Disconnect Switches
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
DISCONNECT SWITCHES – FUSED AND UNFUSED
DATE: April 2012
2.2
Section 16414
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 2
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Indicate the name of the load controlled on a size 4 nameplate.
.1
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 16441
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 2
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 –
Submittals.
.2
Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type,
quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16441 – Panelboards Breaker Type as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Panelboards: Product of one manufacturer.
.1
Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
.2
In addition to CSA requirements, the manufacturer's
nameplate must show fault current that panel including
breakers has been built to withstand.
.2
200 – 600 V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 22,000 A
symmetrical interrupting capacity or as indicated in the Contract
Drawings.
.3
Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on the left
and even numbered breakers on the right, with each breaker
identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number
and phase.
.4
Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of
branch circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
.5
Provide two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike.
.6
Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.
.7
Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.
.8
Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges.
.9
Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel.
Submittals
Measurement and Payment
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
Panelboards
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
DATE: April 2012
2.2
2.3
2.4
Section 16441
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 2
Custom Built Panelboard Assemblies
.1
125 mm relay section on both sides of panels as indicated on the
Drawings for installation of low voltage remote control switching
components.
.2
Double stack panels as indicated in the Contract Drawings.
.3
Contactors in mains as indicated in the Contract Drawings.
.4
Feed through lugs as indicated in the Contract Drawings.
.5
Isolated ground bus.
.1
Breakers:
.1
Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in
panelboards except as indicated otherwise in the Contract
Drawings.
.2
Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of
panel to suit cable entry. When mounted vertically, down
position should open breaker.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010
- Electrical General Requirements.
.2
Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved as indicated in
the Contract Drawings.
.3
Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2
engraved as indicated in the Contract Drawings.
.4
Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location
and load of each circuit.
.1
Locate panelboards as indicated on the Contract Drawings and
mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2
Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards.
Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard.
.3
Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements or as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.4
Connect loads to circuits.
.5
Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with
respective neutral identified.
Breakers
Equipment Identification
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
DATE: May 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 16505
2006-08-30
Page 1 of 3
GENERAL
Related Sections
.1
Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements
.1
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes, codes and
standards, and all amendments thereto.
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
ANSI C82.1, Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp
Ballasts.
2.
ANSI C82.4 , Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge
and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps.
.2
American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)
ANSI/IEEE C62.41- 1991, Recommended
1.
Practices for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
.3
ASTM International (ASTM)
1.
ASTM F1137, Specification for Phosphate/Oil and
Phosphate/Organic Corrosion Protective Coatings
for Fasteners.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16505 – Lighting Equipment as indicated in
Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 –
Submittals.
.2
Submit complete photometric data prepared by an independent
testing laboratory for luminaires where specified in the Contract
Documents. The data shall be submitted to the Consultant for
approval.
.1
Supply and install lighting fixtures of the type and number as
shown on the lighting fixtures schedule in the Contract Drawings.
.1
All LED fixtures shall be 120 VAC and supplied complete with
drivers. These outdoor fixtures shall be surface mounted or
References
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
General
Lamps
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
DATE: May 2012
Section 16505
2006-08-30
Page 2 of 3
supplied complete with an adjustable aiming bracket and service
mounting box where required. Drivers shall be suitable for starting
at -35ºC.
2.3
.2
All 32 Watt rapid start fluorescent lamps shall be colour
temperature 3500 K rated 20,000 hours, 2,900 lumens initial,
unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.
.1
All standard fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with
high power factor, rapid start ballasts for operation on 120
V. Ballasts shall be complete with non-automatic reset
thermal protection. The ballasts shall meet the
specifications and requirements of the Electrical Testing
Laboratories and Certified Ballast Manufacturers'
Association.
.3
All 54 watt high output fluorescent lamps shall be colour
temperature 3500 K rated 20,000 hours, 5000 lumens initial,
unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.
.1
All standard fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with
high power factor, rapid start ballasts for operation on 120
V. Ballasts shall be complete with non-automatic reset
thermal protection. The ballasts shall meet the
specification and requirements of Electrical Testing
Laboratories and Certified Ballast Manufacturers'
Association.
.4
Approved manufacturers/suppliers:
.1
Royal Philips Electronics NV
.2
General Electric Company
.3
Osram Sylvania LTD.
.1
Fluorescent ballast: CBM and CSA certified, energy efficient type,
High Frequency electronic design.
.1
Rating: voltage as indicated in the Contract Documents, for
use with 2/3 -32 W, rapid start lamps or 4-54 W high output
lamps.
RFI/EMI suppression circuit in accordance with: FCC
.2
(CFR47) Part 18, sub-part C, Class A and Part 15, subpart B, Class B.
.3
Totally encased and designed for 40 degree Celsius
ambient temperature.
.4
Power factor: minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp
lumens.
.5
Crest factor: 1.7 maximum current, 2.0 maximum voltage.
.6
Capacitor: thermally protected.
.7
Thermal protection: non-resettable on coil.
.8
Harmonics: 1 % maximum THD, including 49th for
electronic discrete and hybrid ballasts.
.9
Operating frequency of electronic ballast: 25 khz minimum.
Ballasts
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
DATE: May 2012
.10
.11
.12
2.4
Ballast Factor: greater than 0.85.
Sound rated: Class A+.
Mounting: integral with luminaire.
Emergency Lighting
.1
2.5
Section 16505
2006-08-30
Page 3 of 3
Approved Suppliers:
.1
Lumacell Inc. a Division of Thomas & Betts Ltd.
.2
EmergiLite, Thomas & Betts Ltd.
Lighting Control Devices
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Wall Sensor Switch, 1-circuit, line voltage, passive IR:
Watt Stopper #DW-100
Wall Sensor Switch, 2-circuit, line voltage, passive IR:
Watt Stopper #DW-200
Ceiling Sensor, line voltage, 360-degree coverage, dual
technology: LeGrand Group, WattStopper #DT-355
Ceiling Sensor, low voltage, 360 degree coverage, dual
technology, rated for hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1
areas: Protech Protection Technologies Inc., Protech
Piramid SDI-77XL2-EX
Power pack, 1-circult, dual voltage 120/277 VAC: Watt
Stopper #BZ-100
Power pack, 2-circuit: Watt Stopper #LC-100
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Installation
.1
Locate and install luminaires as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.1
Connect luminaires to lighting circuits:
.1
Through flexible or rigid conduit for all luminaire designs .
.1
For suspended ceiling installations support luminaires from ceiling
grid in accordance with local inspection requirements.
.1
Align luminaires which are mounted in continuous rows to form
straight uninterrupted line.
.2
Align luminaires which are mounted individually parallel or
perpendicular to building grid lines.
Wiring
Luminaire Supports
Luminaire Alignment
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 1 of 14
DATE: April 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
Summary
.1
Comply with Division 1 – General Requirements and Section
16010 – Basic Electrical Requirements.
.1
Section 11900 – Diesel Storage Tank and Monitoring System
.2
Section 11905 – Fuel Oil Pumping System
.1
Comply with the latest edition of the following statutes, codes and
standards, and all amendments thereto.
.1
British Standards Institution
1.
BS5514 (ISO 8528) Reciprocating Internal
Combustion Engine Driven Alternating Current
Generator Set.
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
1.
CSA B139, with Ontario amendments: Ontario
Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment.
2.
CSA C22.2 No. 100 Motors and Generators.
3.
CSA-C282 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for
Buildings.
.3
DIN 6271 Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine
Driven Alternating Current Generator Set Performance
Standard Reference Conditions, Declaration of Power,
Fuel Consumption and Lube Oil Consumption.
.4
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada
(EEMAC)
1.
EEMAC Standard MG1 Motors and Generators.
2.
EEMAC Standard M1-6 Motors and Generators.
3.
EEMAC Standard MG2 Safety Standard for Motors
and Generators.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16620 – Emergency Power Generators as
indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
Emergency power generation system includes three diesel engine
driven generators.
.2
The Contractor will have the final responsibility for the supply,
supervision of installation, and integration of this equipment with
the 4160 V switchgear. Since the 4160 V switchgear controls are
Related Sections
References
Measurement and Payment
Design Requirements
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 2 of 14
DATE: April 2012
integrally tied into the generator controls, the generator
manufacturer will coordinate with the switchgear supplier to
ensure fully operational switchgear and generator controls.
.3
The Contractor shall supply a system suitable to supply, without
interruption, the maximum essential load indicated in the Contract
Documents for an unlimited duration under the ambient conditions
indicated in the Contract Documents. Intermittent ratings of limited
durations are not acceptable.
.4
The Contractor shall supply a system capable of starting and
running the essential loads under any load condition.
.5
The Contractor shall supply a system capable of connecting to
load when the output is at a minimum of 90 percent of the normal
voltage and frequency. Within 3 seconds after connection to load,
100 percent output nominal voltage and frequency shall be
available at the generator terminals.
.6
The Contractor shall supply a direct injection, cold starting type
engine suitable for starting in an ambient temperature of -2
degrees Celsius without the use of battery powered heaters.
.7
The Contractor shall rate engine output for standby power and
generator set application as defined by BS5514 (ISO 8528) or
DIN 6271. Derate net engine output power by taking into account
engine driven accessories, 30 degree Celsius ambient air
temperature and the project Site elevation above sea level.
.8
Derated net engine output power at engine flywheel must not be
less than the generator output power divided by the generator
efficiency.
(Engine Shaft Power
= Rated Electrical Output Power)
Generator Efficiency
.9
Engine shall be capable of operating continuously with loads down
to 30 percent of the rated capacity and with periodic intervals of
no-load.
.10
The Contractor shall supply a system with the generator rated to
operate at 1800 RPM.
.11
The Contractor shall supply a radiator cooling system adequate
for engine operating under full load and overload conditions in an
ambient temperature of 30 degrees Celsius.
.12
The Contractor shall size the radiator so that the engine jacket
water does not exceed 90 degrees Celsius under operating
conditions.
.13
Engine jacket water fouling (cleanliness) factor shall be a
minimum of 75 percent.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 3 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.14
The generators shall include a speed governor to regulate the
steady state speed within 2 percent, no-load to full-load and fullload to no-load.
.15
The generators shall include speed regulation on the starting of
motors and for peak no-load to full-load and full-load to no-load
transients shall be within 8 percent.
.16
Speed stability of the generators at the constant load shall be
within 1 percent and free from hunting and oscillations.
.17
Speed recovery of the generators, from the instant of load change
to steady state, to occur within 3 seconds.
.18
The Contractor shall size the silencer so that back pressure on the
engine operating at 110 percent load will not exceed the engine
manufacturer's recommended value.
.19
The Contractor shall supply a 24 V battery with sufficient capacity
to crank the engine, with 10 degree Celsius ambient temperature,
for 60 seconds continuously without the battery nominal voltage
reducing below 75 percent minimum.
.20
The Contractor shall supply a synchronous generator conforming
to EEMAC Standard MG1, capable of operating at 110 percent of
the nominal rating for one hour in any 12 hour period without any
reduction in the life span.
.21
Generator and voltage regulator shall be capable of supplying 300
percent of full load current for a minimum of 10 seconds under
fault and motor starting conditions.
.22
Automatic voltage regulator to control steady state output within 2
percent, no-load to full load, between unity and 80 percent power
factor lagging.
.23
Provide for a fast transient response of the automatic voltage
regulator to ensure that transient generator output voltage dips do
not exceed 25 percent when carrying a load of 700 kW and
another 1000 HP motor is started using a soft starter.
.24
Voltage recovery time for load change to steady state shall be a
maximum of 2 seconds.
.25
Voltage regulation from no load to full load shall be within 1
percent.
.26
Generator and automatic voltage regulator shall be suitable for
supplying loads with significant harmonic content such as variable
frequency drives, solid state starters and similar items.
.27
The Contractor shall limit total vibration transmission to a
maximum of 2 percent.
.28
Noise from the generator enclosure shall not exceed a maximum
of 75 dB at 7 m from the enclosure with the generator operating
under full rated load.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 4 of 14
DATE: April 2012
1.6
1.7
Submittals
.1
The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings,
information and data:
.1
Dimensioned and scaled mechanical drawings of
equipment, components and auxiliaries.
.2
Schematic and wiring diagrams detailing system
interlocks, internal wiring and field wiring connections.
Indicate the size of wiring and identify the wire and
terminal blocks. Indicate the colour coding used in wiring.
.3
Manufacturer's data sheets and performance curves
providing details of the engine and generator
characteristics.
.4
Dimensioned drawings of the control panel outline and the
layout of internal and external components.
.5
Bills of Material.
.6
Details of vibration isolation.
.7
Fuel oil piping connection details.
.8
Engine exhaust and silencer details.
.9
Details of space requirements around the generator for
maintenance purposes.
.10
Noise and emissions data.
.11
P & ID in both a hardcopy and softcopy (Autocad). The
Consultant will re-assign permanent tag numbers to all
devices in the P & ID. The Contractor shall use the new
number for all subsequent drawing submissions and
documentation.
.12
The Contractor shall submit four copies of the installation
and start-up procedure manual to the Consultant prior to
delivery of the emergency power generator system.
.13
The Contractor shall submit operating and maintenance
manuals including, but not limited to the following:
1.
Complete parts list
2.
Spare parts list
3.
List of approved spare parts suppliers
4.
Operating instructions
5.
Maintenance instructions
6.
Detailed troubleshooting procedures and fault
correction schedules
7.
Data sheets and performance curves
8.
Certified shop test results
9.
Final record drawings
.1
The Contractor shall test equipment, components and auxiliaries
to ensure their correct operation and function prior to shipment.
The Contractor shall test actual safety devices and circuits and
record actuating levels. Jumper tests are not acceptable.
Quality Assurance
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 5 of 14
DATE: April 2012
PART 2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
.2
The Contractor shall operate the engine and generator set for a
minimum of three hours under full load, a minimum of one hour
under varying load and one hour at 110 percent of full load.
.3
The Contractor shall advise the Consultant a minimum of five
Working Days prior to carrying out tests so that the Consultant
may witness tests, if required.
.4
Submit two sets of certified test results to the Consultant prior to
shipment.
.1
Standby power rating of 2000 kW (2500 kVA) @ 0.8 Power factor
lagging, to meet EPA Tier 2 emission limits.
.2
Output supply 4160 V, 3-phase, 60 Hz.
.3
Grounding for generator set shall be connected to a high
resistance plant grounding system with a 10 A neutral grounding
resistor. Generator supplier to ensure that the generator set
provided is compatible with this grounding configuration.
.4
All process area loads will be started in sequence with a time
delay from the SCADA.
.1
Toromont/Caterpillar
.2
Cummins Ontario Inc.
.3
Harper Detroit Diesel Ltd.
.1
Engine
.1
Design: Four stroke cycle, pressurized induction, turbo
charged, radiator cooled, suitable for operating on
commercial grade #2 diesel fuel oil.
.2
Block heater: 120 V, 60 Hz, rated to ensure that the engine
will start without labouring in an ambient temperature of
minus 2 degrees Celsius.
.2
Cooling System
.1
Radiator cooling system: Radiator set mounted complete
with inlet cooling and outlet ducting flanges.
.2
Fan: pusher type, engine driven with V-belts.
.3
Flexible canvas boot: flanged on both sides, minimum
length of 100 mm, mounted on the front of the radiator.
.4
Water circulating pump: Engine driven.
.5
Make-up and expansion tanks: With filling cap and vent
over-flow pipe. For filling caps located higher than
GENERAL
Generator Set Requirements
Manufacturers
Manufactured Units
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 6 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
1500 mm above the floor, furnish a level indicator which is
visible and legible from the floor level.
Tank low level condition: Operate the engine shut-down
switch to open the engine start circuit.
Temperature regulating valve: With a bypass feature,
located in the cylinder head water outlet.
Piping: Furnish all necessary water pipes, flexible hoses
and similar items.
Drain cocks: Located to completely the drain system.
Safety protection: Provide equipment guards on all moving
parts.
Coolant: Suitable for minus 40 degrees Celsius. Furnish
first filling.
.3
Speed Governor
.1
Type: Electronic.
.2
Manual speed adjustment: Micrometer screw type,
shutdown lever and overspeed stop.
.4
Fuel Oil System
.1
Injection equipment: Fuel pumps and injectors.
.2
Fuel rack or shutdown solenoid: Energized to run,
maximum fuel at the start. Fuel solenoid valves are not
acceptable.
.3
Fuel filters: Replaceable element type.
.4
Fuel piping: Secured to the engine for fuel supply, injection
and bleed return with bronze check valves and cocks.
.5
Fuel oil line connectors: Flexible, bronze corrugated type
for suction and return lines, located on a horizontal plane,
secured at one end of the engine base, Type BA by United
Flexible.
.6
Day tank unit: Sub base type with threaded pipe
connections, suction pump, high level and low level alarm
switches, fuel gauge tank mounting brackets, ULC
approved.
.7
Fuel supply accessories: Nippled manual gate shut-off
valve and primary fuel filter with sedimenter.
.8
Provision for connection to supply and return fuel piping
from an external fuel tank.
.5
Sub-Base Fuel Tank
.1
The generator shall come complete with a sub-base,
double walled, fuel tank (day tank).
The tank shall have 3 hours fuel storage capability.
.2
.3
The tank shall have a leak detector alarm.
.4
The tank shall have float switches for level indication for
alarm and monitoring to the plant PLC/SCADA, and for
fuel filling requirements, as well as additional high and low
level floats which shall be wired to the control panel as
spare fuel level outputs.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 7 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.5
The day tank will be filled from an external underground
storage tank supplied by the Contractor.
.6
Engine Lubrication System
.1
Engine lubrication system: Full pressure type.
.2
Oil pump: Engine driven gear type with strainer and
adjustable pressure relief valve.
.3
Sump drain pipe: With gate valve and plug, extend 75 mm
beyond the bedplate.
.4
First oil filling: Shipped in containers for Site filling.
.5
Engine must start within 10 seconds of receiving a start
command. Provide a suitable lubrication system to meet
this requirement.
.7
Engine Air Intake and Exhaust Systems
.1
Air intake filters: Dry replaceable element type located
close to the inlet manifold.
.2
Exhaust pyrometer: One in each manifold, with remote
bulb, 75 mm dial, range 0 to 110 percent minimum,
Millivolt type by Thermo Electric (Canada) Limited.
.3
Turbo charger: Exhaust gas driven type.
.4
Operator protection: Insulating exhaust blanket on
manifold, piping, turbo charger, and similar items.
.5
Exhaust connector: Flexible bellows with ANSI flange for
installation between the exhaust manifold and the silencer.
.6
Exhaust silencer: Residential grade with ANSI flanges,
condensate drain cock and plug.
.8
Engine Starting System
.1
Cranking motor: Electrical, 24 V DC with positive engaging
gear and solenoid.
.2
Starting batteries: Storage, lead acid, heavy duty type,
hard rubber case, HYCAP C8D by Exide Electronics
Canada Inc.
.3
Battery support rack: With support legs, acid resistant
paint finish.
.4
Battery charger: 120 V, 60 Hz input, 10 A, 24 V DC output,
automatic boost and float charging, solid state voltage
control and recycle timer, input and output circuit breakers,
manual-automatic selector switch, separately adjustable
boost and float rates, current limit protection, battery low
level alarm relay, DC voltmeter and ammeter with 5
percent accuracy. Vulcan Electric Inc., DS12/ Series.
.5
Battery charger location: Within the generator enclosure.
.9
Engine Gauges
.1
Furnish gauges equipped with, or indicating, the following:
1.
Lube oil pressure.
2.
Lube oil temperature.
3.
Tachometer.
4.
Exhaust pyrometer.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 8 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.2
.3
5.
Jacket water temperature.
Tachometer: 1 percent accuracy, scale 0-120 percent
minimum of rated speed.
Gauges may be included as part of the generator set
controller.
.10
Safety Switches
.1
Sensors: Adjustable type with settings sealed by locknuts
or Sealtite fittings, directly accessible for ease of
maintenance and replacement.
.2
Centrifugal speed switch: Direct mechanical drive, two
element unit with independently adjustable normally closed
contacts for cranking cutout and normally open contacts
for overspeed, snap action.
.3
Solid state speed switch: Direct mechanical drive from
generator.
.4
Cranking cutout back-up protection: Where solid state
speed switch is furnished, provide an oil pressure sensor.
.5
Furnish the following safety switches:
1.
Lube oil low pressure.
2.
Overspeed switch.
3.
Cranking cut-out.
4.
Jacket water high temperature.
.11
Engine Wiring and Terminal Box
.1
Safety switch and control device wiring: Heat and oil
resistant, run in a harness secured to the engine and
terminated in the engine terminal box. Number wires
corresponding to the schematic and wiring diagrams with
Type Z wire markers by Wieland Electric Inc.
.2
Terminal box: EEMAC 12 dust tight enclosure with
numbered terminal blocks corresponding to the schematic
and wiring diagrams. Furnish a separate junction box for
120 V powered circuits.
.12
Generator
.1
Design: 4160 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, wye connected, 1800
RPM, horizontal, protected enclosure.
.2
Insulation: Class F with 105 degree Celsius temperature
rise above 40 degree Celsius ambient temperature.
.3
Field supply: Brushless exciter with removable shaft
mounted diodes.
.4
Terminals: For each phase, wye point and ground, readily
accessible in a diagonally split, gasketted terminal box.
.5
Bearings: One or two as required, anti-friction type,
minimum B10 life of 50,000 hours.
.6
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Suppression:
Commercial standard.
.7
Current transformers: Primary rating as required,
secondary rating 5A, for each phase and neutral, for
differential protection.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 9 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.13
Voltage Regulator
.1
Design: Automatic, static type with fail safe feature so that
no overvoltage will occur if the regulator fails, three phase
sensing, protection against fault during underspeed
running, located in the generator control panel, capable of
voltage build-up without batteries.
.2
Control potentiometers: Clockwise rotation to increase
related function.
Voltage adjustment potentiometer or tapped choke: To 5
.3
percent above and below nominal voltage.
.14
Drive Coupling
.1
Coupling: Torsionally rigid flexible steel disc type for
connecting single bearing generator to engine with SAE
housing. Flexible grid spring type, for connecting the two
bearing generator to the engine.
.15
Assembly
.1
Base: Common for generator and engine, rigid heavy duty
steel, machined pads, capable of maintaining alignment
during transportation, installation and operation. If
necessary, accommodate a crankcase oil drain pipe.
.2
Vibration isolators: To support the base and assembly,
visible steel spring type, levelling bolts, externally
adjustable mechanical side snubbers, sound dampening
pads. Type #LK by Korfund Dynamics
.3
Personnel protection: Safety guards around the exposed
rotating equipment.
.16
Generator Control Panel
.1
Enclosure: Compartmented, rigid, free standing, dead
front, EEMAC 1, suitable for floor mounting in the
generator enclosure.
Access to equipment, components, wiring and
.2
terminations: Front only.
.3
Cable entry: Bottom. Furnish cable and wire supports.
.4
Doors: Removable, gasketted, pad-lockable with
concealed hinges, 120 degrees minimum opening arc and
internal document pocket.
.5
Ground bus: Tin-plated copper, minimum 6 mm x 50 mm
cross section, extending the complete length of the control
panel.
.6
Engine Control Section:
1.
Control selector switch: Three position, rotary,
positive action type with wiping contacts, screw
terminals, door mounted, marked AUTO-OFFMANUAL (TEST), shall be located in the generator
breaker cell in the switchgear enclosure.
2.
Automatic start circuit: Initiated by the closing of a
dry contact in the Automatic Transfer Switch.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 10 of 14
DATE: April 2012
3.
.7
.8
Cranking control circuit: Operate with a centrifugal
speed switch or a solid state speed switch on the
engine.
4.
Over-crank timer: Pneumatic or solid state,
adjustable 3 to 30 seconds minimum, single
function with lock-out or failure to start. Thermal
time relays are not acceptable.
5.
Cranking solenoid and fuel rack solenoid control
relays: Heavy duty industrial type, minimum contact
rating of 30 A.
Engine shut down control circuit: Operated by
6.
safety switches, whether the selector switch is in
the auto or manual position.
7.
Building services relay: Heavy duty industrial type,
dc operating coil, four form-C dry contacts rated
120 V AC, 10A minimum to operate the engine
room building services equipment when the engine
operates.
Annunciator Section
1.
Annunciator: Door mounted, clearly labelled, dc
powered, individual visual type with long life LED
cluster type lamps removable from the front without
the use of special tools, manual alarm reset.
2.
Load: 0.3A maximum on engine failure.
3.
Relays: Plug in type, contacts rated 120 V, 10A
minimum. Furnish a common alarm relay with a
minimum of two form-C, dry contacts for external
connection.
4.
Solid state annunciator relays are not acceptable.
5.
Annunciation conditions:
.1
Overcrank, nominally set at 20 seconds
.2
Overspeed, nominally set at 110 percent of
rated speed
.3
Low oil pressure, nominal time delay of 10
seconds
.4
High engine temperature
.5
High lube oil temperature
.6
Generator circuit breaker open
.7
Low engine temperature
.8
Low battery level
.9
Low fuel supply
.10
Two spare points
Generator Control Section
1.
Meters: Digital, flush mounted type in the generator
breaker cell.
2.
Include the following functions: Amps, Volts,
Frequency, KW and Elapsed Time (Hours).
3.
Current transformers: 5A secondary, 1 percent
accuracy class.
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 11 of 14
DATE: April 2012
4.
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.17
Voltage transformers: 4160V/120 V ratio, 1 percent
accuracy class.
5.
Furnish ground fault indication.
Wiring and Terminal Blocks:
1.
Shop wiring: Copper, stranded conductor, RW90
insulation, #14 AWG minimum for control and #12
AWG minimum for power and current transformer
wiring. Wiring to the door mounted equipment shall
be the extra flexible type. Wire completely and
connect external connection wires to the terminal
blocks.
2.
Colour coding: Insulation colour to conform to the
requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
Where the Ontario Electrical Safety Code does not
provide specific requirements, furnish the following:
.1
Ground :
green
.2
Neutral :
white
.3
Phases :
black
.4
DC control:
blue
.5
AC control:
red
.6
Externally energized controls and interlocks:
yellow
3.
Wire identification: Oil resistant, type Z markers by
Wieland Electric Inc. at each end of the conductor
corresponding to the schematic and wiring
diagrams.
4.
Wiring arrangement: Adequately supported, neat,
protected from mechanical damage by shields and
grommets. Wiring between the frame and the door
shall be vertical torsion type over the hinge side.
5.
Terminal blocks: Tubular screw type with barriers
and labels. Furnish 20 percent spare.
Control fuses: Adequately rated, mounted in barrier type
mounts with ground connection lugs.
Component identification labels: Engraved lamacoid, black
with 5 mm minimum white letters, for internal and external
components, secured with stainless steel screws. Stick-on
labels are not acceptable.
Warning sign: Engraved lamacoid, red with 12 mm
minimum white letters, indicating the sources of supply,
points of isolation and that the engine may start
automatically at any time. Secure with stainless steel
screws.
Panel auxiliary interior luminaire: Manually switched, 120 V
AC with dc auxiliary.
All contacts and I/O signals are specified to be wired to
terminals which are suitable for connection to field wiring.
Interface with external system
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 12 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.4
Generator panels shall communicate with the generator
master control panel (GMCP) provided as part of the
switchgear control system.
The Contractor shall ensure that all signals required to be
sent to the plant SCADA system are available to the
GMCP. This can be achieved either by hardwired signals
or through communication link between the panels.
The Contractor shall provide a list of hardwired and
softwired signals during the shop drawing submission
process.
The following signals shall be made available to the GMCP
at a minimum:
1.
Generator running
2.
Generator fault
3.
Battery low
4.
Crank failed
5.
Diesel tank level
6.
Low Fuel level
7.
High Fuel level
8.
Fuel tank leak
9.
Power factor
10.
Power output
11.
Generator voltage
.18
Accessories
.1
Engine oil drip tray: Minimum 1.5 mm galvanized steel with
50 mm lip, located between the base and vibration
isolators, extended to protect the floor and readily
removable without disturbing any component.
.2
Panel mounted operation and maintenance summary
instruction sheet: Steel backplate mounted with glass front
or clear varnish protection, suitable for mounting on the
side of the control panel.
.3
Spare parts and tools storage cabinet: Steel, wall mounted
with a padlockable hinged door and sized to house tools,
spare parts and one set of manuals.
.4
Tools: Set of standard and special tools to carry out
routine maintenance.
.1
The following equipment shall be installed in the Generator room:
.1
Generator set,
.2
Built in day sub base fuel tank,
.3
Muffler,
.4
Control panel,
.5
Louvers and bird screens,
.6
Associated wiring, lifting and anchoring provisions.
.2
The entire package shall be manufactured and pre-engineered
such that the only exterior connections required are fuel, power,
Equipment
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 13 of 14
DATE: April 2012
and security monitoring. Additionally the exterior connections
must be suitable for connection to the exhaust stack which shall
be provided by the Contractor.
2.5
2.6
.3
Hoisting Provisions
.1
The unit shall include provisions for hoisting such as lifting
eyes at each end of the base which shall be capable of
lifting the enclosure with all equipment installed.
.4
Safety Equipment
.1
The Contractor shall provide a portable, ULC approved,
multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguisher (ABS type)
located by the primary exit door.
.2
The Contractor shall provide warning signs “Caution,
Generator may start at any time” which shall be included
on the generator enclosure and inside each door.
.3
The Contractor shall provide two emergency battery units
complete with 2 heads per unit.
.4
The Contractor shall provide two emergency stop push
buttons, within the generator enclosure, one on either side
of the generator.
.5
Exhaust Piping Installation Requirements
.1
Provide all required engine-generator set exhaust from the
generator set stub stack on the top of the pre-engineered
generator to the generator exhaust stack.
.2
Confirm the minimum piping size indicated by the
generator manufacturer to ensure that there is no
excessive back pressure. Prior to piping installation,
confirm the size of the pipe required and provide to suit.
.3
Provide a perforated type 304 stainless steel semi-circular
guard around all exposed exhaust piping outside the
building where the piping could be touched by personnel
standing on the grade.
.4
Provide engineered pipe supports to support the exhaust
piping from the generator set stub stack on the top of the
pre-engineered generator enclosure to the generator
exhaust stack.
.1
Provide:
.1
Two sets of drive belts.
.2
Two lube oil filter elements.
.3
Three fuel oil filter elements.
.4
Two sets of electrical expendable items such as fuses,
lamps and similar items.
.1
Shop Assembly
Spare Parts
Fabrication
CONTRACT NO. T-12-16
Section 16620
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATORS
Page 14 of 14
DATE: April 2012
.1
.2
PART 3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Alignment: Align the engine and generator horizontally and
vertically within 0.05 mm using steel shims where required.
Secure the units to the base with machine bolts.
Dowels: For two bearing generator units, dowel the feet of
the engine and generator.
.2
Finish
.1
Engine and generator assembly: Prime prepared surfaces
and finish with two coats of heat and oil resistant
machinery paint. Do not paint rubber and PVC hoses,
wiring harnesses or machined surfaces.
.2
Generator control panel: Prime with rust inhibiting paint
and finish with oil resistant paint.
.3
Colour: Manufacturer’s standard.
.1
Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical
representative to carry out the manufacturer's recommended field
tests and to start up unit.
.2
Submit a field test and start-up report to the Consultant upon
completion of field tests.
.1
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section
01640 – Manufacturers’ Services.
.2
Do not combine testing and startup with training. Testing and
startup time shall not be used for manufacturer’s warranty repairs.
.1
The Contractor shall provide training in accordance with Section
01820 – Demonstration and Training.
EXECUTION
Field Quality Control
Manufacturer’s Services
Training
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section
01430 – Operation and Maintenance Data.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
PART 1.
1.1
1.2
Section 16741
Page 1 of 34
GENERAL
Introduction
.1
The Regions’ facility is a sewage pumping station. The plant
operates 24hrs/Day, 7 Days/week. The network follows a hub and
spoke topology. The structured cabling system shall service the
entire Leslie Street Sewage Pumping Station.
.2
This communications system must satisfy the requirements of the
Ethernet/IP based integrated Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition (SCADA) network used for the pump station processes
and where communication systems are specified elsewhere within
the Contract Documents.
.1
The following definitions shall apply throughout this Section:
.1
“Structured Cabling System (SCS)” refers to the site’s
telecommunications cabling infrastructure which consists
of the following subsystems: network room, fiber-optic
trunk cabling, fiber-optic backbone cabling, horizontal
cabling system and Work Area Outlets.
.2
“Fiber-Optic Trunk Cabling” refers to the trunk cabling
providing interconnection between network core switch.
The trunk consists of the trunk cables, mechanical
terminations and patch cords or jumpers used for crossconnection.
.3
“Fiber-Optic Backbone Cabling” refers to the backbone
cabling providing interconnection between the Network
Access Closets (NAC) and the network core switch. It
consists of the backbone cables, mechanical terminations
and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-tobackbone cross-connection.
.4
“Horizontal Cabling System” refers to the horizontal cabling
(copper Ethernet cables) extending from the Work Area
Outlet (WAO) to the Network Access Closet (NAC) and
Remote I/O (RIO) panels. The system consists of
horizontal cabling, Work Area Outlets, cable terminations
and cross-connections.
.5
“Station Cable” refers to the connection between the Work
Area Outlet and the end field device (i.e. PLC, OIT, etc.). It
consists of cords, adapters, and other transmission
electronics.
.6
“Work Area Outlet” provides the cross-connect between
the horizontal cabling system and the station cable.
.7
“Pathways” provide network connectivity between two or
more points.
.8
“Spaces” are the rooms and areas where media is
terminated and/or communications equipment is installed.
Definitions
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.3
1.4
Section 16741
Page 2 of 34
“Network Core Switch Closet”: A 48 cm (19 inch) rack
enclosure constructed to support the termination of cables
(fiber-optic, CAT6 UTP and power) and the installation of
Cisco Systems, Inc. Catalyst 4506 Ethernet Switch(es)
referred to as core switch(es).
“Network Access Closet (NAC)”: A 48 cm (19 inch) rack
enclosure constructed to support the termination of cables
(fiber-optic, CAT6 UTP, power) and the installation of
Cisco Systems, Inc. Catalyst 2960 Ethernet Switch(es).
Network Access Closets are installed in the process areas
and provide connectivity of the end field devices (i.e.
Programmable Automation Controller (PAC) enclosure
,PLC, HMI, VFD’s, etc.) to the Network Core Switch.
“Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Panel Closet”: A 48 cm
(19 inch) rack enclosure constructed to support the
termination of the fiber-optic backbone cables. The
enclosure is installed in the SCADA Server Room. Fiber
optic patch cables are used to interconnect the Cisco
Systems, Inc. Catalyst 4506 core switch in the Network
Core Switch Closet with the fiber-optic patch enclosures in
the Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Closet.
“UTP” : Un-shielded Twisted Pair
“SCADA Server Closet”: A 48 cm (19 inch) enclosure
constructed to support the installation of computer servers
and associated hardware. The enclosure is located within
the SCADA Server Room.
Order of Precedence
.1
If the requirements of this Section and other Sections in the
Specifications are in conflict, the requirements of this Section shall
take precedence. The Contractor shall meet or exceed the
requirements for the cabling system described in this Section.
.2
Where manufacturer and model numbers are provided within the
Contract Drawings for network related equipment and the same
equipment is specified within these Specifications, the
manufacturer and model number specified within the Contract
Drawings shall take precedence.
.1
The complete cabling system shall be supported by a system
warranty.
.2
The communications system requires a structured cabling system
and associated enclosures and components.
.3
After installation, submit all documentation to support the warranty
in accordance with the manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and
to apply for said warranty on behalf of the Region within the
requirements stipulated by the manufacturer’s warranty. The
Warranty
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 3 of 34
warranty will cover the components and labour associated with the
repair/replacement of any failed link, within the warranty period.
1.5
.4
Where the Contractor selects the Product, ensure that the
Products/components of the cable system are eligible for the 20
year certification provided by the cabling system Subcontractor
(as described in subsection 1.4.7 below) and include the
warranties as described herein. Ensure that all terms and
conditions of the cabling system manufacturer are satisfied and
complete.
.5
The Contractor shall ensure that UTP and fiber optic cabling and
components meet or exceed the specifications (including
installation) of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 568-B.3 and 569B.
.6
Performance Warranty: Provide a certified fiber optic system and
copper CAT6 system warranted, by the cabling system
Subcontractor and Product manufacturer, that the workmanship
and materials perform in accordance with the Specifications for a
period of twenty (20) years. In the event of performance
degradation, the Subcontractor who is the installer shall provide
necessary troubleshooting and repairs. Troubleshooting shall
commence within 48 hours of notification by telephone to the
Contractor; and performance required to resolve issues resulting
in disruption of normal operation shall be completely restored
within 120 hours of initial Contractor notification.
.1
The communications system requires a structured cabling system
and associated enclosures and components.
.2
Furnish all labour, supervision, tooling, miscellaneous mounting
hardware, enclosures and consumables for each cabling system
installed.
.3
Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured
Cabling System (SCS) with enclosures and subsystem
components to include cable, termination hardware, supporting
hardware, and any required miscellaneous items. The SCS shall
serve as a vehicle for transport of data signals throughout the
network from designated demarcation points to Work Area Outlets
located at various desk, workstation, control panel and other
locations as indicated on the Contract Drawings and described
herein.
.4
Furnish and install cable and conduit for structured cabling links
required under the Contract.
.5
Fiber-optic backbone cable shall terminate to Network Core
Switch Fiber Patch Closets located in the SCADA server room.
.6
Provide all equipment and links as part of the Contract including,
but not limited to, Network Access Closets, Patch Panels, Power
Distribution, and Fiber-Optic Backbone Cables to areas within this
Scope of Work
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 4 of 34
Contract. Work Area Outlets, where installed outside the
Instrument Control Panels, shall be furnished, wired and installed
by the Contractor.
1.6
.7
The system shall utilize a network of single-mode and multi-mode
fiber-optic cabling, unshielded copper Ethernet Category 6 cable
(CAT6) and shielded CAT6 patch cables. Cables and terminations
shall be provided and located as shown on the Contract Drawings.
.8
Fiber optic cables shall terminate on fiber patch panels and/or
modular patch panels located in demarcation and termination
points indicated on the Specification data sheets.
.9
All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations.
.10
All cables shall terminate in an alphanumeric sequence at
termination locations.
.11
All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to,
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A standards for Category 6 installations.
.12
Station cables shall terminate on one or two gang wall plates
equipped as shown on the Contract Drawings and Specification
data sheets.
.13
Provide complete testing of the network cabling system, including
documentation of the all tests performed with published test
results.
.14
Provide enclosures and mounting brackets that will contain rackmountable components listed in this Specification, the Contract
Drawings, and Specifications data sheets.
.15
Work with the suppliers of the Products stipulated under Division
13 – SCADA and Instrumentation; Division 11 – Equipment;
Division 15 – Mechanical; and, Division 16 – Electrical to coordinate installation and terminations of the cables to patch boxes
and Work Area Outlets.
.16
Work with the Division 16 – Electrical, Subcontractor(s) to coordinate electrical power, conduit and trench requirements.
Electrical, conduit and trench requirements for the structured
cabling system described in this Specification are part of the
scope of the structured cabling system. Co-ordinate with the
requirements of Division 16 – Electrical, for power, conduit and
trench installation details.
Related Work Specified in Other Sections
.1
All Work shall be completed in conjunction with the requirements
of Division 1 – General Requirements, Division 11 – Equipment,
Division 13 – SCADA and Instrumentation and Division 16 –
Electrical.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
1.7
1.8
1.9
Section 16741
Page 5 of 34
Applicable Documents
.1
The cabling system described in this Specification is derived in
part from the recommendations made in industry standard
documents.
.2
Conform to the requirements of the most recent release of the
following:
.1
Ontario Electrical Safety Code
.2
TIA/EIA-568-B: Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
Standards referenced within the TIA/EIA-568-B, where
applicable, constitute standard provisions of this
Specification. Furthermore, compliance with the Ontario
Electrical Safety Code will supersede all other
Specifications.
.3
TIA/EIA-526-14-A: Optical Power Loss Measurement,
Multimode
.4
TIA/EIA-526-7: Optical Power Loss Measurement, Singlemode
.5
TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications
.6
TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
.3
If a conflict exists between the requirements of any of the above
documents and the requirements of the Contract, then the more
stringent requirement shall apply.
.1
The Work outlined in this Section shall be included in the lump
sum price for Section 16741 – Structured Cabling Systems and
Enclosures as indicated in Schedule ‘A’ of the Bid Form.
.1
It is critical for on-going management of the data systems that the
Region have up-to-date and accurate records of all Work
performed by the Contractor.
.2
Work area outlets and patch boxes together with jack numbers
shall be marked on the Drawings with the location of each work
area outlet.
.3
Upon completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide “asbuilt” records of actual jack and patch box locations, cable run
pathways, identification labels, and test results.
.4
The documentation shall be submitted in a printed paper format,
an electronic ‘pdf’ format, and an electronic editable version.
.5
Portfolio
.1
Within thirty (30) Days of the notification of award of the
Contract, and prior to submittal of the network shop
Measurement and Payment
Submittals
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
.6
Section 16741
Page 6 of 34
drawings, submit a portfolio of the proposed Network
Installer (NI) for review by the Consultant. This portfolio is
to contain documentation demonstrating that the proposed
NI has an up to date certification status with Building
Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) and the
manufacturers. Include the following in the portfolio:
1.
Letter(s) and/or certificate(s) attesting that the
installer’s personnel are current members of the
BICSI Telecommunications Association; and
2.
Letter(s) and/or certificate(s) on the letterhead of
each manufacturer attesting that the installer’s
personnel are certified by the manufacturer to
install their Products.
Obtaining successful review of the portfolio is a
prerequisite to submitting Shop Drawings.
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 –
Submittals.
.2
Determine the exact detailed routing paths for cabling
within this Specification. Submit these detailed routing
drawings to the Consultant for review and approval.
.3
Submit shop drawings to the Consultant for review and
approval containing quantities and Product data sheets
before ordering.
.4
Confirm the list of rack components from the Consultant on
Site, and submit the Network Room Closet Enclosure rack
layout, and plant area Wall-mounted Closet Enclosure
layouts, to the Consultant for review and approval before
ordering.
.5
Submit Typical Work Area Outlet Wiring Drawing to the
Consultant for review and approval.
The Contractor shall submit, to the Consultant, factory test
.6
information prior to installation.
.7
Submit Structured Cabling Interconnection/Block Diagram:
show interconnection from core switch, through patch
panels and industrial switches, to IP end devices, such as
computers, controllers, operator interface terminals, etc.
Identify network locations such as enclosures with building,
room, enclosure name. Identify quantity of cables in each
link and quantity and type of IP end devices. Provide a
cable schedule showing cable identification, fiber strand
counts for each cable, and identification of used fiber pairs,
and cable lengths.
.8
Submit Cable Schedule/Wiring and Labeling Tables:
identify and label network links. Identify terminal
receptacles, cable ID tags, enclosure tags, patch panels,
adapter plates, patch cord tags, actual cable lengths and
maximum distance limitations for each link.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
Section 16741
Page 7 of 34
Submit an overview of the structured cabling system and
include description of labeling scheme applied for wire
labeling.
Submit power connection diagram: show interconnection
from power sources, through uninterruptible power
supplies and power distribution panels, to
computers/servers, peripherals and network equipment
(routers, switches and media converters).
Submit Grounding Diagram: show grounding philosophy
and implementation for access closet enclosures and
network equipment.
Submit Drawings indicating conduit/cable pathway/routing
and terminations including patch boxes and work area
outlets complete with labels.
Submit Drawings indicating all port assignments for CAT6
and fiber. Refer to the Contract Drawings - Typical Port
Assignment Drawings for the format.
Submit network wiring table spreadsheets in Excel format
listing all structured cabling components and cabling
source and destination connections for each fiber optic
cable transmit and receive pair for trunk, backbone and
horizontal cabling and each CAT6 horizontal cable, and
also include each fiber optic patch cord, each CAT6 patch
cord, each work area outlet, each patch panel port and
each network equipment switch port. These plant
communications wiring tables shall be provided to the
Consultant for pre-approval.
Submit enclosures and mounting brackets that will contain
all rack-mountable components listed in this Specification,
the Drawings, and the Specification data sheets.
Submit Site Layout Network Diagram showing:
1.
Access holes with identification.
2.
Above grade cable routings, with pole and cable
identification.
3.
Below grade conduit routings between access
holes and buildings with conduit counts and
identification.
4.
Cable routing through innerducts and to patch
panels, fiber centres, or network nodes, with cable
and node identification.
Test Documentation:
1.
Submit documentation as defined in this
subsection.
2.
Submit test results showing Cable identification,
fiber strand counts for each cable, identification of
used fiber pairs, cable length and attenuation, and
planned number for splices, based on TIA/EIA 568,
Annex H.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 8 of 34
3.
.18
.7
Submit “Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper
Installation”, conforming to the requirements of
Section 01640 – Manufacturers’ Services.
4.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in
Section 01430 – Operation and Maintenance Data,
including the following:
.1 Updated versions of Hardware Shop Drawings
Submittals.
.2 Component Manufacturers’ O&M Manuals:
Instructions for installation, operation,
maintenance, and troubleshooting.
.3 List of spare parts provided.
.4 List of recommended additional spare parts.
Installation Certification Documentation:
1.
Copy of the Ethernet cable installer’s factory
certified installation certificate. Certificate shall have
the name of the person who completed the training
course and that person shall supervise all cable
installation and termination for compliance with
manufacturer recommendations.
2.
Structured Cabling System Material and Installation
Manufacturer’s Warranty.
As-Built:
.1
Provide shop drawings to the Region at the conclusion of
the Contract. The marked up drawing set will accurately
depict the as-built status of the system including
termination locations, cable routing, and administration
labeling for the cable system.
.2
Submit a narrative that describes any areas of difficulty
encountered during the installation that could potentially
cause problems to the communications system.
.3
Submit power consumption: Summary of equipment power
consumption, current and voltage for connected network
equipment (routers, switches, media converters) and
computers, servers, peripherals and printers. Include
network location (building, floor, room, enclosure/desk).
.4
Submit Component Data including:
1.
Manufacturer and model number.
2.
General data description.
3.
Engineering specifications and data sheet.
4.
Scaled drawings and mounting arrangements.
5.
Power and grounding requirements.
6.
Electrical and network interfaces (copper and
optical).
.5
Submit Cable Test Results in conformance with subsection
4.7 – Cable Acceptance Testing – General.
.6
Submit a FAT checklist.
.7
Submit FAT documentation.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 9 of 34
1.10 General Requirements
.1
No variations will be allowed to the planned closet termination
positions of horizontal and backbone cables, and grounding
conductors, unless approved in writing by the Region.
.2
Fiber optic cable runs defined in this Contract are to have all fiber
optic strands fully terminated and parked in bulkhead connectors.
.1
The Work of this Section is to be performed by a member of the
BICSI Telecommunications Association.
.2
The Work of this Section is to be performed by personnel certified
by the manufacturer of the Products being installed. Certification
is to include all aspects of design, installation and testing of the
Products described herein.
.3
Obtain a letter or certificate, on the letterhead of each
manufacturer, attesting that the installer’s personnel are certified
to install the Products. Submit each letter prior to submitting shop
drawings.
.4
The Contractor shall utilize the authorized manufacturer
components and distribution channels in completing this Work.
.5
The Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of
experience in installing structured cabling systems of similar type
and size.
.6
The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this Work
and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on
systems of similar type and size.
.7
The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment
necessary for successful installation and testing of optical,
Category 6 and fiber optic premise distribution systems.
.8
The Contractor shall have personnel who are adequately trained
in the usage of such tools and equipment..
.9
Any Subcontractor, who will assist the Contractor in performance
of this Work, shall have the same training and certification as the
Contractor.
1.11 Qualifications
1.12 Project Management Requirements
.1
The Contractor’s Network Supplier/Subcontractor shall provide a
project manager who shall act as a single point of contact for all
activities regarding network cabling for this Contract. The project
manager shall have the authority to make on-Site decisions
regarding the scope of the Work and ad hoc, minor changes that
may be required.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
Section 16741
Page 10 of 34
The Region, in turn, shall appoint a Regional Representative who
will have the corresponding role on behalf of the Region.
1.13 Planning Meetings and Schedule
.1
An initial planning meeting will be held with the Contractor to:
.1
Clarify all requirements (systems, services, distribution
methods, etc.);
.2
Identify responsibilities; and
.3
Schedule the events that will transpire during the
implementation of the Contract.
.2
The Contractor shall attend subsequent follow-up meetings as
needed and as requested by the Region for coordination and
planning efforts.
PART 2. NETWORK COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
2.1
2.2
General
.1
The requirements of this Section will take precedence over the
requirements of other Sections, with respect to network
component identification.
.2
The labeling of PCS network components, structured cabling and
cable routing shall comply with the TIA/EIA-606 standard.
.3
The codification of network components, cables and cable routing
shall follow the identification standards detailed in this
Specification Section.
.4
Utilize the cable labeling and management software product
manufactured by: LabelMark, Brady Corporation.
(www.bradylabelmark.com).
.1
Network Closet Identification
.1
Network Closet identification is required for Network
Access Closets, Server Closets, Network Core Switch
Closets and Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Panel
Closets.
.2
Provide a nameplate for each closet on the top-left corner
of the door.
.3
Use engraved Gravoply laminate nameplates having white
letters on black background. Minimum nameplate height
shall be 50 mm. Minimum character height shall be 12 mm.
.4
Mount nameplates with adhesive backing.
.5
Centre lettering on each line.
.6
Include device identification (tag) number as well as a
descriptive name identifying the type of closet (Access,
Core, Server, Fiber Patch). For example: the tag name:
Closet Identification
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.2
Section 16741
Page 11 of 34
DC-STR-COM-0500 followed by the description: ACCESS
CLOSET.
All network closet tags utilize a four-digit device number
(XXYY). The first two numbers (XX) identify the closet and
the last two numbers (YY) identify sub-devices. For closets
the last two numbers (YY) are always zero (00). For
example DC-STR-COM-0500 for SECONDARY
TREATMENT CLOSET 0500.
All Server Closet tags utilize a four-digit device number
(XXYY). The first two numbers (XX) identify the closet and
the last two numbers (YY) identify sub-devices. For closets
the last two numbers (YY) are always zero (00). For
example DC-AD-SRV-0100 for ADMINISTRATION
BUILDING SERVER CLOSET 0100.
Network Core Switch and Server Closets in the Network
room are numbered from (01YY) to (10YY).
Work Area Outlets, installed outside of Instrument Control
Panels, and associated with a Network Closet, shall utilize
the first two digits (XX) as the closet. The last two numbers
(YY) are used in consecutive order (starting at zero) to
uniquely identify the Work Area Outlet. For example the
first Work Area Outlet associated with Secondary
Treatment Access Closet 0500 (DC-STR-COM-0500)
would be tagged as DC-STR-COM-0501-WA01.
Work Area Outlets, installed inside Instrument Control
Panels, associated with a Network Closet utilize the same
digits as the Instrument Control Panel. For example the
first Work Area Outlet associated with Secondary
Treatment Instrument Control Panel 0500 (DC-STR-ICP0500) would be tagged as DC-STR-ICP-0500-WA01.
UTP and Fiber Patch Panels
.1
Labels for patch panels shall be laser printed, selflaminating, adhesive, polyester or polyolefin. Hand-written
labels will not be accepted.
.2
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters
shall be a minimum of 6 mm high.
.3
Labels shall be applied to patch panels in such a manner
as to be readily visible and not obscured by structured
cabling or patch cords.
.4
The tagging convention for Network Closet patch panels
will employ a four (4) character alphanumeric tag. The first
two characters will indicate the type of patch panel. The
second two characters will be a unique index within each
closet starting from the top of the closet. The characters
“CP” will denote Copper Ethernet Patch Panels. The
characters “FP” will denote Fiber Patch Panels. For
example the second patch panel from the top in Network
Access Closet 0500 would be labelled CP02.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 12 of 34
.3
UTP Patch Panel Termination Point
.1
Each 24-port or 48-port patch panel will be logically
separated into groups of four terminations. Each logical
group will be associated with a 4-port Work Area Outlet, 8port Work Area Outlet or another 24-port patch panel
logical group.
.2
Labels for each 4-port or 8-port logical group shall be laser
printed, self-laminating, adhesive, polyester or polyolefin.
Hand-written labels will not be accepted.
.3
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters
shall be a minimum of 4 mm high.
.4
A label shall be applied to the top of each 4-port or 8-port
logical group indicating the destination of the logical group.
For example: a 4-port, logical group whose destination is
Instrument Control Panel DC-STR-ICP-0500, Work Area
Outlet 1 would be tagged as DC-STR-ICP-0500-WA01.
.5
Provide a three-character label immediately beneath each
port indicating its network membership. SPR indicates that
the port is allocated as spare. MNT indicates that the port
is allocated to maintenance. AMS indicates that the port is
allocated for the asset management system. PMR
indicates that the port is allocated for the power monitoring
system.
.6
Provide colour-coded, snap-in icons for each port (RJ).
The following colours will indicate network membership:
PLC/HMI (red), MNT (blue), AMS (green), PMR (yellow),
RIO (orange) and SPARE (white).
.4
Fiber Optic Patch Panel Termination Point
.1
Terminate all strands of each fiber optic cable in either
36/72 Fiber Enclosures (Network Access Closet) or 72/144
Fiber Enclosures (Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Panel
Closet).
.2
The ordering and colour of individual fibers will be the
same for each fiber cable and shall be compliant with
TIA/EIA-568-B.
.3
Labels shall be laser printed, self-laminating, adhesive,
polyester or polyolefin. Hand-written labels will not be
accepted.
.4
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters
shall be a minimum of 4 mm high.
A label shall be applied to the top of the ST simplex fiber
.5
adapter panel modules associated with a single fiber cable
indicating the destination of the cable. For example the
adapter modules that terminate the fiber cable whose
destination is Secondary Treatment Access Closet 0500
would be labeled as DC-STR-COM-0500.
.6
A three-character label shall be applied, that indicates the
network membership (PLC/HMI, MNT, AMS, PMR, RIO, or
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 13 of 34
SPR), either directly on the adapter module or on the cable
position map. SPR indicates that the port is allocated as
spare. MNT indicates that the port is allocated to
maintenance. AMS indicates that the port is allocated for
the asset management system. PMR indicates that the
port is allocated for the power monitoring system.
2.3
.5
Work Area Outlet
.1
Labels for each 4-port or 8-port work area outlet shall be
laser printed, self-laminating, adhesive, polyester or
polyolefin. Hand-written labels will not be accepted.
.2
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters
shall be a minimum of 4 mm high.
A label shall be applied to the top of each 4-port or 8-port
.3
Work Area Outlet indicating the source of the horizontal
cables. For example: a 4-port, Work Area Outlet in
Instrument Control Panel DC-STR-ICP-0500 connected to
the first copper Ethernet patch panel in Secondary
Treatment Access Closet 0500 would be labeled as DCSTR-COM-0500-CP01.
.4
A three-character label shall be applied immediately
beneath or above each port (RJ) indicating its network
membership (PLC/HMI, MNT, AMS, PMR, RIO, or SPR).
SPR indicates that the port is allocated as spare. MNT
indicates that the port is allocated to maintenance. AMS
indicates that the port is allocated for the asset
management system. PMR indicates that the port is
allocated for the power monitoring system.
.5
Provide colour-coded, snap-in icons for each port (RJ).
The following colours will indicate network membership:
PLC/HMI (red), MNT (blue), AMS (green), PMR (yellow),
RIO (orange), and SPARE (white).
.1
Use durable non-fading sleeve type wire markers to identify
network cables.
.2
Labels for cabling shall be laser printed, self-laminating, adhesive,
polyester (indoor/outdoor). Hand-written labels will not be
accepted.
.3
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters shall
be a minimum of 4 mm in height.
.4
Fiber Optic Backbone Cables
.1
As a minimum, fiber optic backbone cables are to be
labeled at both ends of the cable.
In addition, the fiber backbone cables are to be labeled at
.2
each transition. A transition is defined as: a change in
ducting (e.g. cable tray to conduit), a change in direction of
Network Cable Identification
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.3
.4
.5
Section 16741
Page 14 of 34
more than 45 degrees, or an entrance and exit of ducting
through a wall or floor.
If a single fiber cable is run in conduit then the transition
labels shall be applied to the conduit.
If multiple fiber cables are run in the same conduit then the
transition labels shall be applied to the individual fiber
cables.
The tagging convention for identification of fiber optic
backbone cables shall indicate the source and destination
of the cable separated by a colon. For example a fiber
optic backbone cable whose source is Network Core
Switch Fiber Patch Panel Closet (DC—AD-COM-0200),
Fiber Patch Panel #1 and terminates in Secondary
Treatment Network Access Closet 0500 (DC-STR-COM0500) would have the following tag:
DC-AD-COM-0200-FP01 : DC-STR-COM-0500-FP01
.5
Horizontal Cables
.1
As a minimum, horizontal CAT6 cable is to be labeled at
both ends of the cable.
.2
The tagging convention for identification of Horizontal
cables shall indicate the source and destination of the
cable separated by a colon. Example 1: a horizontal cable
whose source is Secondary Treatment Access Closet 0500
(DC-STR-COM-0500), UTP Patch Panel #1 (CP01),
Position #10 and whose destination is Position #2, Work
Area Outlet #1, in Instrument Control Panel DC-STR-ICP0500 would have the following tag:
DC-STR-COM-0500-CP01-10: DC-STR-ICP-0500-WA0102
.3
Example 2: a horizontal cable whose source is Network
Core Switch Fiber Patch Panel Closet 0200 (DC-AD-COM0200), UTP Patch Panel #2, Position #8 and whose
destination is Position #5, UTP Patch Panel #1, in SCADA
Server Closet 0100 (DC-AD-SRV-0100) would have the
following tag:
DC-AD-COM-0200-CP02-08: DC-AD-SRV-0100-CP01-05
.6
Patch Cords
.1
As a minimum, Contractor installed CAT6 and fiber optic
patch cords shall be labeled at both ends of the cable.
.2
Provide colour-coded cable jackets and plug-boots to
indicate network membership: PLC/HMI (red), MNT (blue),
AMS (green) and PMR (yellow), and RIO (orange).
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.3
Section 16741
Page 15 of 34
The tagging convention for identification of patch cords
shall indicate the source and destination of the cable
separated by a colon. The source is the switch port and the
destination is the patch panel, termination point. Example
1: a horizontal cable whose source is Secondary
Treatment Access Closet 0500 (DC-STR-COM-0500)
switch port #1 and whose destination is Secondary
Treatment Access Closet 0500 (DC-STR-COM-0500), UTP
Patch Panel #1 (CP01), Position #10.
DC-STR-COM-0500-SW01-01: DC-STR-COM-0500CP01-10
SW shall be used to indicate a copper Ethernet switch port.
UP shall be used to indicate the uplink port on the switch.
.7
Cable Routing
.1
All ducting (cable tray or conduit) carrying fiber optic
backbone cable shall be tagged as “PCS LAN
BACKBONE”.
.2
All ducting carrying Horizontal cables shall be tagged as
“PCS LAN HORIZONTAL”.
.1
Provide fiber optic cable, connectors and appurtenances that
make up the backbone cable segments.
.2
The fiber optic backbone cable segments shall meet the
requirements of the TIA/EIA-568-B specification for 62.5 micron
multi-mode fiber and single-mode fiber.
.3
Fiber optic backbone cable shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
24 Fibers per Cable.
.2
Quantity 12 – 62.5 micron multimode fiber strands.
.3
Quantity 12 – 8 to 9 micron single-mode fiber strands.
.4
Indoor/Outdoor Rating.
.5
Core-locked, Tight-buffered.
.6
62.5/125 micron Core/Cladding for multi-mode fiber.
.7
385 MHz-km Bandwidth at 850 nm wavelength for multimode fiber.
.8
500 MHz-km Bandwidth at 1300 nm wavelength for multimode fiber.
.9
Riser-Rated (FT4) inner and outer PVC jackets (Optical
Cable Corporation DX series).
.4
The fiber optic cable shall be Optical Cable Corporation DX-Series
Distribution cable, model DX24-085D-12WLX-12SLX/900-OFNRWB or an approved equal.
PART 3. PRODUCTS
3.1
Fiber Optic Backbone Cable
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
3.2
3.3
Section 16741
Page 16 of 34
Fiber Optic Horizontal Cable
.1
Fiber optic cable is to be provided for horizontal network cable
runs which exceed 90 metres or for transitions from indoor to
outdoor locations.
.2
The fiber optic horizontal cable segments shall meet the
requirements of the TIA/EIA-568-B specification for 62.5 micron
multi-mode fiber.
.3
Fiber optic horizontal cable shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
Quantity 6 – 62.5 micron multimode fiber strands.
.2
Indoor/Outdoor Rating.
.3
Core-locked, tight-buffered.
.4
62.5/125 micron core/cladding for multi-mode fiber.
.5
385 MHz-km Bandwidth at 850 nm wavelength for multimode fiber.
.6
500 MHz-km Bandwidth at 1300 nm wavelength for multimode fiber.
.7
Riser-Rated (FT4) inner and outer PVC jackets (Optical
Cable Corporation DX series).
.4
The fiber optic cable shall be Optical Cable Corporation DX-Series
Distribution cable, model DX06-055D-6WLX-OFNR-WB or an
approved equal.
.1
All connectors for the termination of the fiber optic backbone or
horizontal cable shall be duplex SC connectors.
.2
For multimode fiber optic terminations inside Network Access
Closet Fiber Patch Panels the connectors shall be preloaded
adapters configured with 3 SC duplex multimode adapters fitted
with a bronze split sleeve. SC connectors shall be Panduit Corp.
Catalogue No. FAP3WEIDSC.
.3
For single-mode fiber optic terminations inside Network Access
Closet Fiber Patch Panels the connectors shall be preloaded
adapters configured with 3 SC duplex single-mode adapters fitted
with a zirconia ceramic split sleeve. SC connectors shall be
Panduit Corp. Catalogue No. FAP3WBUDSCZ or approved equal.
.4
For multimode fiber optic terminations inside Network Core Switch
Fiber Patch Panel Closets the connectors shall be preloaded
adapters configured with 6 SC duplex multimode adapters fitted
with a bronze split sleeve. SC connectors shall be Panduit Corp.
Catalogue No. FAP6WEIDSC or approved equal.
.5
For single-mode fiber optic terminations inside Network Core
Switch Fiber Patch Panel Closets the connectors shall be
preloaded adapters configured with 6 SC duplex single-mode
adapters filled with a zirconia ceramic split sleeve. SC connectors
Fiber Optic Connectors
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 17 of 34
shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No. FAP6WBUDSCZ or
approved equal.
3.4
Corrugated Split-Loom HDPE Conduit
.1
3.5
3.6
Corrugated split-loom HDPE conduit shall meet or exceed the
following minimum requirements:
.1
Orange coloured
47.8 mm (1.881 in) Minimum ID (inner diameter)
.2
.3
55.1 mm (2.169 in) Average OD (outer diameter)
.4
Material to be polyethylene
.5
The HDPE conduit shall be Panduit Corp. Corrugated
Loom Tubing CLT188F-6C3 or an approved equal
Corrugated Solid HDPE Conduit
.1
Corrugated solid HDPE conduit shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
Orange coloured
.2
Average OD (outer diameter) shall not be less than 25.4
mm (1 in)
.3
Conduit average OD to be sized appropriately for the
number of fiber-optic cables while maintaining a 50 percent
spare fill ratio.
.4
Material to be polyethylene
.5
Riser rated
.6
The HDPE conduit shall be Eastern Wire and Conduit
Protect-N-Duct Riser PDRUXXXX or an approved equal.
.1
Provide twisted-pair cable, connectors and appurtenances that
make up the horizontal cable segments.
.2
Horizontal cable segments shall meet the requirements of the
TIA/EIA-568-B specification for Category 6 (CAT6), Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) cable.
.3
Horizontal cable segments shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
The cable shall be tested up to 200 MHz with a guaranteed
performance that meets or exceeds the ANSI/TIA/EIA568B/ISO/IEC 11801 horizontal cable requirements for PSNEXT, attenuation, structural return loss, and attenuationto-crosstalk ratio (ACR).
.2
The cable shall be constructed from 0.54 mm (24AWG),
bare copper wire insulated. Two insulated conductors
twisted together to form a pair and four pairs laid up to
form the basic unit.
UTP Horizontal Cable
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.7
3.8
Section 16741
Page 18 of 34
The cable shall be jacketed in flame-retardant PVC. Cable
run in conduit shall meet or exceed FT4 rating. Cable not
run in conduit shall meet or exceed FT6 rating.
Horizontal cable (except for remote I/O) run in conduit shall
be Belden Inc. Catalogue No.. 24566945 or approved
equivalent.
Horizontal cable (except for remote I/O) not run in conduit
shall be FT6 rated Belden Inc. Catalogue No. 24567945 or
approved equivalent.
For Remote I/O, horizontal cable run in conduit shall be
orange in colour, Belden Inc. Catalogue No. 25066515 or
approved equivalent.
For Remote I/O, horizontal cable not run in conduit shall be
orange in colour and FT6 rated Belden Inc. Catalogue No.
25067545 or approved equivalent.
STP Horizontal Cable
.1
Provide twisted-pair cable connectors and appurtenances that
make up the horizontal cable segments.
.2
Horizontal cable segments shall meet the requirements of the
TIA/EIA-568-B specification for Category 6 (CAT6), Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP) cable.
.3
Horizontal Cable Segments shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
The cable shall be tested up to 200 MHz with a guaranteed
performance that meets or exceeds the ANSI/TIA/EIA568B/ISO/IEC 11801 horizontal cable requirements for PSNEXT, attenuation, structural return loss, and attenuationto-crosstalk ratio (ACR).
.2
The cable shall be constructed from 0.54 mm (24AWG),
bare copper wire insulated. Two insulated conductors shall
be twisted together to form a pair and four pairs laid up to
form the basic unit.
.3
The cable shall be shielded with an overall aluminum tape
with stranded tinned copper drain wire.
The cable shall be jacketed in flame-retardant PVC. Cable
.4
run in conduit shall meet or exceed the FT4 rating. Cable
not run in conduit shall meet or exceed the FT6 rating.
.5
The cable shall be orange in colour for remote I/O and blue
for other applications.
.1
All Category 6 (CAT6) UTP horizontal connectors shall be
unshielded modular jacks..
.2
CAT6 connectors shall meet or exceed the following minimum
requirements:
UTP Horizontal Connectors.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.9
Section 16741
Page 19 of 34
Eight position modular jacks shall meet or exceed the
TIA/EIA Category 6 standard.
The jack termination to 4 pair 24 AWG unshielded twisted
pair cable shall not require the use of a punch down tool.
The jack shall limit conductor untwist to less than 23 mm
(½ inch).
The jack shall be IEC 60603-7 compliant.
The jack shall accommodate icons for network
identification.
The jack shall support gigabit Ethernet.
STP Horizontal Connectors.
.1
All category 6 (CAT6) STP horizontal connectors shall be shielded
modular jacks wired for a T586A wire-map. Each shielded jack is
to be individually bonded to a ground.
.2
CAT6 STP connectors shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
Eight position modular jacks shall meet or exceed the
TIA/EIA Category 6 standard.
.2
The jack termination to 4 pair 24 AWG Shielded twisted
pair cable shall not require the use of a punch down tool.
.3
The jack shall limit conductor untwist to less than 12 mm
(½ inch).
.4
The jack shall be IEC 60603-7 compliant.
.5
The jack shall accommodate icons for network
identification.
.6
The shielded jack must include a cable strain relief cap,
TIA/EIA 607 compliant grounding, bonding metallic
housing and ground termination.
.7
The jack shall support gigabit Ethernet.
3.10 General Enclosure Requirements
.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, indoor
enclosures containing network components are to be NEMA 4.
.2
Screws, bolts, fasteners, etc., are to be corrosion resistant
stainless steel.
.3
Doors are to have continuous hinges with removable pin and oil
resistance cellular neoprene gasket secured by gasket retainers.
.4
Cable bundles are to be neatly laced, routed in ducting or cable
managers approved by the Region and secured to 48 cm (19 inch)
rack or mounting back-panel.
.5
Enclosure doors shall open through 180 degrees without
restriction.
.6
Enclosure layout and equipment spacing shall be constructed to
allow for device removal, calibration and maintenance without
disassembly of adjacent devices.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 20 of 34
.7
Enclosures shall have sufficient structural reinforcements to
ensure a limited plane surface vibration and to provide rigidity
during shipment, installation and operation without distortion or
damage to the enclosure, mounting panel or mounted
instruments.
.8
Enclosure seams shall be continuously welded and ground
smooth to be undetectable after painting.
.9
Devices shall be installed on the enclosure back-panel or 48 cm
(19 inch) rack.
.10
There shall be no devices installed on the side plates of the
enclosure.
.1
All enclosure wiring shall run through a cable manager.
.2
Cable managers shall not be filled to more than 50 percent of their
volume upon initial installation.
.3
Wires and cables, including spares, shall be identified at each end
and at any connection. Use durable non-fading sleeve type wire
markers to identify network cables as follows:
.1
Labels for cabling shall be laser printed, self-laminating,
adhesive, polyester (indoor/outdoor).
.2
Hand-written labels will not be accepted.
.3
Lettering shall be black on a white background. Characters
shall be a minimum of 4 mm high.
.4
Wire markers are required on each conductor in panel
board gutters, and at load connections. The identification
shall include branch circuit or feeder number for power and
lighting circuits, and control wire numbers for control
wiring.
.5
All field wires and cables terminated within enclosures
shall be identified at each termination with a marking that
corresponds with the Drawings and supporting
documentation.
.1
Provide Network Access Closets in the locations identified in the
SCADA Network Drawings. Construct Access Closets to support
the termination of cables (fiber optic, CAT6 UTP, power) and the
installation of Cisco Systems, Inc. Catalyst 2960 Ethernet
Switches.
.2
Provide Network Access Closets in accordance with the Typical
Network Access Closet as shown on the Contact Drawings.
.3
Network Access Closet enclosures shall meet or exceed the
following minimum requirements
3.11 Enclosure Wiring
3.12 Network Access Closets
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 16741
Page 21 of 34
Outside dimensions of 750 mm (30 inch) Height x 600 mm
(24 inch) Width x 600 mm (24 inch) Depth
14 gauge steel, smooth continuously welded seams.
Oil resistant gasket.
¼ turn latch capable of being padlocked.
NEMA 4 rating.
.4
Network Access Closets shall be Hoffman Enclosure Inc. NEMA 4
DataCom Series PTDHS362424G4 or approved equal.
.5
Network Access Closets located in corrosive environments shall
be constructed from stainless steel.
.6
Provide a 19 unit (U), 48 cm (19 inch) rack for the mounting of 48
cm (19 inch) rack mountable components. The front of the 48 cm
(19 inch) rack is to be recessed 50 mm (2 inch) from the front of
the enclosure.
.7
Bond 48 cm (19 inch) rack to ground.
.8
Provide a rack mount, fiber optic enclosure for termination of the
fiber optic cable within the Network Access Closet.
.9
The fiber optic enclosure shall meet or exceed the following
minimum requirements:
.1
The fiber optic enclosure shall include a slide-out/tilt-down
drawer for front access of the terminations.
.2
The fiber optic enclosure shall include integrated bendradius managers for patch cords and backbone cable.
.3
The fiber optic enclosure shall support 36 or 72 SC
connectors.
.10
The fiber optic enclosure shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No.
FRME3 or approved equal.
.11
The Contractor is to ensure that installation of the fiber optic
enclosure allows the sliding drawer to be fully extended and
lowered without interference from, or to, other components.
.12
Fiber optic connectors shall be duplex SC style connectors. Fiber
optic termination panels shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No.
FAP6WEID or approved equal for multimode fiber. Fiber optic
termination panels shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No.
FAP3WBUDZ or approved equal for single-mode fiber.
.13
Provide two (2) 48-port modular patch panels, connectors and
appurtenances for termination of the unshielded twisted pair
(UTP) within each Network Access Closet.
.1
The connection between the 2960 Ethernet Switch and
UTP horizontal cable is an inter-connect rather than a
cross-connect.
.2
All 48-port modular patch panels shall be Panduit Corp.
Catalogue No. DP48688TGY or approved equal.
.3
Rack mounted ground bars shall be Panduit Corp.
Catalogue No. TRGB19 or approved equal.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 22 of 34
.14
The Catalyst 2960 switches shall have the following environmental
and power requirements:
.1
Operating Temperature: 0 to 45 degrees Celsius (C).
.2
Power consumption with a single module is 30 W.
.3
All of the Network Access Closets are located indoors,
therefore ambient temperatures below 0 degrees Celsius
are not a concern.
Provide ventilating fans and associated controls where
.4
noted on the Contract Drawings. Control the ventilating
fans using thermostatic controls.
.15
Provide two (2) duplex SC-to-LC fiber optic patch cords for each
2960 Ethernet Switch. Fiber optic patch cables shall be terminated
at one end with a duplex SC style plug and at the other with an LC
style plugs.
.16
Fiber optic patch cords are to be factory assembled and tested by
the manufacturer. Provide written certification from the
manufacturer indicating the factory test results. The Contractor is
responsible for determining the length of patch cords.
.17
Supply forty-eight (48) Category 6 (CAT6), unshielded twisted pair
(UTP), patch cords for each 2960 Ethernet switch installed by the
Contractor. Install only those patch cords required to interconnect
the 2960 Ethernet switch and Patch Panels.
.18
CAT6 UTP Patch cords shall be orange in colour for remote I/O
and blue for other applications.
.19
Access Closets to be manufactured by one (1) of the following
suppliers:
.1
Black & McDonald Limited (First Named)
Network Solutions Group
31 Pullman Court
Scarborough, ON, M1X 1E4
Tel: (416) 366-2541
.2
Fiber Core Communications Inc. (Named Alternative)
4096 Meadowbrook Drive, Unit 119
London, ON, N6L 1G4
Tel: (519) 652-7222
.3
Quantech Electrical Contractors Ltd. (Named Alternative)
17 Guardsman Road
Thornhill, ON, L3T 6L2
Tel: (905) 731-2343
.4
Selog Norteck Inc. (Named Alternative)
3190 Ridgeway Drive
Mississauga, ON, L5L 5S8
Tel: (905) 608-9737
.1
Switches will be provided by the Contractor.
3.13 Catalyst Ethernet Switches
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 23 of 34
.2
Install the switches on racks in Network Access Closets complete
with UTP patch cables.
.1
Provide media converters as indicated within the SCADA
Drawings.
.2
For fiber optic horizontal cable segments, media converters shall
be installed in the Network Access Closet and, if required, in the
Instrument Control Panel. Media converters shall be N-Tron Corp.
Catalogue No. 102MC-ST or approved equivalent.
.3
The N-Tron Corp. 102MC media converter has the following
environmental and power requirements:
.1
Operating Temperature: -40 to 80 degrees Celsius (C).
.2
Input voltage: 10-30 VDC.
.3
Input current: 140mA@24V
.4
Physical dimensions: 73.1 mm (Height) x 38.1 mm (Width)
x 122 mm (Depth)
.5
Mounting: DIN rail
.1
Work Area Outlets
.1
Provide one or two 4-port, single-gang, metal Work Area
Outlets, connectors and appurtenances for termination of
the horizontal CAT6 UTP cables. If eight (8) CAT6 UTP
cables are consolidated at the Work Area Outlet then one
8-port double gang metal work area outlet is required.
.2
Each Work Area Outlet will be associated with a 4-port
logical group in the Access Closet patch panel. For PLC
Nodes the typical assignment for Work Area Outlets will be
1-PLC, 2-PLC, 3-AMS, 4-MNT (maintenance).
.3
CAT6 unshielded modular jacks shall be Panduit Corp.
Catalogue No. CJ688TGRD (red) for PLC/HMI,
CJ688TGIW (white) for spare, CJ688TGGR (green) for
AMS, CJ688TGYL (yellow) for PMR (power monitoring),
CJ688TGOR (orange) for remote I/O, and CJ688TGBU
(blue) for maintenance, or approved equal.
.4
4-port outlet faceplates shall be stainless steel. Faceplates
shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No. CFP4SY or
approved equivalent.
.5
8-port outlet faceplates shall be stainless steel. Faceplates
shall be Panduit Corp. Catalogue No. CFP8SY or
approved equivalent.
.2
STP Patch Cords
.1
Supply colour-coded cable jackets and plug-boots to
indicate network membership: PLC/HMI (red), MNT (blue),
AMS (green) and PMR (yellow), and RIO (orange).
3.14 Media Converters
3.15 Work Area Outlets
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
.3
Section 16741
Page 24 of 34
Supply four (4) 10 metre, CAT6 STP patch cords for each
4-port work area outlet. Supply eight (8) 10 metre, CAT6
STP patch cords for each 8-port work area outlet.
Certify in writing that the patch cords supplied under this
Contract meet or exceed the requirements for CAT6 STP
patch cords as described in the TIA/EIA-568-B standard.
PART 4. EXECUTION
4.1
4.2
General
.1
Provide a complete and operational system, including all
components and appurtenances necessary to ensure that the
equipment is functional and meets the intent of this Specification.
.2
It is the Contractor's responsibility to size power supply cables to
meet the requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code
based on field verified length of cable run and power supply load.
.3
Wall-mounted panels are to be separated from the wall by
stainless steel spacers or galvanized steel struts.
.1
Install network enclosures in the locations identified in the
Contract Drawings. Field verify and obtain written approval from
the Consultant of final locations of the enclosures prior to
commencing this Work. Any costs required to relocate enclosures
in unapproved locations will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
.2
The Consultant reserves the right to have the Contractor relocate
Network Access Closets within 3 m of the locations identified in
the Contract Drawings, at no additional cost to the Region.
.3
The Network Access Closet is to be mounted on stainless steel
separators or galvanized struts to ensure a minimum 20 mm
separation from the wall. The Network Access Closet shall be
leveled against the wall using the separators.
.4
All enclosure doors shall open through 180 degrees without
restriction.
.5
Mid-section of the enclosure shall open through 90 degrees
without restriction from wall-mount section.
.6
The Network Access Closets are to be installed between a
maximum height of 762 mm (30 inch) from the ground and a
minimum height of 610 mm (24 inch) from the ground.
.7
Terminate all strands in the fiber optic enclosure. Park all strands
on bulkhead connectors. Fiber colour and Transmit/Receive
Tx/Rx orientation is to be identical in Network Access Closets.
Terminate strands in a uniform standard colour sequence. Fibers
are to be labeled. Dark fibers are to be covered to prevent
Network Access Closets
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 25 of 34
damage. Blank spaces in the breakout enclosure are to have
blank covers installed.
4.3
4.4
4.5
Work Area Outlets
.1
Locate Work Area Outlets such that the length of the horizontal
cable runs from the Network Access Closet interconnecting to the
Work Area Outlet shall be less than 90 metres. For Work Area
Outlets where this proves impossible the Consultant may
authorize, in writing, an exception if the link still meets the
performance requirements of this Specification.
.2
Install Work Area Outlets in the locations identified in the Contract
Drawings. Field verify and obtain written approval from the
Consultant of final locations prior to commencing this Work. All
costs required to relocate Work Area Outlets in unapproved
locations will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
.3
The Consultant reserves the right to have the Contractor relocate
Work Area Outlets within 3 m of the locations identified in the
Contract Drawings at no additional cost to the Region.
.1
Provide four (4) or eight (8) CAT6 UTP horizontal cables to each
Work Area Outlet from a Network Access Closet in a single 35 mm
(1 ¼ inch) conduit in non-corrosive environments.
.2
Provide four (4) or eight (8) CAT6 STP horizontal cables to each
Work Area Outlet from a Network Access Closet in single 35 mm
(1 ¼ inch) conduit in corrosive environments. Corrosive
environments will be noted on the Electrical Drawings.
.3
Conduit carrying horizontal cables shall enter the Work Area
Outlet through the top or bottom.
.4
Conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel unless the environment is
corrosive. Conduit running through corrosive environments shall
be Rigid PVC.
Cable and Conduit
Fiber Optic Cable Installation – Backbone cable
.1
Installation of the fiber optic backbone cable shall comply with
Section 56 (Optical Fiber Cables) of the Ontario Electrical Safety
Code and the EIA/TIA-568-B Telecommunications Building
Standard.
.2
Each fiber backbone segment shall be a continuous run (no
splices) from the Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Closet to the
target Network Access Closet.
.3
Outdoor Fiber-Optic Backbone Conduit Installations:
.1
Fiber-optic backbone cable is to be installed in corrugated
split-loom HDPE conduit in outdoor electrical duct bank
vaults.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 16741
Page 26 of 34
HDPE conduit is to be installed in locations where the
fiber-optic backbone cable is exposed and not protected by
rigid conduit.
Multiple fiber-optic backbone cables can be consolidated
and protected by a single HDPE conduit.
HDPE conduit is to be sized appropriately for the number
of fiber-optic cables and to maintain a 50 percent spare fill
ratio.
HDPE conduit is to be supported by conduit hangers and
supported at every one (1) metre if a cable tray does not
exist. Conduit hangers are to be suspended from vault
ceiling by threaded rods. Conduit hanger data sheets to
be submitted to the Consultant for review prior to
installation.
HDPE conduit shall be inserted 0.6 m (24 inches) into
electrical duct transition points.
The Contractor is to submit digital photographs of the first
fiber-optic backbone cable installation for the Consultant’s
review and approval. As a minimum, the photographs
must show labeling of the fiber-optic cable, conduit
installation, conduit support and conduit labeling. The
Contractor must receive written approval from the
Consultant prior to continuing with the remaining Work.
.4
Indoor Cable tray, Raceway and Office Environment Fiber-Optic
Backbone Conduit Installations:
.1
Fiber-optic backbone cable is to be installed in corrugated
HDPE conduit (non split-loom) in indoor cable trays,
raceways and office environments.
.2
The HDPE conduit is to contain a single fiber-optic cable
only.
.3
HDPE conduit is to have a minimum ID (inner diameter) of
25.4 mm (1 inch).
The Contractor is to submit digital photographs of the first
.4
fiber-optic backbone cable installation for the Consultant’s
review and approval. As a minimum, the photographs
must show labeling of the fiber-optic cable, conduit
installation, conduit support and conduit labeling. The
Contractor must receive written approval from the
Consultant prior to continuing with the remaining Work.
.5
Indoor Wall, Ceiling and Industrial Environment Fiber-Optic
Backbone Conduit Installations:
.1
For other fiber-optic backbone cable installations, cable
shall be installed in 25.4 mm (1 inch) galvanized rigid-steel
conduit unless the environment is corrosive.
.2
Conduit running through corrosive environments shall be
rigid PVC.
.3
The Contractor is to submit digital photographs of the first
fiber-optic backbone cable installation for the Consultant’s
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
Section 16741
Page 27 of 34
review and approval. As a minimum, the photographs
must show labeling of the fiber-optic cable, conduit
installation, conduit support and conduit labeling. The
Contractor must receive written approval from the
Consultant prior to continuing with the remaining Work.
.6
Rigid PVC, Rigid Steel or Corrugated HDPE installations:
.1
Install conduit into the walls, ceilings or floors as required
on the Contract Drawings. The actual route of the conduits
is to be selected to avoid beams, columns and other
obstructions, provided permission has been granted by the
Consultant.
.2
Conduit shall not interfere with the work of Other
Contractors and shall be mounted over other piping where
possible in parallel rows, parallel or perpendicular to walls
and ceilings. Bends and offsets shall be uniform and
symmetrical. The use of conduit bends shall be kept to a
minimum.
.3
Conduit and cables shall be installed to avoid proximity of
water and heating pipes. In no case shall they run within
75 mm of such pipe, except where crossings are
unavoidable, in which case they shall be kept at least 25
mm from the covering of pipe crossing.
.4
For wall, ceiling or floor installations, HDPE conduit is to be
anchored at every one (1) metre.
.7
As a minimum, a one (1) metre loop for every 100 metres of cable
length, shall be left at the end of each fiber optic backbone cable
and housed in the Network Access Closet.
.8
The bend radius for fiber optic backbone cable shall not be less
than the manufacturer’s recommended minimum bend radius.
.9
The tensile load for fiber optic backbone cable shall not exceed
the manufacturer’s recommended maximum tensile load.
.10
To prevent micro-bends the Contractor shall not use nylon cableties. Instead the Contractor shall use hook and loop straps to
secure or collate fiber optic backbone cable.
.11
Individual fiber backbone segment lengths are shown in the Site
Plan and Fiber Optic Details on the Drawings. Segment lengths
are estimates calculated from the Site Plan and Fiber Optic
Details on the Drawings. The Layouts provided with this Contract
are Reasonably-To-Scale (RTS). The Contractor is to field verify
cable lengths. The recommended fiber route to the Network
Access Closets is provided in the Site Plan and Fiber Optic Details
on the Drawings.
.12
Provide full circle and half circle coil formers at each end to coil
excess fiber strands and excess fiber patch cords.
.13
Labeling
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.1
.2
.3
.4
4.6
4.7
Section 16741
Page 28 of 34
Use durable non-fading sleeve type wire markers to
identify network cables.
Apply the tagging convention described in this
Specification for Fiber Optic cables.
At a minimum, label both ends of the fiber optic backbone
cable.
In addition, label the fiber optic cable at every 20 metres
from the Network Core Switch Fiber Patch Panel Closet
and at major transitions. Major transitions are defined as:
the entrance and exit of a wall or floor, a change in method
of ducting, or a change in direction of more than 45
degrees.
Horizontal Cable Installation
.1
Run horizontal cables connecting Network Access Closets to
Work Area Outlets in 35 mm (1 ¼ inch) galvanized, rigid steel
conduit.
.2
Run either four (4) or eight (8) Horizontal cables in a conduit as
noted on the Contract Drawings.
.3
The bend radius for horizontal cable shall not be less than the
manufacturer’s recommended minimum bend radius.
.4
Horizontal cables within the network core may be run in cable tray
or through conduit but must be segregated from power distribution
cable.
.5
Labeling
.1
Use durable non-fading sleeve type wire markers to
identify network cables.
.2
Apply the tagging convention described in this
Specification for horizontal cables.
.3
At a minimum, label both ends of the horizontal cable.
Cable Acceptance Testing – General
.1
This Section specifies the inspection, test, and acceptance
requirements for the structured cabling of the Process Control
System (PCS) Local Area network.
.2
Provide test equipment required to conduct acceptance tests.
.3
Submit acceptance documentation as defined in this Section.
.4
All of the installed cabling must be tested and successfully pass
test criteria.
.5
Standards referenced in this Section include:
.1
TIA/EIA-568-B: Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
Standards referenced within the TIA/EIA-568-B, where
applicable, constitute standard provisions of this
Specification.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
.3
Section 16741
Page 29 of 34
TIA/EIA-526-14-A: Optical Power Loss Measurement,
Multimode
TIA/EIA-526-7: Optical Power Loss Measurement, Singlemode
.6
Visually inspect cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect
possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport.
Visibly damaged goods are to be returned to the supplier and
replaced at no additional cost to the Region.
.7
The Region reserves the right to conduct, using the Contractor’s
equipment and labour, a random re-test of up to five (5) percent of
the cable plant to confirm documented results. Any failed cabling
shall be re-tested and restored to a passing condition, at no
additional cost to the Region. In the event more than two (2)
percent of the cable plant fails during re-test, the entire cable plant
shall be re-tested and restored to a passing condition at no
additional cost to the Region.
.8
Acceptance shall be subject to completion of Work, successful
post-installation testing which yields a 100 percent PASS rating,
and receipt of full documentation as specified in the Contract
Documents.
.9
Fiber-Optic Backbone Testing
.1
Backbone fiber optic cable shall meet or exceed the
permanent link performance requirements specified in
TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for 62.5/125, multi-mode fiber and singlemode fiber.
.2
Include final connectors when testing each strand.
.3
Test fibers, as the Work progresses, as follows:
1.
When 10 percent of the fibers have been
terminated, notify the Consultant and schedule a
representative of the supplier of the connectors to
be present to witness fiber optic test. Submit test
results from 10 percent phase, address any
deficiencies and proceed with additional
terminations to 50 percent.
2.
Repeat the process outlined above when 50
percent of the fibers have been terminated.
3.
Complete testing at 100 percent
.4
Test link attenuation in accordance with TIA/EIA-526-14A
for multimode fiber. Make reference measurements in
accordance with method B or an equivalent method
approved by the Consultant. Measure optical loss on each
multimode fiber at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Measure loss on
each fiber from each direction (bi-directionally).
.5
Test link attenuation in accordance with TIA/EIA-526-7 for
single-mode fiber. Make reference measurements in
accordance with Method A.1 or an equivalent method
approved by the Consultant. Measure optical loss on each
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.6
.7
.8
.10
Section 16741
Page 30 of 34
single-mode fiber at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. Measure loss
on each fiber from each direction (bi-directionally).
Measure link length optically or calculate using cable
sheath length markings.
Single-mode backbone fiber optic cabling shall meet the
following loss and length criteria:
1.
Attenuation @ 1310 nm shall be less than or equal
to: fiber length (km) x 1.0 dB/km + number
connector pairs x 0.75 dB + number of splices x 0.3
dB.
2.
Attenuation @ 1550 nm shall be less than or equal
to: fiber length (km) x 1.00 dB/km + number
connector pairs x 0.75 dB + number of splices x 0.3
dB.
3.
Length shall be less than or equal to 3000 metres.
Multimode backbone fiber optic cabling shall meet the
following loss and length criteria:
1.
Attenuation @ 850 nm shall be less than or equal
to: fiber length (km) x 3.0 dB/km + number
connector pairs x 0.75 dB + number of splices x 0.3
dB.
2.
Attenuation @ 1550 nm shall be less than or equal
to: fiber length (km) x 1.00 dB/km + number
connector pairs x 0.75 dB + number of splices x 0.3
dB.
3.
Length shall be less than or equal to 2000 metres
Fiber Optic Test Equipment
.1
All test equipment of a given type shall be from the same
manufacturer, and shall have compatible electronic results
output. Acceptable test equipment manufacturers are
Fluke Corporation, Hewlett-Packard Development
Company, L.P. (Hewlett Packard), or MicroTest Inc.
(Microtest).
.2
Fiber optic test equipment shall meet the following
minimum criteria:
Test equipment shall be capable of measuring
1.
relative or absolute optical power in accordance
with TIA/EIA-526-14A, "Optical Power Loss
Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant."
2.
Test equipment shall be capable of measuring
relative or absolute optical power in accordance
with TIA/EIA-526-7, “Optical Power Loss
Measurement of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable
Plant.”
3.
Test equipment shall not include the loss or length
of the test jumpers in the cable plant
measurements.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Section 16741
Page 31 of 34
Multimode test equipment shall incorporate both
850 nm and 1300 nm sources. The coupled output
power into multimode fiber shall be >= -20 dBm at
each wavelength. Detectors shall have a dynamic
range of at least +3 dB to -55 dB.
Single-mode test equipment shall incorporate both
1310 nm and 1550 nm sources. The coupled output
power into multimode fiber shall be >= -20 dBm at
each wavelength. Detectors shall have a dynamic
range of at least +3 dB to -55 dB.
Sources and meters shall automatically
synchronize wavelengths to prevent calibrationrelated errors.
Test equipment shall employ a serial port to
facilitate uploading of saved information from tester
to PC.
The time-of-flight methodology shall be employed
when optically measuring fiber length.
.11
Optical Time Domain Refractometer (OTDR):
.1
Provide OTDR tests for each strand/cable.
.2
Test documentation; Hard copy of OTDR plots for each
fiber strand.
.12
Cable Test Results Manual
.1
Submit test reports in both a hardcopy and electronic
format. Hand-written test reports are not acceptable.
Submit electronic files on a CD format disk in a PDF
format. If test results cannot be converted to a PDF format
then provide any necessary proprietary software to view
the results at no cost to the Region.
.2
Fiber optic backbone cable test results shall be
incorporated in the PCS Network – Cable Test Results
manual. Submit five (5) copies of the Cable Test Results
manual for each plant. The manual consists of hardcopy
test result reports placed into lockable ‘D’ ring binders with
a cover and spline that clearly indicates the title of the
manual. Provide a CD with the electronic copies of test
reports in a pocket in the Cable Test Results manual.
.3
Both the Contractor and the Consultant must sign a
hardcopy of the reports.
.4
Include a hard copy of the OTDR plots for each fiber
strand.
.13
Fiber Optic Documentation. At a minimum, test reports shall
include the following information for each fiber optic cabling
element (fiber) tested:
.1
Actual measured attenuation, maximum allowable
attenuation (loss) and the attenuation margin at the
specified wavelengths. An individual test that fails the link
criteria shall be marked as FAIL.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 16741
Page 32 of 34
Reference method.
Number of mated connectors.
Actual length and maximum allowable length. Any
individual test that fails the link length criteria shall be
marked as FAIL.
Group refractive index (GRI) for the type of fiber tested, if
length was optically measured.
Tester manufacturer, model, serial number and software
version.
Circuit ID number (Cable Tag Id) and facility (Plant).
Link criteria used.
Overall pass/fail indication.
Date and time of test.
.14
CAT6 UTP Horizontal twisted pair cable shall meet or exceed the
permanent link performance requirements specified in TIA/EIA568-B.2 for Category 6, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
.15
Shielded horizontal twisted pair cable shall meet or exceed the
permanent link performance requirements specified in TIA/EIA568-B.2 for Category 6, shielded Twisted Pair (STP).
.16
Category 6 Test Equipment. Category 6 test equipment shall meet
the following minimum criteria:
.1
All test equipment of a given type shall be from the same
manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results
output. Acceptable test equipment manufacturers are
Fluke Corporation, Hewlett-Packard Development
Company, L.P. (Hewlett Packard), or MicroTest Inc.
(Microtest).
.2
Test adapters must be approved by the manufacturer of
the test equipment. Adapters from other sources are not
acceptable.
Baseline accuracy of the test equipment must meet the
.3
requirements of TIA Level III, as indicated by independent
laboratory testing.
.4
Test equipment must be capable of certifying Category 6
UTP to TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 standards.
Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 200
.5
dB to minimize measurement uncertainty.
.6
Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency
sweep data for tests.
.7
Test equipment must include S-Band time domain
diagnostics for NEXT and return loss for accurate and
efficient troubleshooting.
.8
Test equipment must be capable of running individual
NEXT, return loss, etc., measurements in addition to
autotests.
.9
Test equipment must make swept frequency
measurements in compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B
standards.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
.10
.17
4.8
Section 16741
Page 33 of 34
The measurement reference plane of the test equipment
shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment
interface connector. There shall not be a time domain dead
zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from
the measurement.
Category 6 (UTP/STP) Documentation: At a minimum, test reports
shall include the following information for each UTP/STP CAT 6
cabling element tested:
.1
Wiremap results that confirm the cabling has no shorts,
opens, mis-wires, or split, reversed, or crossed pairs, and
that end-to-end connectivity is achieved.
.2
Attenuation data that indicate the worst case result, the
frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the
margin. These tests shall be performed in a swept
frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant
frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is
consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. Information
shall be provided for pairs or pair combinations and in both
directions.
.3
Length (in metres), propagation delay, and delay skew
relative to the relevant limit.
.4
Any individual test that fails the relevant performance
specification shall be marked as a FAIL.
.5
Cable manufacturer and cable model number/type.
.6
Tester, manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware
version, and software version.
.7
Circuit ID number (Cable Tag Id)
.8
Test criteria used.
.9
Overall pass/fail indication.
.10
Date and Time of test.
Factory Acceptance Test – Network Access Closet
.1
The system components that will be Factory Acceptance Tested
are the Network Access Closets. The FAT will evaluate
workmanship and verify construction and components against the
Layout Drawings and associated Component Schedules
submitted to and reviewed by the Consultant.
.2
Provide Record and Shop Drawings to the Consultant for review
at least fifteen (15) Working Days prior to the test.
.3
Prepare a checklist or test sheet using MICROSOFT Excel.
Submit to the Consultant for review, fifteen (15) Working Days
prior to the commencement of the test. The Contractor shall
conduct the test when directed by the Consultant. At a minimum,
the FAT checklist or test sheet must include Products / materials
used in the construction of the Network Access Closet.
CONTRACT NO T-12-16
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND NETWORK ENCLOSURES
DATE: February 2012
4.9
Section 16741
Page 34 of 34
Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
.1
Site Acceptance Tests will evaluate the workmanship and verify
installation against the Installation and Layout Drawings.
.2
Provide Record and Shop Drawings to the Consultant for review
fifteen (15) Working Days prior to the test
.3
Prepare a checklist or test sheet using MICROSOFT Excel.
Submit to the Consultant for review, fifteen (15) Working Days
prior to the commencement of the test. The Contractor shall
conduct the test when directed by the Consultant. At a minimum,
the Consultant and the Region shall witness the test.
.4
At a minimum, the SAT checklist or test sheet must include
verification of the following:
.1
All Products / materials used in the construction of the
Network Access Closet
.2
UPS power distribution and grounding
.3
Utility power distribution and grounding
.4
Fiber-optic cabling installation and termination
.5
CAT6 (UTP/STP) cabling installation and termination
.6
Work Area Outlet installation and termination
.5
Network Access Closet SAT
.1
The Contractor will provide one complete Network Access
Closet, associated Work Area Outlet and Horizontal Cable
for the Network Access Closet SAT. Following acceptance,
the Contractor will be directed to proceed with the
installation of the remaining Network Access Closets, Work
Area Outlets and Horizontal Cabling. The Contractor is to
note that the fiber optic backbone cable installation will be
included in the Network Core Switch Closet SAT.
.2
At a minimum, the complete Network Access Closet for the
SAT will include the installation of the network switch, ,
UTP patch panels, fiber patch panel, power supplies,
horizontal cable terminations, cable management and
patch cords.
.1
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 40 hours of on Site
support beginning immediately after the successful Site
acceptance test for a period of 24 months following the date of
Total Performance of the Work. The Site support shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
.1
Respond within 24 hours to a request for on Site support.
.2
The minimum Site time per call will be four (4) hours.
.3
Travel time shall not be included in the cumulative Site
support allowance.
4.10 Field Support
END OF SECTION